1
Download Mrs S Boyle Psion Teklogix Incorporated C/o RFI
Transcript
1 The Eastgate Office Centre Eastgate Road Bristol BS5 6XX United Kingdom Switchboard: Main Fax: E-mail: Web Site: +44 (0)117 951 5151 +44 (0)117 952 4103 [email protected] www.vca.gov.uk VEHICLE CERTIFICATION AGENCY Mrs S Boyle Psion Teklogix Incorporated C/o RFI Global Services Limited Your Reference: Our Reference: EAE059966 Date: 18 November 2004 Dear Mrs Boyle MANUFACTURER OR ACCREDITED AGENT: Psion Teklogix EEC DIRECTIVE: 72/245 Job No. Vehicle Type/Component Approval No. Index Rev. No. EAE059966 Vehicle Mount Computer Model, 8525 e11*72/245*95/54*3024*00 Not applicable 1. This vehicle type/component has been tested and meets the requirements of the above EEC Directive. I enclose a set of approval documents, comprising the approval, test report and your documentation duly authenticated. 2. If you think there are any errors in the enclosed package, please contact Andrew Meadows, telephone 0117 952 4187 immediately. Please be aware that from the date of issue we have a three week holding period, any corrections required after this time will need to be corrected via an extension, index revision or correction 1 certificate, as appropriate. ROAD TRAFFIC ACT 1988 - SECTION 80 3. The Secretary of State for Transport authorises, under section 80 of the Road Traffic Act 1988, the above manufacturer or accredited agent to apply to the motor vehicle type/part specified, the appropriate mark designated in the Motor Vehicles (Designation of Approval Marks) Regulations 1979, as amended. The conditions attached to this authorisation are set out overleaf. 4. If this approval/extension results in a change being needed to a vehicle information document issued under the goods vehicle or passenger car national type approval scheme, you should notify us (i.e. submit a 'notifiable alteration') as soon as possible, using the address VCA (Whole Vehicle), Room 1.2, The Eastgate Office Centre, Eastgate Road, Bristol BS5 6XX. 5. VCA is continually scrutinising the quality of the service it provides to customers, in order to discover more ways in which the standard can be improved. If you have a specific complaint concerning the way this job has been dealt with, our customer services leaflet gives guidance on the best approach. If you would like a copy, please contact the undersigned. 6. Please note that when e-mailing staff at VCA, the address should be as follows: ‘[email protected]’. 7. Please be aware that we are now using the Adobe 6 version of Acrobat. This can be down loaded from the following site http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readermain.html Yours sincerely Elaine Hill Product Certification h:\s&c\forms\manu1.doc CONDITIONS 3. CONDITIONS FOR MOTOR VEHICLES 1. This Approval may be withdrawn at any time and while held is subject to the following conditions. 3.1 The holder of this approval shall put the approval mark described in the Motor Vehicles (Designation of Approval Marks) Regulation 1979 as amended only on Motor Vehicles fitted with Motor Vehicle parts which Motor Vehicles as fitted with such parts conform with the type of Motor Vehicle approved by as on behalf of the Secretary of State for Transport and only on Motor Vehicles that: 2. Conditions of Motor Vehicle Parts. 2.1 The holder of this approval shall put the approval mark described in the Motor Vehicles (Designation of Approval Marks) Regulations 1979 as amended only on Motor Vehicle Parts that: a. have been manufactured, assembled or completed in factories under his control and b. conform in all material respects with the samples, which were tested before this approval was issued. 2.2 The holder of this approval shall mark his products in the manner set out in the relevant Regulation/Directive as given in the Motor Vehicles (Designation of Approval Marks) Regulations 1979 as amended together with: the approval number allocated by the Secretary of State for Transport. b. his name or trademark c. any other markings specified in the appropriate International Regulation a. have been manufactured, assembled or completed in factories under his control and b. conform in all material respects with the type of Motor Vehicle, which was tested before an approval certificate was issued. 3.2 The holder of this approval shall mark motor vehicles of the type approved, in the manner set out in the relevant Regulation/Directive using the authorised approval mark as given in the Motor Vehicles (Designation of Approval Marks) Regulation 1979 as amended together with the approval number allocated by the Secretary of State for Transport. a. 2.3 The holder of this approval shall be prepared at any time to satisfy Department for Transport officials or agents of the Department,that the quality of the part being produced and marked or intended to be by him with the approval marking conforms in all material respects with that of the samples tested as the International Regulation requires. 2.4 The holder of this approval undertakes to admit duly authorised officials or agents of the Department at all reasonable times to any premises in which parts marked or intended to be marked are being manufactured, assembled or stored and to permit any such official or agent to inspect parts and all records relating to them and their production processes. 2.5 This approval may be suspended or withdrawn by the Secretary of State for Transport at any time without any particular length of notice being given and in the event of that being done the holder will absolve the Secretary of State from any claim for damages or compensation. 3.3 The holder of this approval shall mark Motor Vehicles of the type approved in the manner set out in the relevant Regulation annexed to the United Nations agreement of 1958 as amended using the authorised approval mark which comprises a capital letter E followed by the number 11 within a circle together with the approval number allocated by the Secretary of State for Transport. 3.4 The holder of this approval shall be prepared at any time to satisfy Department for Transport officials or agents of the Department that Motor Vehicles of the type approved which have been produced and marked or that are intended to be marked by him conform in all material respects with the type of vehicle approved. 3.5 The holder of this approval undertakes to admit duly authorised officials or agents of the Department at all reasonable times to any premises in which the Motor Vehicles of the type approved which have been or are intended to be marked are manufactured, assembled or stored and to permit any such official or agent to inspect the Motor Vehicles and all records relating to them and their production processes. 3.6 This approval may be suspended or withdrawn by the Secretary of State for Transport at any time without any particular length of notice given and in the event of that being done the holder will absolve the Secretary of State from any claim for damages or compensation. 1 The Eastgate Office Centre Eastgate Road Bristol BS5 6XX United Kingdom Switchboard: Main Fax: E-mail: Web Site: +44 (0)117 951 5151 +44 (0)117 952 4103 [email protected] www.vca.gov.uk VEHICLE CERTIFICATION AGENCY THE UNITED KINGDOM VEHICLE APPROVAL AUTHORITY Rev 1/03 COMMUNICATION CONCERNING THE APPLICATION OF THE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE OF 20 JUNE 1972 ON THE APPROXIMATION OF THE LAWS OF THE MEMBER STATES RELATING TO A TYPE OF COMPONENT WITH REGARD TO RADIO INTERFERENCE SUPPRESSION (72/245/EEC) AS LAST AMENDED BY 95/54/EC Type Approval No: e11*72/245*95/54*3024*00 Reason for Extension: Not applicable SECTION I 0.1 Make (trade name of manufacturer): Psion Teklogix 0.2 Type and general commercial description(s): Vehicle Mount Computer Model: 8525 0.3 Means of identification of type, if marked on the component: Black on white label stock 0.3.1 Location of that marking: Refer to Document MFG label specification 8525 engineering specification. 0.4 Category of vehicle(2): Not applicable 0.5 Name and address of manufacturer: Psion Teklogix Incorporated 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario L5N 7J9 Canada 0.7 In the case of components and separate technical units, location and method of affixing of the EEC type-approval mark: Refer to Document MFG label specification 8525 engineering specification 18-Nov-2004 0.8 Address(es) of assembly plant(s): As 0.5 above An executive agency of the Department for Transport 72/245/EEC AS LAST AMENDED BY 95/54/EC SECTION II 1. Additional information (where applicable): See Appendix 1 2. Technical service responsible for carrying out the tests: Radio Frequency Investigation Limited 3. Date of test report: 5 November 2004 4. Number of test report: RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A 5. Remarks (if any): See Appendix 2 6. Place: BRISTOL 7. Date: 8. Signature: 9. The index to the information package lodged with the approval authority, which may be obtained on request, is attached. 18 NOVEMBER 2004 A. W. STENNING Head of Product Certification EAE059966 18-Nov-2004 2 72/245/EEC AS LAST AMENDED BY 95/54/EC APPENDIX to EEC Type Approval Certificate No: e11*72/245*95/54*3024*00 concerning the type approval of an electric/electronic sub-assembly with regard to Directive 72/245/EEC as last amended by Directive 95/54/EC 1. Additional information: 1.1 Electrical system rated voltage: The device can be connected to any supply vehicle with a voltage between 10V(DC) and 90V (DC) (i.e 12,24,48, or 72V (DC) 1.2 This ESA can be used on any vehicle type with the following restrictions: Any supply voltage between 10V DC and 90V DC 1.2.1 Installation conditions, if any: See manufacturer’s documentation . 1.3 This ESA can only be used on the following vehicle types: Not applicable 1.3.1 Installation conditions, if any: Not applicable 1.4 The specific test method(s) used and the frequency ranges covered to determine immunity were: Not applicable 1.5 Approved/recognised laboratory (for the purpose of this Directive) responsible for carrying out the test: Radio Frequency Investigation Limited, Hampshire 5. Remarks: None * Delete as applicable (1) If the means of identification of type contains characters not relevant to describe the vehicle, component or separate technical unit types covered by this information document/type-approval certificate, such characters shall be represented in the documentation by the symbol `?' (e.g. ABC??123??). (2) As defined in Annex II A to Directive 70/156/EEC. 18-Nov-2004 3 1 The Eastgate Office Centre Eastgate Road Bristol BS5 6XX United Kingdom Switchboard: Main Fax: E-mail: Web Site: +44 (0)117 951 5151 +44 (0)117 952 4103 [email protected] www.vca.gov.uk VEHICLE CERTIFICATION AGENCY APPROVAL NUMBER: e11*72/245*95/54*3024*00 INFORMATION PACKAGE CONTENTS INDEX REVISION NUMBER: Not applicable Total number of sheets: 327 (Three hundred and twenty seven) Number of separate drawings: 0 (Nil) Number of separate photographs: 0 (Nil) Reasons for Revision: Not applicable EAE059966 Revision date & Office stamp 18-Nov-2004 An executive agency of the Department for Transport INFORMATION DOCUMENT RELATING TO VCA JOB NUMBER EAE059966 RELATING TO TYPE APPROVAL OF AN ESA WITH RESPECT TO ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (72/245/EEC) AS LAST AMENDED BY 95/54/EC. Vehicle Mount Computer Model: 8525 0. GENERAL 0.1 Make (trade name of manufacturer): Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525 0.2 Type and general commercial description (s): Vehicle Mounted Computer Terminal. 0.3 Means of identification of type, if marked on the component: Black on white label stock 0.3.1 Location of that marking: Refer to DOC MFG LABEL SPEC 8525 ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION 0.5 Name and address of manufacturer: Psion Teklogix Inc. 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario L5N 7J9 Canada 0.5.1 Name and address of manufacturer’s representative: Psion Teklogix S.A La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descarted BP421000 13591 Aix-EN-Provence Cedx 3 France 0.7 Location and method of affixing of the EEC approval mark: Refer to DOC MFG LABEL SPEC 8525 ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION 18-Nov-2004 INFORMATION DOCUMENT RELATING TO VCA JOB NUMBER EAE059966 RELATING TO TYPE APPROVAL OF AN ESA WITH RESPECT TO ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (72/245/EEC) AS LAST AMENDED BY 95/54/EC. _______________________________________________________________________ 0.8 Address (es) of assembly plant (s): As manufacturer 1. This ESA shall be approved as a Component / STU. Component 2. Any restrictions of use and conditions for fitting: None The restrictions for use as regards this application are the test configuration used during the test. Any deviation from this configuration may compromise the EMC performance of the system. Appendix 1 The ESA chosen to represent the type: Vehicle Mount Computer Model: 8525 Further details about the equipment under test, accessories, support equipment and interconnection cables are provided in RFI test report serial number RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A, which is enclosed in Appendix 2 of this document. This Appendix (Appendix 1) contains the following:- Documentation Supplied By The Manufacturer 1. Product Specification 2. User Manual 3. Label Diagram 4. Technical Drawings These pages are not included in the total number of pages for this document. 18-Nov-2004 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer Driving Technology ADVANTAGES The 8525 is a Windows CE .NET based vehicle-mount computer engineered to deliver maximum performance, ruggedness and integration, required for mobile data collection in the harshest mobile environments, in and out of the ‘four-walls’. The user-friendly 8525 is designed to deliver Flexibility, Integration, Ruggedness, Ergonomics (FIRE) day-in and day-out. The 8525 can also be configured to operate in Intense and Cold Environments (ICE). The features of FIRE and ICE put the 8525 in a class by itself. Add to this, robust expansion and connectivity options, and it is easy to see why the 8525 is the only choice for use in rugged environments like warehouses, freezers, ports, yards and wide-area mobile applications. And, like the rest of Psion Teklogix’ Next Generation Terminal platform products, the 8525 is based on industry standards to ensure it integrates easily with your existing or future infrastructure. •Extreme Ruggedness: The 8525 is designed to stand up to the harshest and most extreme environments and deliver the solution ‘uptime’ that users expect from Psion Teklogix devices. Rated at IP66, the 8525 is protected against dust and sprays of strong jets of water, all at temperatures as low as -30°C (-22°F)! The 8525 can also withstand substantial shock and vibration transferred from vehicles as they work in rugged indoor and outdoor applications. •Flexibility & Integration: Class-leading flexibility and integration is achieved through the use of standards-based software and hardware components combined with robust expansion capabilities. Based on Windows CE .NET and Intel XScale architecture, the 8525 enables seamless application development and integration capabilities. Compact Flash, SD/MMC and Type III PC-Card along with external port options enable a variety of scanners, imagers, WLAN (802.11 and Narrowband), WWAN (GSM/GPRS, CDMA), etc to combine to make the 8525 as flexible as the application requires even in intense and cold environments. •Ergonomic: The 8525 has been developed to ensure maximum viewing angle and efficiency of use. The 8525 has a logical control layout and an extremely crisp, bright easy-to-read display. 18-Nov-2004 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer Specifications • Intel XScale PXA 255 @ 400MHz • 32KB instruction / 32KB data cache • On-board RAM: 128 MByte SDRAM • On-board ROM: 32 MByte FLASH • Windows CE .NET 4.2 • HTML, XML • CE .NET SDK • Java,Visual C++ • Standard Protocol APIs • Windows Sockets (WinCE) • Keyboards • 3 integrated keyboard formats available - ABC (10 F-keys) - Qwerty (10 F-keys) - Azerty (10 F-keys) • 68 key PC like format • Blue/Green EL backlight • Ergonomic • Dedicated function keys • Epoxy coated elastomeric • Indicators & Controls • Internal 95 dBA beeper w/ volume control • 4 indicators RX/TX, API, SCAN, PWR/CHG - • Long range 900 MHz PC Card RFID reader/writer - future • Tethered reader/writers • IEEE 802.11b 11 Mbps 2.4GHz Compact Flash radio external and internal antenna • Multi-protocol support • IEEE 802.11b/g 54Mbps 2.4 GHz CF radio - future • IEEE 802.11b/g 54Mbps 2.4GHz PC card radio - future • IEEE 802.11a/b/g 54Mbps 2.4GHz PC card radio - future • Standard antenna integrated onto radio card • Next Gen Narrowband 400-500MHz radio - future • Bluetooth SDIO radio (5m range) • GSM/GPRS PC Card radio - future • CDMA - future • Internet Explorer 6 for CE • Open TekTerm • ANSI,TESS terminal emulations (IBM 3270, IBM 5250, HP 2392) • Colour Display • 8525: 1/2 VGA 640x240 (8.8”) • Transmissive TFT industrial for both indoor/sunlight readability • Embedded Memory Display contoller, resolution 16bpp. • CCFL Backlight, 220 cd/m2 backlight with brightness control. • Touchscreen • Passive stylus or finger operation • Rugged 5-wire technology • Enhanced anti-glare coating • One SD I/O (MultiMediaCard) slot • One Type II Compact Flash • Freezer: • Operating temp: -30ºC to +60ºC (-22º F to 140º F) • Storage temp: -35ºC to +70ºC (-31º F to 140º F) • Humidity: 5 - 95% RH condensing with internal heating • Rain/Dust: IEC 529, classification IP66 • 3 axis Vibration: 1.5g RMS PSD (4 – 500 Hz) • 3 axis Shock 30g 11 ms saw tooth • Internal Power supply 10-90VDC designed for forklift power. • 12.6V Li-Ion standard 7530 battery for brown out. • Advanced Smart Battery • Runs off battery under brown out conditions, AC table adapter • Built-in fast charger • >1 week real-time clock backup • Two Type II/one Type III PCMCIA slot • Convenient access to slots via sealed end cap • One Tether Port with: • One RS232 serial port (decoded scanner, printer) • Undecoded scanner port • USB host port • One Port with: • DB9 plug RS232 (optional +5V 500MA on pin 9) • One Port with: High density socket. • One RS232 serial communication port • 1 USB device port • 2 USB host ports • Speaker/Mic connection (future) • SNMP MIB 2 support • Remote software download • Remote WLAN management • Multiple mounting options : • Safety: UL 60950 3rd Ed, CSA 60950-00, LVD EN 60950-1:2001 • EMC: FCC Part 15 Class B • Complies with European R & TTE Directive * Note this product will carry the CE Mark. * Specifications subject to change without notice. • Size: 11 3/4” W x 4 5/8” H x 11 1/2” L • Weight: approximately 9.5 lbs • Includes standard battery, standard radio • Standard: • Operating temp: -20ºC to 60ºC (-4º F to 140º F) • Storage temp: -35ºC to +70ºC (-31º F to 140º F) • Humidity: 5 - 95% RH non-condensing 18-Nov-2004 8525 08/04 A4 UK Psion Teklogix™ is a trademark of Psion Teklogix Inc. Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of Psion Teklogix Inc. or trademarks or registered trademarks of other hardware, software, or service providers and are used herein for identification purposes only. www.psionteklogix.com 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual October 18, 2004 ISO 9001 Certified Quality Management System Part No. 8000038.A 18-Nov-2004 © Copyright 2004 by Psion Teklogix Inc., Mississauga, Ontario This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc., is issued in strict confidence, and is not to be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Teklogix manufactured goods and services. Furthermore, this document is not to be used as a basis for design, manufacture, or sub-contract, or in any manner detrimental to the interests of Psion Teklogix Inc. 18-Nov-2004 All trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Return-To-Factory Warranty Psion Teklogix warrants a return-to-factory warranty for a period of one year from shipment. The warranty on Psion Teklogix manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with, altered, or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Psion Teklogix service organization. See Psion Teklogix terms and conditions of sale for full details. Service When requesting service, please provide information concerning the nature of the failure and the manner in which the equipment was used when the failure occurred. Type, model, and serial number should also be provided. Before returning any products to the factory, call the Customer Services Group for a Return Authorization number. Support Services Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its customers. In North America, these services can be accessed through the Psion Teklogix Helpdesk. The Helpdesk coordinates repairs and training, helps you to troubleshoot problems over the phone and arranges for technicians or engineers to come to your site. For contact information and a listing of worldwide offices, please refer to Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices. Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate and up-to-date. Teklogix Inc. reserves the right to make changes without notice and shall not be held responsible for damages resulting from reliance on the material presented in this manual. 18-Nov-2004 TABLE OF CONTENTS Program License Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I Approvals And Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IX Chapter 1: Introduction 1.1 1.2 1.3 About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About The 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer . 1.3.1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2 The 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer . 1.3.3 8525 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.4 Regulatory Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 5 5 8 9 9 Preparing The 8525 For Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powering Up The 8525 And Configuring The Radio . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Switching The 8525 On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio Installed In The 8525 2.2.3 Assigning An IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4 Name Servers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.5 Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting The 8525 Vehicle-Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 .15 .15 .15 .21 .22 .23 .24 .24 Chapter 2: Basic Checkout 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Features Of The 8525 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Internal Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . Switching The 8525 Vehicle-Mount On And Off . The Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 . . . . . . . .28 .18-Nov-2004 . . . . . . .28 . . . . . . . .29 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 1 Contents 3.4.1 Modifier Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 The Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3 The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 Calibrating The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 8525 Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.2 Onscreen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.3 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.1 Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.2 Scan LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.3 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.4 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Laser Scanners . . . 3.8 Connecting & Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals . . . . . . 3.9 Monitoring The Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Connecting An 8525 To A PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.1 Using Microsoft® ActiveSync® To Work With Files . 3.11 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.1 Caring For The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.2 Cleaning The 8525 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 30 32 32 32 33 33 35 37 37 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 41 41 41 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 . . . . 45 . . . . 46 . . . . 47 . . . . 47 . . . . 48 . . . . 48 . . . . 50 . . . . 50 . . . . 51 .18-Nov-2004 . . . 53 . . . . 55 . . . . 56 Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 2 Navigating In Windows CE .NET And Applications 4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus 4.1.2 Navigating Using The Keyboard . . . . . . . Working With Files, Folders And Programs . . . . . The Startup Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 The Desktop Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Start Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 The Desktop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Security Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.4 Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents 4.5 4.4.6 Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 4.4.7 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Using A Dialogue Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Chapter 5: Configuration 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 Remote Desktop Connection . . . . . Pocket PC Compatibility . . . . . . . The Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . Control Panel Icons . . . . . . . . . . Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 Display Properties . . . . . . . 5.5.2 Keyboard Properties . . . . . . 5.5.3 Volume And Sound Properties. 5.5.4 Power Management Properties. 5.5.5 Stylus Properties . . . . . . . . 5.5.6 Certificate Assignment . . . . . 5.5.7 Narrow Band Radio . . . . . . Bluetooth Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.1 The Devices Tab . . . . . . . . 5.6.2 The Server Tab . . . . . . . . . 5.6.3 The Properties Tab . . . . . . . 5.6.4 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone . . Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.1 Creating A Backup Profile . . . 5.7.2 Restoring A Profile. . . . . . . IPv6 Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanner Properties Setup . . . . . . . 5.9.1 Scanner Options . . . . . . . . 5.9.2 Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9.3 Translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 .63 .63 .64 .68 .68 .70 .79 .80 .82 .84 .85 .97 .98 101 101 103 108 108 111 112 113 113 116 126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 .18-Nov-2004 . . . . . . 133 . . . . . . . 133 . . . . . . . 134 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application 6.1 6.2 The Tekterm Application . . . . . . Additional Keyboard Functions . . . 6.2.1 Function Keys And Softkeys. 6.2.2 Macro Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 3 Contents 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14 4 Changing The Screen Font Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning The Screen Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Task Manager–Switching Between Applications . . . . . . The Tekterm Status Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TESS Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.2 Working With Multiple Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.3 The Field Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.5 Data Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.6 TESS Status Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.7 Lock Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.8 Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.9 Resetting A TESS Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.10 The Local Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.11 Selecting Another Host Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.12 Queuing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANSI Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.2 Sending Data To The Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys . 6.8.4 Block Mode (Local Editing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.5 Working With Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Radio Statistics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.1 802.IQ Stats Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.2 Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . The Tekterm Startup Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working With Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.1 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus . . 6.11.2 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus . . . 6.11.3 Saving Changes To Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values. . . . . . . . . . . Resetting The 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer . . . . . . . . . The Parameters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.1 Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual . . . .135 . . . .135 . . . .136 . . . .137 . . . .137 . . . .138 . . . .138 . . . .138 . . . .139 . . . .139 . . . .143 . . . .144 . . . .144 . . . .144 . . . .145 . . . .145 . . . .146 . . . .146 . . . .146 . . . .147 . . . .147 . . . .148 . . . .149 . . . .150 . . . .151 . . . .152 . . . .153 . . . .153 . . . .154 . . . .155 . . . .158 . . . .159 . . . .159 .18-Nov-2004 . . .159 . . . .160 . . . .160 Contents 6.15 More Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16 Radio Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.1 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.2 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.3 Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.4 User Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.5 Auto Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Scanner Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19 View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19.1 Split Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19.2 Custom Characters (Unicode™) . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20.1 ANSI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20.2 TESS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21 Ports– Tether And Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21.1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options . . . . 6.21.2 Tether, Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings. 6.21.3 Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters . . . 6.22 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22.1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22.2 802.IQ v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 161 163 164 165 167 167 168 168 169 170 172 175 176 194 217 217 218 221 226 226 227 Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 External Bar Code Readers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 7.1.1 PowerScan™ Standard, LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners . . . 231 7.1.2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Bluetooth Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 GPS Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Mounting Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 7.4.1 8525 Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 7.4.2 Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate. . . . . . . . 234 7.4.3 Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Mount. . . . . . . . . . . 237 7.4.4 Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-Nov-2004 . . . . . . 237 7.4.5 8525 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles: . . . . . . . . . . . 238 7.4.6 8525 Installation In Vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 5 Contents 7.4.7 Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Chapter 8: Specifications 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer Specifications . . . . . . . Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bar Code Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.1 External Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Scanner Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.1 PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs 8.4.2 PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs . . . . Internal Lithium-Ion Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 .245 .246 .246 .246 .246 .248 .250 Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices A.1 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1 A.2 Product Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1 A.3 Worldwide Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2 Appendix B: Port Pinouts B.1 Tether Port Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1 B.2 RS232 Port Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1 B.3 DB-26 Auxiliary Port Pinout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2 Appendix C: USB Setup Application C.1 USB Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.1 Launching The Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.2 Pre-Installation: Updating usbstor.inf And wceusbsh.inf . C.1.3 Installation: Installing The 8525 As a Device On Your PC C.1.4 Post Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1 .C-1 .C-2 .C-4 .C-5 18-Nov-2004 6 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual PROGRAM LICENSE AGREEMENTS Microsoft's End User License Agreement You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed by Psion Teklogix Inc. from Microsoft Licensing Inc. or its affiliates (‘MS”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT PSION TEKLOGIX INC. FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following license: • You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE. • NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. PSION TEKLOGIX INC. HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS RELIED UPON PSION TEKLOGIX INC. TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE. • NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS” and with all faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY, AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU. ALSO, THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE 18-Nov-2004 WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual I License Agreement INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE, THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE NOT BINDING ON, MS. II • Note on Java Support. The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java. Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed, manufactured, or intended for use or resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. Sun Microsystems, Inc. has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer. • No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.OO). • Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation. • SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device, and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE. • EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and 18-Nov-2004 destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual License Agreement Meetinghouse Data Communications, Inc. End User License Agreement End User License Agreement: ATTENTION: PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ("LICENSE") CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLATION. USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS SET FORTH BELOW. USING THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE LICENSE TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS, YOU MUST RETURN THE SOFTWARE FOR A FULL REFUND. IF THE SOFTWARE IS SUPPLIED WITH ANOTHER PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT FOR A FULL REFUND. Software License Terms: The following terms govern your use of the enclosed Software unless you have a separate written agreement with Meetinghouse Data Communications, Inc. herein also known as “MDC”. License Grant: MDC grants you a non-exclusive and non-transferable license to Use one copy of the Software. "Use" means storing, loading, installing, executing or displaying the Software. “Software” means software, documentation and any fonts accompanying this License whether on disk, in read only memory, on any other media or in any other form. You may not modify the Software or disable any licensing or control features of the Software. If the Software is licensed for "concurrent use", you may not allow more than the maximum number of authorized users to Use the Software concurrently. The Software is licensed as a "Shareware" version, on one computer only. You may use the Software distributed and licensed as Shareware on a trial basis only. The shareware version of the Software may be distributed freely without any associated fees to other parties who wish to try the software as long as the Software is distributed within an exact copy of the original MDC self-extracting installation file. In other words, nothing may be left out of the Shareware as distributed on MDC's web site at http://www.mtghouse.com. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual III License Agreement All permanent licenses are prepaid and the Software is licensed to you by MDC. You own the media on which the Software is recorded but MDC and/or MDC’s licensor(s) retain title to the Software. The Software and any copies which this License authorizes you to make are subject to this License. Permitted Uses and Restrictions: This License allows you to install and use the Software on a single computer at a time. This License does not allow the Software to exist on more than one computer at a time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes only. The backup copy must include all copyright information contained on the original. Except as expressly permitted in this License, you may not, in whole or part, decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble, modify, rent, lease, loan, sublicense, distribute or create derivative works based upon the Software, or transmit the Software over a network. You may not copy the Software onto any bulletin board or similar system. You agree that you will not utilize any information obtained from MDC or obtained or learned in the course of using the Software, to develop or improve technology with similar functionality to the Software, nor will you directly or indirectly assist any other party in doing so. You further agree that you will not separate the various modules of the software for their different purposes, if any. High Risk Activities: The Software is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring failsafe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the Software could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage ("High Risk Activities"). Accordingly, MDC and its suppliers specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities. You agree that MDC and its suppliers will not be liable for any claims or damages arising from the use of the Software in such applications. Ownership: The Software is licensed, not sold. The Software is owned and copyrighted by MDC or its third party suppliers. Your license confers no title or ownership in the Software and is not a sale of any rights in the Software. You acknowledge such ownership and 18-Nov-2004 intellectual property rights and will not take any action to jeopardize, limit or interfere in any manner with MDC's or its suppliers' ownership of or rights with respect IV Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual License Agreement to the Software. The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and by international treaties. MDC's third party suppliers may protect their rights in the event of any violation of these License Terms. Termination: Your rights under this License will terminate automatically without notice from MDC if you fail to comply with any term(s) of this License. Upon termination, you must immediately destroy the Software, together with all copies, adaptations and merged portions in any form. U.S. Government Restricted Rights: The Software and documentation have been developed entirely at private expense and are provided as "Commercial Computer Software" or "restricted computer software". They are delivered and licensed as "commercial computer software" as defined in DFARS 252.227-7013 (Oct 1988), DFARS 252.211-7015 (May 1991) or DFARS 252.227-7014 (Jun 1995), as a "commercial item" as defined in FAR 2.101 (a), or as "Restricted computer software" as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (Jun 1987) (or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause), whichever is applicable. You have only those rights provided for such Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the MDC standard software agreement for the product. Export Law Assurances: You may not use or otherwise export or reexport the Software except as authorized by United States law and the laws of the jurisdiction in which the Software was obtained. In particular, but without limitation, the Software may not be exported or reexported (i) into (or to a national or resident of) any U.S. embargoed country or (ii) to anyone on the U.S. Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S. Department of Commerce's Table of Denial Orders. By using the Software, you represent and warrant that you are not located in, under control of, or a national or resident of any such country or on any such list. Limited Warranty on Media: (if applicable) MDC warrants the media on which the Software is recorded to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of original retail purchase. Your exclusive remedy under this para18-Nov-2004 graph shall be, at MDC's option, a refund of the purchase price of the product containing the Software or replacement of the Software which is returned to MDC or a Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual V License Agreement MDC authorized representative with a copy of the receipt. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE MEDIA INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO NINETY (90) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF ORIGINAL RETAIL PURCHASE. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THE LIMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH HEREIN IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LICENSOR SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY BY JURISDICTION. Disclaimer of Warranty on Software: You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the Software is at your sole risk. The Software is provided "AS IS" and without warranty of any kind and MDC and MDC’s licensor(s) (for the purposes of warranty and liability, MDC and MDC's licensor(s) shall be collectively referred to as "MDC") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR SATISFACTORY QUALITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. LICENSOR DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. FURTHERMORE, LICENSOR DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION IN TERMS OF THEIR CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY LICENSOR OR AN LICENSOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND NOT LICENSOR OR AN LICENSOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE) ASSUME THE 18-Nov-2004 ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WAR- VI Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual License Agreement RANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THE TERMS OF THIS DISCLAIMER DO NOT AFFECT OR PREJUDICE THE STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER ACQUIRING LICENSOR PRODUCTS OTHERWISE THAN IN THE COURSE OF A BUSINESS, NEITHER DO THEY LIMIT OR EXCLUDE ANY LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY CAUSED BY LICENSOR’S NEGLIGENCE. Limitation of Liability: UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT PROHIBITED BY LOCAL LAW, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL LICENSOR, ITS SUBSIDIARIES, AFFILIATES, OR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT, LOST DATA, OR DOWNTIME COSTS) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS LICENSE, THE USE, INABILITY TO USE, OR THE RESULTS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE, WHETHER BASED IN WARRANTY, CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHER LEGAL THEORY, AND WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall MDC's total liability to you for all damages exceed the price paid for the license to use the Software, regardless of the form of the claim. Government End Users: If the Software is supplied to the United States Government, the Software is classified as "restricted computer software" as defined in clause 52.227-19 of the FAR. The United States Government's rights to the Software are as provided in clause 52.227-19 of the FAR. Controlling Law and Severability: This License shall be governed by the laws of the United States and the State of New Hampshire. As to any dispute relating to this License or the Software, you further agree to jurisdiction and venue in the Federal and State Courts located in the State of New Hampshire. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision, or portion thereof, to be unenforceable, the remainder of this License shall continue in full force and effect. Acknowledgement: Your use of any software produced by MDC is based only on your18-Nov-2004 acknowledgement that you have read this License, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual VII License Agreement MDC Acknowledgments: This product includes software developed by MDC and its licensors. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)". This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Complete Agreement: This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings regarding such subject matter. No amendment to or modification of this License will be binding unless in writing and signed by MDC. NOTE: EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THESE WARRANTY TERMS DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT, OR MODIFY, AND ARE IN ADDITION TO, THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE LICENSE OF THE SOFTWARE TO YOU. Meetinghouse Data Communications, Inc. 150 Greenleaf Avenue, Unit F Portsmouth, NH 03801 Revised 8/12/2002 18-Nov-2004 VIII Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual APPROVALS AND SAFETY SUMMARY Declaration Of Conformity Product: Application of Council Directive(s): Conformity Declared to Standards: Manufacturer: Year of Manufacture: Manufacturer’s Address in the European Community: Type of Equipment: Equipment Class: 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer EMC Directive: 89/336/EEC Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC EN 55022: 1998 + Am 1, Class B; EN 61000-3-2; EN 61000-3-3 EN 55024:1998; EN 61000-4-2; ±4kV CD; ±8kV AD EN 61000-4-2; ±4kV CD; ±8kV AD EN 61000-4-3; 3V/m, 80-1000 MHz EN 61000-4-4; ±1kV Power lines EN 61000-4-5; ±1kV Differential mode EN 61000-4-6; 3VRMS, 150kHz-80MHz EN 61000-4-11; AC Mains Ports PSION TEKLOGIX INC. 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L5N 7J9 2003 PSION TEKLOGIX S.A. La Duranne; 135 Rue Rene Descartes; BP 421000 13591 Aix-En-Provence Cedex 3; France Information Technology Equipment Commercial and Light Industrial I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above directives and standards. Manufacturer: Legal Representative Rob Williams Vice President of Engineering Psion Teklogix Inc. Ontario Domique Binckly Vice President International Sales Psion Teklogix S.A. France 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual IX Approvals And Safety Summary This equipment complies with Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Psion Teklogix, the party responsible for compliance, may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. 1. FCC Information to Users For Class B Unintentional Radiators: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 2. Warning to Users Warning: X Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Psion Teklogix Inc. could void the user's authority to operate the 18-Nov-2004 equipment. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Approvals And Safety Summary RF EXPOSURE Warning: To satisfy FCC RF exposure requirements for vehicle mount transmitting devices, a separation distance of 20 cms should be maintained between the antenna of this device and persons during device operation. To ensure compliance, operations at closer than this distance is not recommended. DO NOT REMOVE COVERS OR OPEN ENCLOSURES To avoid injury, the equipment covers and enclosures should only be removed by qualified service personnel. Do not operate the equipment without the covers and enclosures properly installed. CAUTION Use of the Vehicle Mount Computer while charging the fork truck battery is prohibited. CAUTION Use of additional wiring and attachments not recommended or sold by the manufacturer may result in fire, electric shock or personal injury. CAUTION If using an AC adaptor, use only the AC adaptor recommended by manufacturer. CAUTION Do not operate the vehicle-mount computer with a damaged cord or plug. Replace immediately. CAUTION Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on, tripped over or 18-Nov-2004 otherwise subjected to damage or stress. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual XI Approvals And Safety Summary CAUTION An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Use of an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock. CAUTION To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug the vehicle-mount computer from the DC source before attempting any maintenance or cleaning. Warning: Physically disconnect the 8525 from the vehicle battery during battery charging (into AC outlet). 18-Nov-2004 XII Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.2 Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 1.3 About The 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer 1.3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2 The 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer . 1.3.4 Regulatory Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . 9 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 1 Chapter 1: Introduction About This Manual 1.1 About This Manual This manual describes how to configure, operate and maintain the Psion Teklogix 8525 vehicle-mount computer. Chapter 1: Introduction provides a basic overview of the 8525 vehicle-mount. Chapter 2: Basic Checkout describes the steps required to get the 8525 ready for operation. Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 describes the 8525 features and provides a description of the keyboard, how to navigate in Microsoft® Windows® CE, and so on. Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET describes the Microsoft® Windows® CE desktop and how to use it. This chapter also outlines the basics of moving around a Windows CE .NET window, selecting and opening icons, files, folders and working with a Windows dialogue box. Chapter 5: Configuration provides a description of the Windows CE .NET Control Panel and how to use it to configure the 8525, along with the scanners attached to the unit, and so on. Chapter 6: Tekterm Application describes TESS and ANSI operations. This chapter also provides descriptions of the Tekterm parameters. Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories describes the peripherals and accessories available for your 8525. Chapter 8: Specifications details radio, vehicle-mount computer and battery specifications. Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices provides the helpdesk phone number at the Mississauga, Ontario, Canada office and details the support services available. This appendix also lists the worldwide office addresses and phone numbers. Appendix B: Port Pinouts includes 8525 pinouts. 18-Nov-2004 Appendix C: USB Setup Application describes the USB application. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 3 Chapter 1: Introduction Text Conventions 1.2 Text Conventions Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information. Important: These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment. Warning: These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury, equipment damage or data loss. 18-Nov-2004 4 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 1: Introduction About The 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer 1.3 About The 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer The 8525 is a ruggedized vehicle-mount computer, running the Microsoft® Windows CE .NET operating system. It is intended for use in commercial and light industrial applications with a focus on real time wireless data transactions. All possible bar code input methodologies are supported by a variety of scanners available. 1.3.1 Features • Processor And Memory: - 400MHz ARM RISC (400 MIPS). - 32KB instruction/32KB data cache - on-board RAM: 128mByte SDRAM - on-board ROM: 64 MByte FLASH. • Operating System - Windows CE .NET 4.2 • Wireless Communication:. - IEEE 802.11b 11 Mbps 2.4 GHz Compact Flash radio external and internal antenna - IEEE 802.11b 11 Mbps 2.4 GHz external antenna PC Card Slot radio - standard antenna integrated onto radio card - Future radio additions: - IEEE 802.11g 22Mbps 2.4GHz Compact Flash radio - IEEE 802.11a 54Mbps 5 GHz Compact Flash radio - IEEE 802.11a 54Mbps 5 GHz PC Card radio - NextGen Narrowband 400-500 MHz radio - GSM/GPRS PC Card radio (for future release) - Bluetooth SD I/O radio 2.4 GHz (5m range) • Application Software - Internet Explorer 6 for CE - Open Tekterm 18-Nov-2004 - ANSI, TESS terminal emulations (IBM 3270, IBM 5250, HP 2392) User Interface • Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 5 Chapter 1: Introduction Features - - - • • • 6 Colour display - 1/2VGA 640x240 Transmissive TFT industrial - temp: -30˚ C to 85˚ C - 8.8 inch, 18 bit - Sunlight readable - Embedded Memory Display controller, resolution 16bpp Touchscreen - passive stylus or finger operation - signature capture Keyboards - 3 integrated keyboard formats: - ABC (10 Function Keys) - Qwerty (10 Function Keys) - Azerty (10 Function Keys) - 68 key PC like format - green EL backlight - ergonomic - dedicated function keys Indicators and Controls - internal 95 dBA beeper with volume control - 4 indicators: RX/TX, API, SCAN, PWR/CHG RFID Applications (for future release) - tethered readers/writers - Future addition: - long range 900 MHz PC card RFID reader/writer - multi-protocol support Internal Expansion Slots - one SD I/O (Multimedia Card) slot - one Type II Compact Flash - two Type II/one Type III PCMCIA slot(s) Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 1: Introduction Features • • • • • - easy access to slots via sealed end cap External Ports - One Tether port with: - one RS232 serial port (decoded scanner, printer) - undecoded scanner port - USB host port - One Port with: - DB9 plug RS232 - One Port with: High density socket - one RS232 serial comm. port - 1 USB device port - 2 USB host ports Power Management - Internal power supply 10-90VDC designed for forklift power - 12.6V Li-Ion standard battery for brown-out - Advance Smart Battery - Built-in fast charger - 1 week real-time clock backup SNMP MIB 2 support (for future release) Remote software download Remote WLAN management 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 7 Chapter 1: Introduction The 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer 1.3.2 The 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer Figure 1.1 8525 With Qwerty Keyboard 18-Nov-2004 8 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 1: Introduction 8525 Ports 1.3.3 8525 Ports Auxiliary Port Tether Port RS232 Serial Port Figure 1.2 Ports 1.3.4 Regulatory Labels Warning: Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Figure 1.3 FCC Label 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 9 Chapter 1: Introduction Regulatory Labels Figure 1.4 RA2020 Label, EU Figure 1.5 RA2020 & SD-BT2 Label, FCC/IC/Australia/New Zealand Figure 1.6 RA2020 & SD-BT2 Label, EU 18-Nov-2004 10 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 1: Introduction Regulatory Labels Figure 1.7 SD-BT2 Label, EU/FCC/IC/Australia/New Zealand 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 11 18-Nov-2004 2 BASIC CHECKOUT 2.1 Preparing The 8525 For Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Powering Up The 8525 And Configuring The Radio . . . . . . . 2.2.1 Switching The 8525 On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio Installed In The 8525 2.2.3 Assigning An IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.4 Name Servers Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.5 Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.5.1 Rearranging Preferred Networks . . . . . . . . . 2.2.5.2 Deleting A Preferred Network . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.5.3 Changing Network Properties . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Calibrating The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Resetting The 8525 Vehicle-Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 15 15 15 21 22 23 23 23 24 24 24 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 13 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 2: Basic Checkout Preparing The 8525 For Operation 2.1 Preparing The 8525 For Operation Typically, 8525 vehicle-mounts are configured at the factory and arrive ready for use. Although the 8525 is equipped with an internal Compact Flash, a PCMCIA slot and SD I/O slot, these slots are not intended for user modification. If a device needs to be changed or added in these slots, contact qualified Psion Teklogix personnel. Refer to Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices for the service number closest to you. 2.2 Powering Up The 8525 And Configuring The Radio 2.2.1 Switching The 8525 On To switch the 8525 on: • Press the <ENTER/ON> key. A splash screen displaying the Psion Teklogix logo and the Windows CE .NET logo appears. When Windows® CE has successfully loaded, the startup desktop is displayed. Note: The screen may go blank for a few seconds after the splash screen loading bar reaches the end. This is part of the normal Windows CE .NET cold boot process. The desktop is displayed after a few moments. 2.2.2 Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio Installed In The 8525 The most common 802.11b settings are configured as defaults. However, there are some fields that must be completed, including the SSID of your access point and the security methods implemented in the network (including access keys). Important: If the 8525 is equipped with a radio that has never been configured, the radio settings dialogue box opens automatically when the unit is powered on. In this case, skip to Step 4 on page 17. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 15 Chapter 2: Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio Installed In The 8525 To configure the 802.11b radio: 1. Tap on the Windows® Start button in the taskbar, and tap on Settings>Network and Dial-up Connections. Figure 2.1 Network And Dial-Up Connections Note: You can also press <CTRL> <ESC> to display the Start Menu. 2. Choose the radio icon to open the Wireless LAN Settings window – in the sample screen below, this is labelled PTXWLAG. Figure 2.2 Wireless Settings Window 18-Nov-2004 16 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio Installed In The 8525 3. Wireless Statistics Tab When you choose the Wireless LAN icon, a Wireless Statistics window is displayed. Figure 2.3 Wireless Statistics This tab lists your radio statistics. Choosing the Zero button resets the statistics of the last four items – Packets IN, Packets OUT, IN errors and OUT errors. • Tap the stylus on the Wireless Information tab. 4. Wireless Information Tab Figure 2.4 Wireless Information Tab This tab display existing networks to which you can connect, and it allows you to add a new network or modify the settings for an existing network. Note: Connect button – To force connection to a specific, existing network, 18-Nov-2004 highlight the network to which you want your 8525 to connect, and tap the Connect button. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 17 Chapter 2: Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio Installed In The 8525 This tab lists available networks – any access points that are broadcasting an SSID, and it lists preferred networks – networks that you have configured. Since access points are generally secure, they will most likely not be listed here. By default, the 8525 attempts to connect to preferred networks. This behaviour can be changed by enabling (√) ‘Automatically connect to non-preferred networks’ in the Advanced dialogue box (page 23). • To add a new configuration, double-tap on the Add New... item listed with the networks. A blank Wireless Properties dialogue box is displayed. 5. Wireless Properties Figure 2.5 Wireless Properties Dialogue Box Network name (SSID): • Type the appropriate SSID (Service Set Identifier) in the ‘Network name (SSID):’ text entry field at the top of this dialogue box. The Network name field can contain a maximum of 32 characters. The name assigned here is listed as a preferred network. Important: Keep in mind that the 8525 will only communicate with access points that are configured with the same SSID. Ad Hoc And Infrastructure If you are using an “Infrastructure” network – one in which 8525s must pass data through an access point – leave the checkbox next to ‘This is an ad hoc network’ blank. If you are using an “Ad Hoc” network – a network in which 8525s pass data 18-Nov-2004 directly to other 8525s without an access point – tap on the checkbox next to ‘This is an ad hoc network’ to enable (√) Ad Hoc. 18 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio Installed In The 8525 Encryption WEP (Wired-Equivalent Privacy) encryption prevents others from accidentally accessing your network. If you are not using encryption, you can choose ‘Disabled’ from the dropdown encryption menu. Otherwise, leave this field as is. Authentication 802.11 supports a number of subtypes of network authentication services: Open, Shared, WPA and WPA-PSK. Using Open authentication, any wireless station can request authentication. The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an authentication management frame that contains the identity of the sending station. The receiving station then sends back a frame that indicates whether it recognizes the identity of the sending station. Using Shared authentication, each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802.11 wireless network communications channel. WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) uses the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) to provide strong data encryption, and offers two user authentication and key management methods. The first method of user authentication is intended for environments using a centralized Authentication Server, such as RADIUS. User authentication is based on IEEE 802.1X and mutual authentication based EAP. In environments where a centralized Authentication Server or EAP framework is not available, user authentication is based on a ‘Pre-Shared Key’ method – WPA-PSK. If you are using Pre-Shared Key authentication, you will need to manually enter a password (Master Key) in the Access Point or Wireless Router and enter the same password in each client device that accesses the wireless network. The manually configured WPA password (Master Key) automatically starts the TKIP data encryption process. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 19 Chapter 2: Basic Checkout Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio Installed In The 8525 Network Key: This text box is used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point. • To assign a Network key, tap the stylus in the checkbox next to ‘The key is provided automatically’ to remove the check mark (√) disabling this option. Disable this option to access Network Key & Key Index fields. Figure 2.6 Accessing Network Key And Key Index Key Index: This field is used to identify the WEP key. • Enter a value from 1 to 4. Enable 802.1x authentication “802.1X” is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area networks. It provides authentication for user devices attached to an Ethernet network, whether wired or wireless. A security protocol packet such as TLS or MD5 encapsulated in an “EAP” is used in conjunction with the “802.1x” standard to authenticate users at the MAC layer. Available EAPs are listed in the dropdown menu next to the ‘EAP’ option. • To activate “802.1X”, tap on the checkbox next to ‘Enable 802.1x authentication’, and press the <SPACE> key to enable (√) it. EAP Type (Extensible Authentication Protocol): This dropdown menu lists the EAP types available on your system. The items in this dropdown menu will vary depending on your network18-Nov-2004 setup. Keep in mind also that some authentication protocols require that you select 20 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Checkout Assigning An IP Address a ‘Certificate’. By selecting the Properties button, you will be able to select a Certificate. “Certificate Assignment” on page 84 provides a website that outlines how to create certificates for your network. 6. Saving and exiting the radio setup. Once you have completed your configuration, press <ENTER> or tap on OK. The connection you created will be listed in the Wireless Information tab as a preferred network. The radio will search for the SSID and will compare the WEP and authentication information you specified. If there is a match between your 8525 settings and the access point settings, the 8525 will communicate on the network through the access point. 2.2.3 Assigning An IP Address If your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address. Figure 2.7 Configuring An IP Address Note: Choosing the Renew button forces the 8525 to renew or find a new IP address. This is useful if, for example, you are out of communication range for a longer period of time and your 8525 is dropped from the network. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 21 Chapter 2: Basic Checkout Name Servers Tab To define a static IP address: • Tap the Configure... button. Figure 2.8 Defining An IP Address • • Tap on the radio button next to Specify an IP address. Tap on each field, and type an IP, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway address. Tap on OK to save your information. 2.2.4 Name Servers Tab Note: If DHCP is enabled, name server addresses are assigned automatically. • • In the IP Information tab, tap on the Configure... button. (“Figure 2.8” on page 22 is the window from which you choose the Configure... button.) Tap on the Name Servers tab. Figure 2.9 Name Servers Tab 18-Nov-2004 The DNS and WINS fields in the Name Servers tab allow you to specify additional WINS and DNS resolvers. The format for these fields is ###.###.###.###. 22 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Checkout Advanced Features 2.2.5 Advanced Features To display the Advanced Wireless Settings dialogue box: • Tap the Advanced... button in the Wireless Information tab. This window lists the available preferred networks. Figure 2.10 Advanced Settings 2.2.5.1 Rearranging Preferred Networks The 8525 attempts to connect with the networks listed in this dialogue box in sequence, beginning at the top of the list. If you need to rearrange this list of networks – move networks up and down in the list: • • 2.2.5.2 In the networks list, tap on the network you want to move up or down in the list. To move the highlighted item upward or downward in the list, tap the Up or Down button, and press <ENTER>. Deleting A Preferred Network To delete a network from this list: • Tap on the network in the list to highlight it. • Tap the Delete button, and press <ENTER>. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 23 Chapter 2: Basic Checkout Changing Network Properties 2.2.5.3 Changing Network Properties To change the properties of an existing preferred network: • Highlight the network that you want to modify. • Tap the Properties button, and press <ENTER>. • Make any necessary changes in the Wireless Properties dialogue box, and press <ENTER> to save the changes. 2.3 Calibrating The Touchscreen Before using your 8525, you will need to calibrate the touchscreen. Refer to “Calibrating The Touchscreen” on page 32 for details. 2.4 Resetting The 8525 Vehicle-Mount Important: Because Psion Teklogix cannot guarantee what has been saved (registry) after a reset, this should be considered as a last resort. To reset the 8525: • Press and hold down the <BLUE> key and the <ENTER/ON> key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds. A reset results in a complete reboot of the unit. All RAM memory contents are lost. While it is most likely that the contents of the flash memory and memory card will be preserved, Psion Teklogix cannot guarantee this. When the 8525 is reset, the screen displays the Psion Teklogix and Microsoft® Windows® CE. NET splash screen before displaying the startup desktop. Note: You do not need to reset your 8525 after configuring the radio. 18-Nov-2004 24 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual GETTING TO KNOW YOUR 8525 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Features Of The 8525 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Internal Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching The 8525 Vehicle-Mount On And Off . . . . . . . The Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Modifier Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1.1 Activating Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1.2 Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 The Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3 The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 Calibrating The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 8525 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1.1 PWR/CHG – Charge LED . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1.2 RX/TX – Radio Traffic LED. . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1.3 Scan LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1.4 API – User Application LED . . . . . . . . . 3.6.2 Onscreen Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.3 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.1 Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.2 Scan LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.3 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.4 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Laser Scanners . . . 3.8 Connecting & Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals . . . . . . 3.9 Monitoring The Network Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Connecting An 8525 To A PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.1 Using Microsoft® ActiveSync® To Work With Files . 3.11 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.1 Caring For The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.2 Cleaning The 8525 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . 27 . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . 32 . . . . . . . 32 . . . . . . . 32 . . . . . . . 33 . . . . . . . 33 . . . . . . . 34 . . . . . . . 34 . . . . . . . 35 . . . . . . . 35 . . . . . . . 35 . . . . . . . 37 . . . . . . . 38 . . . . . . . 38 . . . . . . . 38 . . . . . . . 39 . . . . . . . 39 . . . . . . . 40 . . . . . . . 40 . . . . . . . 41 . . . . . . . 42 . . . . . . . 42 . . . . . . . 42 .18-Nov-2004 . . . . . . 43 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 25 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 Features Of The 8525 3.1 Features Of The 8525 Inside The Radio Dome - SDIO/MMC Slot – for Bluetooth radio or additional storage memory - PCMCIA slot - supports 2-Type II PCMCIA or 1-Type III PCMCIA card - Compact Flash slot - for 802.11b radios or additional storage memory Radio Dome Figure 3.1 Front Of 8525 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 27 Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 The Internal Backup Battery Tether Port Auxiliary Port RS232 Serial Port Figure 3.2 Ports 3.2 The Internal Backup Battery The 8525 vehicle-mount is equipped with an internal battery that will provide backup power to the unit for up to fifteen minutes of normal operation. After 15 minutes, the unit will shut off to preserve the contents of RAM. The backup battery is not user accessible. It must be replaced by authorized Psion Teklogix personnel. 3.3 Switching The 8525 Vehicle-Mount On And Off Switching On The 8525 • • Press the <ENTER/ON> key. When all four LEDs flash orange, release the <ENTER/ON> button. A splash screen displaying the Psion Teklogix logo and the Microsoft® Windows CE. NET logo appears followed by the startup desktop. 18-Nov-2004 Note: If the 8525 is in suspend state, pressing <ENTER/ON> key ‘wakes’ the unit from this state. The screen in which you were working before the computer entered suspend state is displayed. 28 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 The Keyboard Switching Off The 8525 Important: Keep in mind that turning off the 8525 does not result in a complete reboot; rather, the unit enters a power-saving, “suspend” state. When the 8525 is turned on from suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds. To switch off the 8525: • Press the <BLUE> key, and then press the <ENTER/ON> key. Important: If the word ‘BLUE’ is displayed in uppercase in the taskbar area at the bottom of the screen, this key is locked “on” – the 8525 will not switch off. Press the <BLUE> key again to unlock it; then press <BLUE> <ENTER/ON> to switch the 8525 off. If, however, you’ve disabled the “Blue Key” in the ‘One Shot’ dialogue box (see “Keyboard One Shot Modes” on page 72), the 8525 can be turned off even when the <BLUE> key is locked ‘on’. 3.4 The Keyboard The 8525 offers three keyboard layouts – Qwerty, ABC and Azerty. Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer. Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, the differences are noted. 3.4.1 Modifier Keys The <SHIFT>, <CTRL>, <ALT>, <BLUE> and <ORANGE> keys are modifier keys. Pressing a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed. For example, a square bracket is printed in orange print above the <4> key. Pressing the <ORANGE> key followed by the <4> key displays a square bracket rather than the number 4. The <SHIFT>, <CTRL> and <ALT> keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded (two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 29 Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 Activating Modifier Keys 3.4.1.1 Activating Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed once, it is displayed in lowercase letters in the taskbar at the bottom of the 8525 screen. For example, if the <CTRL> key is pressed, ctrl key is displayed at the bottom of the unit screen. Once another key is pressed, the modifier key becomes inactive and disappears from the taskbar. 3.4.1.2 Locking Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked’ on. A ‘locked’ modifier key is displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar. For example, pressing the <BLUE> key twice locks it on – it is displayed as BLUE KEY in the taskbar at the bottom of the computer screen. The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock or turn it off. Once a modifier key is unlocked (pressed a third time), the uppercase representation at the bottom of the screen is no longer displayed. Note: The locking function of the <ORANGE> and <BLUE> keys can be disabled so that pressing either of these keys once will lock the keys ‘on’. If you disable the ‘One Shot’ function of either of these keys, pressing the <BLUE> and/or <ORANGE> key once will lock the key ‘on’. Pressing the same key a second time will unlock or turn it ‘off’. Refer to “Keyboard One Shot Modes” on page 72 for details. 3.4.2 The Keys The <BLUE> And <ORANGE> Keys The <BLUE> and <ORANGE> modifier keys provide access to additional symbols and keys. These additional symbols and keys are colour coded in blue and orange print above the keyboard keys. Press the <BLUE> key to access functions or characters displayed in blue print on the keyboard. Press the <ORANGE> key to access functions or characters displayed in orange print on the keyboard. The <SHIFT/CAPS> Key The <SHIFT/CAPS> key is used to display uppercase alpha characters. Pressing 18-Nov-2004 <BLUE><SHIFT> turns the <CAPS> key on so that all alpha characters are printed in uppercase until the <BLUE><SHIFT> sequence is pressed again. 30 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 The Keys The Arrow Keys The Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow – up, down, left and right. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear. The <INS> Key The <INS> key inserts a character at the cursor position. The <DEL> Key The <DEL> key erases the character at the cursor position. The <BKSP> Key The <BKSP> key (sometimes referred to as destructive backspace) moves the cursor one character to the left, erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke. The <CTRL> And <ALT> Key The <CTRL> and <ALT> keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent. The <TAB> Key Typically, the <TAB> key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward. The <ESC> Key Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialogue box or activity and return to the previous one. The <SPACE> Key Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialogue box, pressing the <SPACE> key enables (√) or disables a checkbox. The <HOME> Key The <HOME> key moves the cursor to the top of the form or page. The <END> Key 18-Nov-2004 The <END> key moves the cursor to the bottom of the form or page. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 31 Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 The Keypad Backlight The <PgUp> And <PgDn> Keys The <PgUp> key displays the previous screen of information. The <PgDn> key displays the next screen of information. Function Keys And Macro Keys In addition to alphanumeric keys that are directly accessible on the keyboard (no key combination is required) and the keys described in this chapter, the 8525 keyboard is also equipped with thirty function keys and twelve macro keys. Function keys <F1> through <F30> and Macro keys <M1> to <M12> can be used with the CE operating system or another application. All function keys and macro keys can be custom defined for each application. The Tekterm application utilizes these keys. Refer to “Additional Keyboard Functions” on page 133 for details. 3.4.3 The Keypad Backlight The intensity of the keypad backlight and the conditions under which this backlight is activated can be configured using the Keyboard icon in the Windows CE .NET Control Panel. The behaviour of the keypad backlight is tailored in the Keyboard Properties dialogue box. Note: Refer to “Keyboard Backlight” on page 72 for details about this option. Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only. 3.5 The Display 8525s are equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions. The backlight switches on when a key is pressed. The backlight intensity and the duration of time that the backlight will remain at full intensity can be specified in the Display Properties dialogue box in the Windows CE .NET Control Panel. Note: Refer to “Display Backlight” on page 69 for details about the Display Properties dialogue box. 3.5.1 Calibrating The Touchscreen If your 8525 touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, use the Stylus Properties dialogue box in the Windows CE .NET Control Panel to recalibrate the screen. 18-Nov-2004 32 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 8525 Indicators • In the Control Panel, choose the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window. Figure 3.3 Stylus Icon • Select the Calibration tab, and then tap on the ‘Recalibrate’ button. Figure 3.4 Calibration Screen • Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen. 3.6 8525 Indicators 8525s use LEDs (Light Emitting Diode), onscreen messages and audio tones as indicators. 3.6.1 LEDs The 8525 is equipped with four tri-coloured LEDs. This section outlines what these LEDs indicate. Important: If an LED is illuminated in red, the operator should be cautious 18-Nov-2004 as this generally indicates an abnormal operating condition or active laser emission. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 33 Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 PWR/CHG – Charge LED LEDs Figure 3.5 Keyboard LEDs 3.6.1.1 PWR/CHG – Charge LED The lower-right LED is reserved for internal charger/power status. This LED turns solid green when the unit is receiving AC power. A blinking green LED indicates that the unit is taking power from the backup battery. 3.6.1.2 RX/TX – Radio Traffic LED The upper-left LED on your 8525 flashes either orange or green to indicate when the radio transmits and receives data. Note: Keep in mind that while the standard 802.11b radio supports the18-Nov-2004 transmit/receive LED, not all radios support this function. 34 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 Scan LED Function Radio Traffic LED Behaviour Radio Transmit Radio Receive LED flashes orange. LED flashes green. Table 3.1 Transmit and Receive LEDs 3.6.1.3 Scan LED Successful scans are indicated in two ways – with a scan LED and with an audio tone. Function Scan in progress Successful scan Unsuccessful scan Scan LED Behaviour LED displays solid red during scan. LED displays solid green after decode. Off when scan ended. LED flashes red. Table 3.2 Scan LED 3.6.1.4 API – User Application LED This indicator is available for user-loaded custom Windows CE .NET applications. Refer to the 8525 SDK Manual for details about this LED. Neither Windows CE .NET nor Tekterm use this LED. 3.6.2 Onscreen Indicators The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators. 18-Nov-2004 Figure 3.6 Taskbar Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 35 Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 Onscreen Indicators This display changes dynamically, and only those icons that are applicable are displayed. For example, if a radio is not installed in your 8525, the radio signal icon is not displayed in the taskbar. Windows Start Button You can display the Start Menu by tapping on the Windows® Start button in the taskbar. Modifier Key Indicators <SHIFT>, <CTRL>, <ALT>, <BLUE> and <ORANGE> are modifier keys that have onscreen indicators to show when a key is active or locked. If a modifier key is pressed once to activate it, the key is displayed in the taskbar in lowercase characters – for example, pressing the <BLUE> key once displays blue key in the taskbar. If a modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked on’ and the onscreen indicator is displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar – for example, pressing <BLUE> twice displays BLUE KEY in the taskbar. 802.11 Radio Signal Quality Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer, filled bars within this icon. Good Reception Weak Reception No Radio Link Narrow Band Radio Signal Quality Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer, filled bars within this icon. Good Reception Weak Reception No Radio Link The radio signal is now determined when the 8525 receives a message. If the unit 18-Nov-2004 receives no messages within a second, the "no signal" icon is displayed. The signal strength icon shows the following cases: "No signal", "1%to 25% bar", "26% to 50% bar", "51% to 75% bar" and "75% to 100% bar". 36 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 Audio Indicators Link Status The Narrow Band radio has three link state icons displayed in the taskbar. An uppercase ‘LINK’ with a green background indicates the radio is powered on and that the unit is online and locked onto a channel. A lowercase ‘Link’ with a yellow background indicates that the radio is powered on but the 8525 is not online or not locked onto a channel. A lowercase ‘Link’ with a yellow background and a red ‘X’ through it indicates that the radio is not powered on, is not online and is not locked onto a channel. Bluetooth Radio If a Bluetooth radio is installed in your 8525, this icon is displayed in the taskbar. Security Level Security levels can be set to limit user access to 8525 settings. In addition, applications can be restricted to prevent inadvertent changes. AC Power Icon This AC icon is displayed in the taskbar when the unit is using AC power. 3.6.3 Audio Indicators The 8525 beeper provides a variety of sounds and can be configured to emit a sound when a key is pressed, a keyboard character is rejected, scan input is accepted or rejected or an operator’s entry does not match in a match field. Note: Refer to “Volume And Sound Properties” on page 79 for details about the Volume & Sound Properties dialogue box. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 37 Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 Scanning 3.7 Scanning The scanner used with your unit is configured using the Scanner Properties dialogue box in the Control Panel. Note: Refer to “Scanner Properties Setup” on page 114 for details. The 8525 supports a variety of scanners one dimensional (1D) laser scanners, “Scanning Techniques” outlines the mechanics of a successful scan. In addition, review “Scan LED Indicators” on page 38 to better understand how to interpret whether or not a bar code has been successfully scanned. Finally, “Troubleshooting” on page 39 provides some helpful suggestions should the scan fail. 3.7.1 Scanning Techniques Note: External scanners can only be connected to the 8525 tether port. • • • • • Hold the scanner at an angle. Do not hold it perpendicular to the bar code. Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code. In this position, light can reflect back into the scanner’s exit window and prevent a successful decode. Scan the entire bar code. Make certain that the scan beam crosses every bar and space on the bar code, including the margins on either end of the symbol. Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes. Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together. 3.7.2 Scan LED Indicators The 8525 scanner LED (the upper-right LED) indicates whether or not your scan is successful. The LED behaves as follows: • • • Scan In Progress: scan LED displays solid red colour. Successful Scan: scan LED displays solid green colour and turns off when the scan is ended. Unsuccessful scan: scan LED flashes red. A bar code icon appears on the screen during a scan. While the scanner beam is active, the onscreen message states – SCANNING. If the scan is successful, the bar 18-Nov-2004 code data is displayed on the screen until the scan trigger is released. 38 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 Troubleshooting 3.7.3 Troubleshooting If the scanner is not working, investigate the following: • Is the 8525 on? • Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the 8525 you are using. Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the bar code. • Check the bar code to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different bar code to verify that the problem is not with the bar code. • Check that the bar code is within the proper range. • Does the vehicle-mount display the warning without scanning? This suggests a hardware problem in the 8525. • Is the laser beam scanning across the bar code? • Once the scan beam has stopped, check the scanner window for dirt or fogging. 3.7.4 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Laser Scanners • Turn the 8525 on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely. Important: • If an aiming dot is available on the scanner, the dot will be enabled for a configurable time period (including off), after which normal scanning begins. Refer to “Dot Time (msec)” on page 116 for details. Double-clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immediate scan. Note that the aiming dot is standard on long-range and high visibility internal scanners. Aim at the bar code and press the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 39 Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 Connecting & Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals 3.8 Connecting & Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals Tethered peripherals such as scanners and printers connect to the vehicle-mount computer with a quick release, circular connector. When a peripheral is connected to the vehicle-mount, the 8525 detects the peripheral and loads the necessary drivers for it. An icon in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen provides a visual representation of the peripheral and indicates that it is ready for operation. To attach the peripheral to the round, tether port on the side of the 8525: • Insert the barrel of the plug into the tether port and rotate slowly until it clicks into place. The red dot on the port and on the connector should be aligned. Tether Port Figure 3.7 The Tether Port To remove the peripheral: • Grasp the shell of the plug, and pull it back gently to unlock and release the connector. Important: Never attempt to disconnect a peripheral by pulling the connector by the wire. The connector is locked into place and can only be unlocked and removed by pulling back the plug shell. 3.9 Monitoring The Network Connection If your vehicle-mount is equipped with a wireless LAN radio, it will typically 18-Nov-2004 associate with the nearest access point. The radio signal quality meter in the taskbar indicates the relative strength of the communication link. 40 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 Connecting An 8525 To A PC To access the radio signal icon from the keyboard: • Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar to display the Wireless Statistics dialogue box. Note: Moving in and out of the radio coverage area can have varying effects on a network session. At times, you may need to renew your connection by logging in again. 3.10 Connecting An 8525 To A PC To pass information between an 8525 and a PC or laptop, you’ll need to connect them using an Auxiliary Port Cable (PN CA2200). This cable is equipped with two USB Host I/F connections (for devices such as a mouse or keyboard) and one USB Device I/F connection (to, for example, connect a PC or laptop computer to the 8525). Auxiliary Connector USB Connector Figure 3.8 Auxiliary Port Cable • • Attach the auxiliary connector to the auxiliary port on the 8525 – the port closest to the vehicle-mount power cable. 18-Nov-2004 Attach the USB connector to your PC or laptop. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 41 Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 Using Microsoft® ActiveSync® To Work With Files 3.10.1 Using Microsoft® ActiveSync® To Work With Files Before communication can begin between an 8525 and a PC, ActiveSync® – Microsoft PC connectivity software – must be installed on your PC. Once the devices are cabled together, running ActiveSync on the PC will allow you to: • View 8525 files from Windows Explorer. • Drag and drop files between the 8525 and the PC in the same way that you would between PC drives. • Back up 8525 files to the PC, then restore them from the PC to the vehicle-mount again, if needed, and so on. To install ActiveSync, follow the step-by-step instructions provided with the program’s setup wizard. Refer to the following website for details: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/resources/downloads/pocketpc/activesync35.mspx Note: You’ll need the USB setup utility to configure the .ini file. For information about this USB application, refer to Appendix C: USB Setup Application. 3.11 General Maintenance 3.11.1 Caring For The Touchscreen The top of the touchscreen is a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside. The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches. Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic, or crack the internal conductive coating. If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments, consider applying a disposable screen protector (PN 1008009). These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen. When they become scratched and abraded, they are easily removed and replaced. The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen: • mustard, • sodium hydroxide, • concentrated caustic solutions, • benzyl alcohol, and 18-Nov-2004 • concentrated miner acids. 42 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525 Cleaning The 8525 3.11.2 Cleaning The 8525 Important: • • • Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean. Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the vehicle-mount unit. Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen, use isopropyl alcohol. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 43 18-Nov-2004 4 WORKING WITH WINDOWS CE .NET 4.1 Navigating In Windows CE .NET And Applications 4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus 4.1.2 Navigating Using The Keyboard . . . . . . . 4.2 Working With Files, Folders And Programs . . . . 4.3 The Startup Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.1 The Desktop Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2.1 Using The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2.2 Customizing The Taskbar . . . . . . 4.4 The Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 The Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Security Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The System Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cycle Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.6 Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.7 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Using A Dialogue Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 45 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 51 55 56 55 53 56 57 57 58 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 43 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET Navigating In Windows CE .NET And Applications 4.1 Navigating In Windows CE .NET And Applications Graphic user interfaces like Windows CE .NET for portable devices and desktop Windows (2000, XP, etc.) utilize ‘point and click’ navigation. An equivalent keyboard shortcut is also available for every ‘point and click’ action. Windows CE .NET supports the same ‘point and click’ user interface and keyboard shortcuts as desktop Windows with one difference – the ‘point and click’ action is accomplished using a touchscreen rather than a mouse. Actions can be performed using any combination of keyboard shortcuts or touchscreen tapping (provided your 8525 is equipped with a touchscreen). 4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus Note: If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately, it may need recalibration. Refer to “Calibrating The Touchscreen” on page 32. An 8525 equipped with a touchscreen has a stylus – a pointing tool that looks like a pen – that is used to select objects on the touchscreen. Note: To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only the stylus (pen) supplied with your 8525. To open a file, launch an applet or open a folder: • Double-tap the stylus on the appropriate icon. To navigate through a dialogue box – for example, display the information in a tab, choose a radio button, check (√) a checkbox and so on: • Tap the stylus on a tab, radio button, checkbox and so on. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 45 Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET Navigating Using The Keyboard 4.1.2 Navigating Using The Keyboard If your touchscreen has been disabled, you can use the keyboard rather than a stylus to choose icons and navigate dialogue boxes, display the desktop, and so on. If your unit has already been fully configured and your application is launched at startup, you’ll have little need for keyboard navigation. Operation Key or Key Combination Switch between active applications Open task manager Move the cursor Open file, folder or icon Exit & Save Close/Exit & Do Not Save Navigate Dialogue Boxes Select Radio Button/Press Button Go to Start Menu <ALT> <TAB> <ALT> <ESC> Arrow keys <ENTER> <ENTER> <ESC> <TAB> To move cursor up <SHIFT> <TAB> To display the contents of the next ‘tab’ in a dialogue box <CTRL> <TAB> <SPACE> <BLUE><0> Table 4.1 Keyboard Navigation Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer, the 8525 does not support key chording (pressing two keys at the same time). You must press one key followed by the next in sequence. Refer to “Working With Files, Folders And Programs” on page 47 for additional details about keyboard navigation. 18-Nov-2004 46 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET Working With Files, Folders And Programs 4.2 Working With Files, Folders And Programs Figure 4.1 Working With Windows Icons • Double-tap on the appropriate icon – either a folder icon, a program icon or a file icon – to open or launch your selection. 4.3 The Startup Desktop When the 8525 boots up, the startup desktop (shell) is displayed. Any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately. Note: The startup folder is located in \Windows\StartUp and \Flash Disk\StartUp. Figure 4.2 The 8525 Startup Desktop • Double-tap on the icon to open a window or, in the case of an application icon, launch an application. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 47 Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET The Desktop Icons 4.3.1 The Desktop Icons The icons displayed in the startup desktop operate in much the same way as those displayed on any standard PC desktop that is running Windows®. My Computer Choosing this icon displays the contents of your 8525 computer. If you’re not sure how to work with the files, folders and programs displayed, refer to “Working With Files, Folders And Programs” on page 47. Recycle Bin This option temporarily contains items that were deleted, allowing you to either permanently delete or restore these items. Internet Explorer Choosing this icon launches Internet Explorer – a standard Windows CE .NET version. Keep in mind that your supervisor will need to set up access using the Internet Options and the Network and Dial-up Connections icons in the Control Panel. Remote Desktop Connection This option allows your 8525 to communicate with a remote desktop PC. “Remote Desktop Connection” on page 63 provides a website with step-by-step instructions. 4.3.2 The Taskbar 18-Nov-2004 Figure 4.3 The Taskbar 48 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET Using The Taskbar The 8525 is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the screen. It displays icons through which you can view the internal battery capacity, the radio signal quality of your unit, and so on. If the vehicle-mount is attached to a peripheral device, an associated icon is displayed. In addition, the taskbar displays the application(s) currently running on your unit and the security level assigned to your 8525. The taskbar also displays active modifier keys – <SHIFT>, <ALT>, <CTRL>, <BLUE> and <ORANGE>. Keys that have been locked “on” are displayed in uppercase letters. For example, if you press the <CTRL> key twice to lock it “on”, it is displayed as CTRL KEY in the taskbar. 4.3.2.1 • 4.3.2.2 Using The Taskbar Using the stylus, tap on the indicator you want to view – the radio icon for example – to display a dialogue box outlining radio communication information. Customizing The Taskbar To customize the taskbar so that it displays only those icons you require: • From the Start Menu, tap on the Settings option, and then on the Taskbar and Start Menu option The Taskbar and Start Menu dialogue box is displayed. Figure 4.4 Taskbar And Start Menu Settings • Tap the stylus on the items you want to activate or deactivate. A check mark indicates active items. Note: The Advanced tab allows you to tap on a Clear button to delete 18-Nov-2004 the contents of the Documents folder. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 49 Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET The Start Menu 4.4 The Start Menu Note: Some of the Start Menu items may be disabled based on the 8525’s current security settings. The Start Menu lists the operations you can access and work with. It is available from the startup desktop or from within any application. To display the menu: • Tap on the Windows® Start button in the taskbar. Tap on the item in the menu with which you want to work. Figure 4.5 Start Menu 4.4.1 The Desktop Choosing the Desktop option from the Start Menu displays the 8525 desktop. 18-Nov-2004 50 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET Security Levels 4.4.2 Security Levels Choosing the Security option from the Start Menu displays a dialogue box in which you can define the access level for the 8525 – Supervisor or User. Figure 4.6 Security Level Assigning The Supervisor Security Level The security level is represented by an icon in the shape of a lock in the taskbar. The security levels define the options accessible to the operator in the Start Menu and the taskbar. By default, the security level is set to User, restricting access to only the most basic Start Menu items. To allow access to all the Start Menu and taskbar options: • • • Tap on the radio button next to Supervisor. Tap the stylus in the Password field, and type the Supervisor level password – default password is 123456. Tap on OK – you can now access all menu items in the Start Menu and icons in the taskbar. Accessing Teklogix Level Security Important: The Teklogix security level is reserved for authorized Psion Teklogix personnel only. Before you can access Teklogix security level, you need to set the security level to Supervisor. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 51 Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET Security Levels In the Security Level dialogue box (see Figure 4.6 on page 51): • Tap on the Configure button. Figure 4.7 Configuring Security Levels • Tap on the checkbox next to Allow Teklogix Security Level to enable (√) this option, and then tap on OK. Figure 4.8 Security Levels The Teklogix level security is now available in the Security Level dialogue box. • Tap on the radio button next to Teklogix. To activate this security level, you’ll need to enter the appropriate Psion Teklogix level password in the Password field. Changing A Password Note: Keep in mind that this is the same password as that assigned through the Password control panel applet. Refer to “Control Panel Icons” on page 64. 18-Nov-2004 To assign a password: • Choose a security level, and enter the existing password in the Password field • Choose the Set Password button. 52 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET Programs A dialogue box labelled Password Properties is displayed. • • Type the new password in the Password: text box In the Confirm Password: text box, retype the new password. Configuring Security Choosing the Configure button displays the Configure Security dialogue box. Figure 4.9 Configuring Security In addition to allowing the operator to access the Teklogix security level (see “Accessing Teklogix Level Security” on page 51), this dialogue box allows you to determine which security levels will have an associated icon displayed in the taskbar. By default, a security icon is not displayed for user-level security. 4.4.3 Programs • Tap on Programs to display a sub-menu of options. Figure 4.10 Program Sub-Menu 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 53 Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET Programs This sub-menu allows you to choose ActiveSync and Command Prompt, and you can access the Internet Explorer, installed applications (e.g., Open Tekterm), Remote Desktop Connection and Windows Explorer. ActiveSync® This option allows you to connect to another device using ActiveSync. Command Prompt Command Prompt is used to access the DOS command prompt. At the prompt, you can type DOS commands such as dir to display all the directories in the drive. Internet Explorer The 8525 is equipped with Microsoft® Internet Explorer consistent with all Windows CE .NET devices on the market. You can access the Internet Options icon through the Start Menu under Settings>Control Panel or by double-tapping on the desktop icon labelled My Computer and then, double-tapping on the Control Panel icon. Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop Connection is an 8525 application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a “session” on the Server machine using the 8525 (Windows CE .NET device). “Remote Desktop Connection” on page 63 provides a website with details about this option. Windows Explorer Windows Explorer installed on your 8525 is consistent with all Windows CE .NET 4.2 devices. You can access this option either from the Start Menu under Programs>Windows Explorer. 18-Nov-2004 54 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET Shortcuts 4.4.4 Shortcuts Figure 4.11 Shortcuts Sub-Menu The System Tray If your touchscreen is not enabled, you can use the System Tray option to access the icons in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. The taskbar displays indicators such as a radio signal icon and the security level. These indicators are attached to dialogue boxes that provide additional information. • Choose System Tray from the Start Menu. When System Tray is chosen, the taskbar icons become accessible. To display the dialogue box attached to an icon: • • Use the arrow keys to highlight an icon – for example – the security icon. Press <ENTER> to display the security level dialogue box. Cycle Tasks When Cycle Tasks is selected (and the Task Manager is not open), you can cycle through active applications. To choose this option: • • Choose Cycle Tasks, or Press <ALT> <TAB>. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 55 Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET Settings The Task Manager The Task Manager option allows you to switch to another task or to end an active task. To display the task manager window: • • Tap on Task Manager in the Start Menu, or Press <ALT> <ESC>. Figure 4.12 Task Manager 4.4.5 Settings • Tap on Settings to display a sub-menu of options. Figure 4.13 Settings Sub-Menu Control Panel The Control Panel contains applets used to configure hardware, the operating system and the shell. If your 8525 is running with the Psion Teklogix Tekterm application or another application, additional configuration applets may appear in the Control Panel. 18-Nov-2004 56 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET Run Network And Dial-Up Connections The Network and Dial-up Connections window allows you to configure the 8525 radio or execute an existing configuration. Refer to “Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio Installed In The 8525” on page 15 for radio setup details. Taskbar And Start Menu The Taskbar and Start Menu option displays a dialogue box in which you can customize the taskbar, choosing which options will be displayed. Refer to “Customizing The Taskbar” on page 49 for additional details about this option. 4.4.6 Run Choosing the Run option from the Start Menu displays a dialogue box in which you can enter the name of the program, folder or document you want to open or launch. Figure 4.14 Run Dialogue Box 4.4.7 Shutdown Choosing Shutdown displays a sub-menu of options, including Suspend, Warm Reset and Cold Reset. 18-Nov-2004 Figure 4.15 Shutdown Sub-Menu Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 57 Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET Using A Dialogue Box Note: This menu varies slightly depending on the security level chosen. When the 8525 is set to User level, the Shutdown option is replaced by Suspend. A sub-menu is not available. At Teklogix security level, an additional option is available in the sub-menu – Bootloader. This option behaves like cold-reset, except that the 8525 starts Bootloader rather than Windows CE .NET. Suspend The Suspend option suspends the 8525 immediately – this is equivalent to turning the vehicle-mount off. Warm Reset The Warm Reset option resets the 8525, leaving all saved files and (registry) settings intact. Any unsaved data is lost. Cold Reset The Cold Reset option resets the 8525. Any files not stored in permanent memory are lost. However, the registry settings are saved. 4.5 Using A Dialogue Box A dialogue box (like the samples in Figure 4.16) appears when you need to make selections and enter further information. Checkbox Dropdown Menu Button 18-Nov-2004 58 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET Using A Dialogue Box Tabs Radio Button Textbox Figure 4.16 Navigating Dialogue Boxes Dialogue boxes contain one or more of the following elements: Tab: A tab separates different elements of a dialogue box. Tap on a tab to display the associated information. Textbox: A textbox requires that you type information. Highlight the textbox with the stylus and then type the appropriate information. Dropdown: This type of menu is identified by up and down arrows next to the dropdown menu to indicate that additional options are available. Tap the stylus on the arrow to display the options in the menu. Checkbox: This box allows you to select or deselect an option. To select or deselect a checkbox, tap the stylus on the checkbox to select (√) or deselect it. Radio buttons: These buttons allow you to choose from a number of options. For example, in the sample screen in Figure 4.16 on page 59 you can choose to ‘Obtain an IP address via DHCP’ or ‘Specify an IP address’. Tap the stylus on the button to select or deselect it. Buttons: This type of button allows you to ‘Save’, ‘Delete’ and so on the options you’ve chosen in a dialogue box. Tap the stylus on the button to activate it. Saving Your Choices: Once you’ve made all your changes, tap on OK to save your changes and exit the window. Note: A dialogue box item that is displayed in grey text indicates18-Nov-2004 that it is not currently available. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 59 18-Nov-2004 5 CONFIGURATION 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 Remote Desktop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pocket PC Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Panel Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1.1 Display Background . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1.2 Display Appearance . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1.3 Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2 Keyboard Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2.1 Key Repeat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2.2 Keyboard Backlight . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2.3 Keyboard One Shot Modes . . . . . . 5.5.2.4 Keyboard Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2.5 Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2.6 Scancode Remapping . . . . . . . . . 5.5.3 Volume And Sound Properties . . . . . . . . . 5.5.3.1 Volume Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.4 Power Management Properties . . . . . . . . . 5.5.4.1 Power Suspend. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.4.2 Card Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.5 Stylus Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.5.1 Setting Double-Tap Sensitivity . . . . 5.5.5.2 Touchscreen Calibration . . . . . . . . 5.5.5.3 Options – Disabling The Touchscreen . 5.5.6 Certificate Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.7 Narrow Band Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.7.1 Info Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.7.2 Channel Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.7.3 Protocol Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.7.4 Power Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.7.5 Radio Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Bluetooth Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 . . . . . . . 63 . . . . . . . 63 . . . . . . . 64 . . . . . . . 68 . . . . . . . 68 . . . . . . . 68 . . . . . . . 69 . . . . . . . 69 . . . . . . . 70 . . . . . . . 71 . . . . . . . 72 . . . . . . . 72 . . . . . . . 73 . . . . . . . 75 . . . . . . . 77 . . . . . . . 79 . . . . . . . 80 . . . . . . . 80 . . . . . . . 81 . . . . . . . 82 . . . . . . . 82 . . . . . . . 83 . . . . . . . 83 . . . . . . . 84 . . . . . . . 84 . . . . . . . 85 . . . . . . . 86 . . . . . . . 89 . . . . . . . 92 .18-Nov-2004 . . . . . . 95 . . . . . . . 96 . . . . . . . 98 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 61 Chapter 5: Configuration 5.6.1 The Devices Tab. . . . . . . . . 5.6.2 The Server Tab . . . . . . . . . 5.6.3 The Properties Tab . . . . . . . 5.6.3.1 Active Conn. Tab . . . . 5.6.4 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone. . . 5.7 Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7.1 Creating A Backup Profile . . . 5.7.2 Restoring A Profile . . . . . . . 5.8 IPv6 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Scanner Properties Setup . . . . . . . 5.9.1 Scanner Options . . . . . . . . . 5.9.2 Bar Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9.2.1 Code 39 Settings . . . . 5.9.2.2 Code 128 Settings . . . 5.9.2.3 EAN 13 Settings . . . . 5.9.2.4 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . 5.9.2.5 UPC And EAN Settings 5.9.2.6 UPC A Settings. . . . . 5.9.2.7 UPC E Settings . . . . . 5.9.2.8 Codabar. . . . . . . . . 5.9.2.9 Code 93. . . . . . . . . 5.9.2.10 Code 11 . . . . . . . . 5.9.2.11 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . 5.9.2.12 MSI Plessey . . . . . . 5.9.2.13 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . 5.9.2.14 IATA 2 of 5 . . . . . . 5.9.3 Translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 101 102 103 103 109 109 112 113 114 114 117 118 120 121 122 123 123 124 124 124 125 125 126 126 127 127 18-Nov-2004 62 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Remote Desktop Connection 5.1 Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop Connection is an 8525 application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a “session” on the Server machine, using the 8525 (Windows CE .NET device). Refer to the following website for step-by-step information about setting up this connection: http://www.microsoft.com/WindowsXP/pro/using/howto/gomobile/remotedesktop/default.asp 5.2 Pocket PC Compatibility The 8525 supports the AYGShell API set that allows PocketPC-compatible applications to run on the vehicle-mount. Microsoft® Windows® CE.NET 4.2 is designed to include application programming interface (API) compatibility support for the Microsoft Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002 shell in 8525s running Windows® CE.NET 4.2. The website listed below describes the APIs exposed through AYGShell and the application compatibility between Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002-based applications and Windows CE .NET 4.2-based devices: http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-us/dncenet /html/WINCENET_CEPCC_App.asp 5.3 The Control Panel The Windows CE .NET Control Panel provides a group of icons through which you can set a variety of system-wide properties, such as mouse sensitivity, network configuration and the desktop color scheme. Note: If you are uncertain how to move around a dialogue box and make selections, review “Using A Dialogue Box” on page 58. When the 8525 boots up, the startup desktop (shell) is displayed, and any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately. To access the Windows CE .NET Control Panel: • Use the stylus to tap on the Windows Start button in the taskbar to display the Start Menu. Tap on Settings>Control Panel. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 63 The Control Panel folder contains icons used in the setup of your 8525. Figure 5.1 Control Panel 5.4 Control Panel Icons The Windows CE .NET Control Panel provides a group of icons that allow you to customize and adjust settings on your 8525. Date/Time Allows you to set the current Month, Date, Time and Time Zone on your unit. Display Changes the appearance (window colour scheme) on the unit desktop. This applet can also be used to adjust the backlight level. Keyboard Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated characters. It also allows you to adjust the keyboard backlight threshold and intensity. Additional tabs also allow the configuration of macros and scanner key remapping. Volume & Sound 18-Nov-2004 Allows you to adjust the volume of the beep that is emitted to indicate events like warnings, key clicks and screen taps. Chapter 5: Configuration Control Panel Icons Sounds (wave files) cannot be reproduced on 8525 units. The beeper volume and the conditions under which it sounds are tailored from within the application installed on your unit. Mouse Properties Allows you to customize the sensitivity and speed of the stylus double-tap. Owner Provides fields in which you can specify owner information. A ‘Notes’ tab allows additional information to be entered and displayed when the unit is powered up. ‘Network ID’ tab information is used to access network resources. (This information should be provided by your System Administrator.) Password Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit. Once assigned, password access cannot be circumvented so it is important that you write down your password and keep it in a safe place. Refer to “Security Levels” on page 51 for details. Power Allows you to switch to Suspend state, define which Card Slots are active and to turn power for the card slots (PCMCIA and SD/MMC) on and off. Note that a battery status tab is visible only when the 8525 is set to the Teklogix security level. Regional Settings Allows you to specify the local language the display text will use along with the format of numbers, currency, time and date for your region. Remove Programs Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit. To remove a pro18-Nov-2004 gram, select it and then click on the Remove button. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 65 Chapter 5: Configuration Control Panel Icons Stylus Adjusts how Windows CE .NET recognizes your double-tap (as slow or rapid successive taps). Under the ‘Calibration’ tab, you can recalibrate your touchscreen by tapping on the ‘Recalibrate’ button and following the directions on the calibration screen. System Displays system and memory properties. Under the Memory tab, you can allocate memory between storage memory and program memory. Dialing Specifies dialing settings, including area code, country code, dial type and the code to disable call waiting. You can store multiple patterns – for example, ‘Work’, ‘Home’, and so on using this dialogue box. Certificates A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate. The certificate assigned through this icon is used to ensure that the submitted public key is, in fact, the public key that belongs to the submitter. The client checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that the client explicitly trusts. “Certificate Assignment” on page 84 directs you to the appropriate setup information. PC Connection Enables direct connections to a desktop computer. Selecting the ‘Change Connection’ button allows you to change the type of direct connect to your PC. Teklogix Scanners Used to set up scanner parameters and choose the bar code symbologies 18-Nov-2004 that the 8525 scanner will successfully read. 66 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Control Panel Icons Network And Dial-up Connections Displays a network window from which the 8525 radio can be configured and an existing configuration can be executed. Refer to “Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio Installed In The 8525” on page 15 for details. Internet Options Used to configure your Internet browser including options such as identifying the default and search page that the browser applies when connecting to the Internet, setting the cache size, specifying the Internet connection options, and defining the security level that is applied when browsing. SNMP SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is the protocol used to monitor and manage devices attached to a TCP/IP network. This feature is reserved for future use. Bluetooth A short-range wireless technology that enables data communication between devices. It also provides the capability to use a Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone as a data modem, exchanging information with other Bluetooth devices and providing network access. Total Recall This is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to maintain applications and setting over cold boots. This utility is based on a backup and restore concept and is extended to incorporate powerful advanced features. IPv6 Support Refers to a new Internet Protocol specification (version 6) that has been published to use 128-bit IP addresses (replacing version 4). 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 67 Chapter 5: Configuration Basic Setup Narrow Band Radio This icon is displayed only if a Narrow Band radio is installed in the unit. It provides access the Narrow Band setup screens. 5.5 Basic Setup 5.5.1 Display Properties • In the Control Panel, choose the Display icon. Figure 5.2 Choosing The Display Icon 5.5.1.1 Display Background The Background tab allows you to adjust the 8525 display background. • In the Display Properties dialogue box, open the Background tab. Figure 5.3 Display Contrast Properties This option allows you to change the background colour or add an image. 68 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 5: Configuration Display Appearance 5.5.1.2 • Display Appearance In the Display Properties dialogue box, open the Appearance tab. Figure 5.4 Display Appearance Properties This dialogue box allows you to customize the display colour scheme. 5.5.1.3 Display Backlight The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time when the 8525 is in use (key press, scanner trigger or data received from the host). The Display Properties dialogue box in the Control Panel allows you to specify the intensity of the backlight along with how long the display will maintain the specified intensity. Note: Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only. • In the Display Properties dialogue box, open the Backlight tab. Figure 5.5 Display Backlight Properties 18-Nov-2004 Note: Backlight changes take affect immediately. You do not need to reset the 8525. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 69 Chapter 5: Configuration Keyboard Properties Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the backlight. Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity, and sliding it to the right raises the intensity. Bright For The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at the configured intensity when a unit is not in use. Dim For The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at half the configured intensity (dimmed backlight) when a unit is not in use. External Power Checkbox When you select (√) the checkbox next to ‘When using external power keep the backlight always ON.’, the backlight remains ON at the configured intensity when the 8525 is operating with external power (not internal battery power). If the 8525 is drawing power from a battery, this option is ignored and the other parameters defined in Display Properties dialogue box take affect. 5.5.2 Keyboard Properties This icon displays the Keyboard Properties dialogue box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys, the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the <BLUE> and <ORANGE> modifier keys. This dialogue box also allows you to define macro keys and Unicode characters. • In the Control Panel, choose the Keyboard icon. 18-Nov-2004 Figure 5.6 Choosing The Keyboard Icon 70 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Key Repeat 5.5.2.1 • Key Repeat In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box, open the Repeat tab. Figure 5.7 Key Repeat Properties Enable Character Repeat Tapping in the checkbox next to this option enables (√) the key behaviour you specify in this dialogue box. Repeat Delay The repeat delay chosen for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat characters. Sliding the Repeat Delay bar to the left increases the delay between key repeats while sliding the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time. Repeat Rate The value assigned for the Repeat Rate parameter determines how quickly the key you press repeats and is measured in characters per second (cps). Sliding the bar to the left slows the repeat rate, and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate. Note: Use the field at the bottom of this dialogue box to test the repeat delay and rate settings you’ve chosen. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 71 Chapter 5: Configuration Keyboard Backlight 5.5.2.2 • Keyboard Backlight In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box, open the Backlight tab. Figure 5.8 Keyboard Backlight Properties Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the 8525 keyboard backlight. Sliding the bar to the left darkens the keyboard backlight intensity, and sliding it to the right lightens the intensity. ON For The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the keyboard backlight stays on when a unit is not in use. Note: Tapping in the checkbox next to ‘When using external power, keep the backlight always ON’ (√) forces the keypad backlight to remain on when the unit is operating with external power such as vehicle battery or A/C adaptor. 5.5.2.3 • Keyboard One Shot Modes In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box, open the One Shots tab. 18-Nov-2004 Figure 5.9 Keyboard One Shot Properties 72 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Keyboard Macro Keys When these options are enabled (√), the <ORANGE> and <BLUE> keys only remain active until the next key is pressed. If the ‘One Shots’ options are disabled (the checkbox is left blank), the <ORANGE> and <BLUE> keys are locked ‘on’ when pressed only once; they remain ‘on’ until they are pressed a second time to unlock them. Note: Keep in mind that checking the taskbar lets you know whether or not these keys are locked on. When the <ORANGE> and <BLUE> keys are locked ‘on’, the taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays them in uppercase characters – BLUE KEY and ORANGE KEY. If these keys are displayed in lowercase characters in the taskbar, you’ll know that the Blue Key and the Orange Key are not locked. They will become inactive following a key press. 5.5.2.4 • Keyboard Macro Keys In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box, open the Macros tab. Figure 5.10 Macro Dialogue Box A macro has 200 programmable characters (or “positions”). The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys including <ENTER>, <BKSP> and <DEL> (<BLUE>-<BKSP>), function keys and arrow keys. Recording And Saving A Macro You can program up to 12 macro keys. • In the Macro: menu, highlight a macro key number – for example, macro 1 to 18-Nov-2004 assign a macro to macro key <M1>. Tap on the Record Macro button. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 73 Chapter 5: Configuration Keyboard Macro Keys A message screen is displayed instructing you to ‘Please Enter Key Strokes’. Figure 5.11 Recording A Macro • Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key. You can type text and numbers, and you can program the function of special keys into a macro. Note: Tap on the ‘Stop Recording’ button at any time to suspend the process. • When you’ve finished recording your macro sequence, press the key sequence – <CTRL> <ALT> <ENTER>. A new screen displays the macro sequence you created. The Save Macro button is highlighted. • Tap on the Save Macro button. Note: If you want to discard the macro you’ve just created, tap on the Discard Macro button. Executing A Macro To execute a macro: • Press the macro key to which you’ve assigned the macro. For example, if you created a macro for macro key ‘1’, press <M1> to execute the macro. Deleting A Macro To delete a macro: • • 74 In the Macros tab, tap on the macro number you want to delete. Tap on the Delete Macro button. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 5: Configuration Unicode Mapping 5.5.2.5 • Unicode Mapping In the Keyboard Properties dialogue box, open the Unicode Mapping tab. Figure 5.12 Unicode Mapping The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and <CTRL> and <SHIFT> states to Unicode™ values. This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value. For example, the sample screen above shows “a (U+0061)” indicating that the character “a” is represented by the Unicode value “0061”, and so on. Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexidecimal rather than decimal values. All user-defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual key value, and then by order of the shift state. If a Unicode mapping is not listed, the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 75 Chapter 5: Configuration Unicode Mapping Adding And Changing Unicode Values Important: • Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Keyboard Properties dialogue box. Tap on the Add/Change button. Figure 5.13 Adding And Change Unicode Values • • Tap on a value in the Unicode mapping list – in the sample screen above, a value will be assigned to virtual key 0 (VK 0). Tap the stylus in the ‘Unicode Mapping’ field, and type a Unicode value for the highlighted key. Note: To add a shifted state – <SHIFT> and/or <CTRL>, tap the checkbox next to ‘SHIFT Pressed’ and/or ‘CTRL Pressed’. to select (√) the shift state you want to assign. Removing Unicode Values • In the Unicode Mapping tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and tap the stylus on the Remove button. 18-Nov-2004 76 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Scancode Remapping 5.5.2.6 Scancode Remapping A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard. Every key has a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key, a function or a macro. Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard. A key can be remapped to send a virtual key (e.g. VK_F represents the ‘F’ key; VK_RETURN represents the <ENTER/ON> key, etc.), perform a function (e.g. turn the scanner on, change volume/contrast, etc.) or run a macro. There are three different tables of scancode mappings: the Normal table, the Blue table and the Orange table. The Normal table defines unmodified key presses; the Blue table defines key presses that occur when the <BLUE> modifier is on; the Orange table defines key presses that occur when the <ORANGE> modifier is on. The default mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using the Scancode Remapping tab accessed from the Keyboard Properties dialogue box. Figure 5.14 Scancode Remapping The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the Scancodes in hexidecimal. If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key, that virtual key is displayed in the next column labelled ‘V-Key’. A virtual key that is ‘Shifted’ or ‘Unshifted’ is displayed in the third column labelled ‘Function’. If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro, the first second columns remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number (e.g., Macro 2). 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 77 Chapter 5: Configuration Scancode Remapping Adding A Remap To add a new remapping: • Tap the stylus on the Add button at the bottom of the dialogue box. The Remap Scancode dialogue box is displayed. Figure 5.15 Remapping A Key • Type the scan code in hexidecimal in the field labelled Scancode: Note: The Label: field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping. Virtual Key, Function And Macro The radio buttons along the side of the dialogue box allow you to define what the scan code will be remapped to: Virtual Key, Function or Macro. When Virtual Key is selected, you can choose to force <SHIFT> to be either ‘on’ or ‘off’ when the virtual key is sent. If No Force is selected, the shift state is dependent on whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent. When Function is selected, a list of valid functions appears in the dialogue box. When Macro is selected, the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialogue box. • • Choose Virtual Key, Function or Macro. Choose a function from the Function list in the dialogue box, and tap on OK. 18-Nov-2004 78 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Volume And Sound Properties Editing A Scancode Remap To edit a scancode: • • • In the Scancode Remapping tab, tap the stylus on the remap you want to edit. Tap on the Edit button, and make the appropriate changes. Tap on OK to save your changes. Removing A Remap To delete a remap: • • In the Scancode Remapping tab, highlight the scancode you want to delete, and tap on the Remove button. Tap on OK 5.5.3 Volume And Sound Properties Note: Sounds (wave files) cannot be reproduced on 8525 units. The conditions under which 8525s emit sounds are tailored from within the application installed on your unit. • In the Control Panel, choose the Volume & Sounds icon. Figure 5.16 Choosing The Volume Icon 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 79 Chapter 5: Configuration Volume Adjustments 5.5.3.1 Volume Adjustments Figure 5.17 Volume Settings • • Slide the volume button upward to increase the beeper volume or downward to decrease the beeper volume. Under the heading ‘Enable sounds for:’, enable (√) the conditions under which you want the 8525 to emit a beep. 5.5.4 Power Management Properties This icon displays a Power Properties dialogue box that indicates the unit’s internal backup battery capacity and indicates the power source of the 8525. • In the Control Panel, choose the Power icon. Figure 5.18 Choosing The Power Icon 18-Nov-2004 80 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Power Suspend 5.5.4.1 Power Suspend Note: A Battery tab is only available when the security level is set to Teklogix. • In the Power Properties dialogue box, open the Suspend tab. Figure 5.19 Power Suspend Properties Switch State To Suspend When the 8525 is idle – not receiving any user input (a key touch, a scan, and so on) or system activity (serial data, an activity initiated by an application, and so on), the the value assigned in the Switch State To Suspend field determines when the unit will go to suspend state (appear to be off). When the time in the Suspend field elapses without any activity, the unit enters Suspend state. In Suspend state, the 8525 CPU enters a sleep state, and the radio is shut off. The state of the device (RAM contents) is preserved. Pressing <ENTER> wakes the system from suspend state. When the 8525 is in suspend state, the network connection will not be broken immediately. If the connection is dropped, you must re-establish the network connection. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 81 Chapter 5: Configuration Card Slots 5.5.4.2 Card Slots Figure 5.20 Activating Card Slots This tab is used to enable or disable power to the individual PC Card and SDIO slots in your unit. 5.5.5 Stylus Properties Note: Touchscreen calibration may not be enabled on your unit. If your screen appears to require recalibration, contact your supervisor. • In the Control Panel, choose the Stylus icon. Figure 5.21 Stylus Icon 18-Nov-2004 82 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Setting Double-Tap Sensitivity 5.5.5.1 • Setting Double-Tap Sensitivity In the Double-Tap tab, follow the directions to tailor the sensitivity of the stylus when you tap on the touchscreen. Figure 5.22 Setting Stylus Sensitivity 5.5.5.2 Touchscreen Calibration Touchscreens rarely require recalibration. However, if your touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, follow the directions in the Calibration tab. • Choose the Calibration tab and then tap on the Recalibrate button. Figure 5.23 Calibrating The Touchscreen • Follow the directions in the Calibration tab to recalibrate the screen. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 83 Chapter 5: Configuration Options – Disabling The Touchscreen 5.5.5.3 Options – Disabling The Touchscreen Figure 5.24 Disabling The Touchscreen • Tap the stylus on the checkbox next to (√) ‘Disable the touch panel’. The touchscreen will not accept screen taps. 5.5.6 Certificate Assignment • In the Control Panel, choose the Certificate icon. Figure 5.25 Certificates Icon 18-Nov-2004 84 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Narrow Band Radio This dialogue box is used in conjunction with 802.1x authentication to enhance 8525 security. Figure 5.26 Certificates Dialogue Box For a detailed description about Certificate setup for both the server and client-side devices (8525s), refer to the following website: www.microsoft.com/windows2000/techinfo/planning/walkthroughs/default.asp - "Security Services" Note: When importing certificates, the 8525 only recognizes .cer files. 5.5.7 Narrow Band Radio Note: Keep in mind that the Narrow Band icon is only visible in the Control Panel when a Narrow Band radio is installed in the unit. • In the Control Panel, choose the Narrow Band radio icon. Figure 5.27 Narrow Band Icon 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 85 Chapter 5: Configuration Info Tab 5.5.7.1 Info Tab In the Narrow Band RAdio dialogue box, the Info tab displays information about the radio – it cannot be edited. Figure 5.28 Narrow Band Information The “Power” information in this screen indicates the power of the radio installed in the unit – 0.5 or 1.0 W). The “Serial Number” is the identifier for the radio and is used by the protocol when the “Auto Radio Address” parameter is enabled. The CIS (Card Information Structure) Data is manufacturer information describing the PC Card installed in the 8525. “DSP x.x / FPGA 0xNN” indicates the firmware revision of the radio’s DSP (x.x) and FPGA (0xNN) where x.x and NN represent actual revision numbers. Statistics Screen • Tap on the Statistics button to display the Protocol Statistics screen. These statistics are updated every second while the dialogue box is displayed. 18-Nov-2004 86 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Info Tab Figure 5.29 Protocol Statistics The following table provides a brief description of these statistics: Statistic cq ch sc rm xm rf xf ra xi rp xr pt xe rssi Description Channel quality. See the description of the "Channel Switch Speed" parameter in the channel tab for more information on how "cq" affects channel switching (see “Channel Switch Speed” on page 90). Current channel Monitor state of RF Link: LOCKED=0, LOCKPENDING=1, LOWCQWAIT=2, SCANNING=3, STARTUP=4, ABANDON=5 Number of received messages, complete application messages Number of transmitted messages, complete application messages Number of received polls with attached message Number of transmitted frames Number of received radio link aborts Number of transmitted radio link initialization messages Number of received polls Number of transmitted retries Number of poll timeouts Number of transmitted errors Received Signal Strength Indicator Table 5.1 Protocol Statistics Descriptions Low Level Screen • Tap on the Low Level tab to display the Low Level statistics screen. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 87 Chapter 5: Configuration Info Tab Figure 5.30 Low Level Statistics Screen Table 5.2 defines the elements of the Low Level statistics screen. Statistic RxOk RxHd RxBd RxEr RxOv TxOk TxEr CD Coll Tx D TxMD Rx X RxMx MChg Description Message buffers discarded due to lack of available receive buffers Message headers successfully received Message bodies successfully received Message buffers received with detected errors Number of transmitted messages, complete application messages Message buffers successfully transmitted Message buffers which failed to transmit. Number of carrier detect changes detected Number of collisions detected Actual difference in time (in RTC ticks) between when the most recent transmit (with timestamp) was scheduled to start and when it actually started. Maximum "Tx D" value Number of extra characters received for last received message (due to delay in host reporting back actual body size) Maximum "Rx X" value Number of completed mode changes Table 5.2 Low Level Statistics Descriptions Default All Parameters • Tap on the Default all Parameters button to return all registry parameters to default values. When this button is pressed, a screen appears asking if you’re sure you want to return all parameters to their default values. • Tap on the Yes button to return values to their default settings. Note: This button does not default the radio parameters set under the Radio tab. 18-Nov-2004 88 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Channel Tab 5.5.7.2 Channel Tab Figure 5.31 Channel Tab Channel Number This parameter determines the operating radio channel of the 8525. The allowable range for this parameter is 1 to 20. The default value is 1. Note: The Channel Number dropdown menu displays only the channels that have been enabled in the Channel Enable List. Power Up Channel When this parameter is enabled (√), the 8525 begins communicating on the channel specified in the Channel Number parameter when the unit is powered up. This setting may prevent the migration of 8525s to the same channel due to uneven coverage in some sites. If this parameter is disabled (unchecked), the unit will continue communicating on the same channel that it was on before it was powered off. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 89 Chapter 5: Configuration Channel Tab Channel Enable List • Tap on the Channel Enable List button to display a dialogue box listing available channels. Figure 5.32 Channel Enable Dialogue Box This dialogue box is completed by default with all channels that have frequencies configured. A checkmark (√) indicates that a channel is enabled. An unchecked check box indicates that the channel is disabled. The maximum number of channels supported by the RA1001Narrow Band radio is 20. Enabling a channel (√) allows the channel to be set to an operating channel (Channel Number) and makes it available for channel searching. For example, if Channel 1 is the operating channel and all other channels are enabled (√), the 8525 can roam through all 20 channels. Channel Switch Speed This parameter changes the threshold the 8525 uses to determine when communication quality with a base station is unacceptable. When this threshold is exceeded, the unit starts channel searching for a new base station. Setting this parameter to “Slow” means a higher threshold – the 8525 is more tolerant of poor communication quality. When the channel quality of the vehicle-mount radio drops below 46%, the unit monitors the channel quality for 15 timeout periods before searching for a new channel. If Channel Switch Speed is set to “Fast”, the current channel is only monitored for up to 2 time-out periods before channel switching begins. Important: 90 “Fast” switch speed is most effective where coverage areas are largely overlapping. If the coverage areas barely overlap, have dead spots, or if the 8525 frequently operates on the fringe of cov18-Nov-2004 erage, this parameter should be set to “Slow”. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Channel Tab Channel Selection Enabling (√) “Manual Select” allows you to set the channel search order the 8525 will use if communication quality drops and channel switching is required. If this parameter is enabled, the 8525 uses the channel switching lists specified in the Manual Switch Table. If this parameter is disabled (unchecked), the vehicle-mount uses a standard algorithm to decide which channel it should switch to in the event of poor channel quality. Warning: It is not recommended that the "Manual Select" parameter be used without a clear understanding of how to order the channel sequences for optimum performance. Manual Switch Table • Tap on the Set Switch Table button to display the Manual Switch Table dialogue box. Figure 5.33 Manual Switch Table This feature is used rarely. It is used when the order of channel switching needs to be tightly controlled. The values in the “Channel” column are completed for you with the enabled channels when this dialogue box is opened. For each corresponding enabled channel, the “List” column contains “0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0” values by default. If communication quality falls below 46%, only the channels entered in the Manual Switch Table are considered for channel switching. The channel search is carried out in the order in which the channels were entered in the table. To configure channel switching order for a particular channel: • 18-Nov-2004 Highlight the channel you want to edit, and tap on the Edit Channel List button. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 91 Chapter 5: Configuration Protocol Tab Editing The Channel List Figure 5.34 Edit Channel List Only those channels that are enabled are displayed in the dropdown menus in the Edit Channel List dialogue box. The allowable values range from 0 to 20. • • Tap on the arrow next to dropdown menu to scroll through the available channels. Highlight the value you want to assign. Once you’ve assigned the switching order, tap on the OK button to close the dialogue box. The channel list is added to the selected channel in the Manual Switch Table dialogue box. 5.5.7.3 Protocol Tab Figure 5.35 Protocol Tab 18-Nov-2004 92 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Protocol Tab Enable Cellular Protocol The value assigned to this parameter must be identical to the value assigned to the corresponding parameter in the Psion Teklogix Network Controller, Wireless Gateway or Base Station. A warm reset of the 8525 is required before this parameter can take effect. If Enable Cellular Protocol is disabled (unchecked), the options in the Cellular Radio Address frame are displayed in grey text indicating that they cannot be accessed. Cellular Radio Address Auto Radio Address If Auto Radio Address is enabled (√), the 8525 requests an automatically assigned radio address. Manual Radio Address is displayed in grey text indicating that it cannot be accessed. Manual Radio Address The value entered in the Manual Radio Address parameter is used to identify the 8525 over the radio link. A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each unit. Note: This parameter is set to ‘0’ (an out-of-range value) by default to block radio communication when the unit is initially powered up. This prevents several new terminals from attempting to communicate with the same default terminal number at initial power up. Once the default value is changed, it cannot be set back to ‘0’. Polling The default values for the Polling parameters are dependent on the value assigned to the Modulation / Baud Rate parameter in the Radio tab. Modulation / Baud Rate 4 Level / 19200 4 Level / 9600 2 Level / 9600 2 Level / 4800 Sync Delay 17 17 17 25 Window Delay Poll Timeout 20 23 19 23 Table 5.3 Polling Parameters 20 25 22 37 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 93 Chapter 5: Configuration Protocol Tab Sync Delay Warning: This parameter should not be changed from its factory setting without a clear understanding of radio protocol timing. The Sync Delay parameter specifies the delay between the base station transmission and the first response window, measured in milliseconds. The value assigned to this parameter must be compatible with other terminals and base stations in the system. The allowable range for this parameter is between 1 and 40. Window Delay Important: The value assigned to this parameter should not be changed from the factory setting without a clear understanding of the timing of the radio protocol. This parameter specifies the amount of time (in milliseconds) the 8525 should add to each response window in order to accommodate the receive/transmit switching characteristics of the radio. The value assigned must be compatible with other units and base stations in the system. The default setting of 19 is based on the requirements of a 2 level modulation narrow band radio, operating at 9600 baud. Poll Timeout This parameter (in units of 16.6 ms) sets the time-out value used for automatic channel switching. “Poll Timeout” is the time during which the 8525 should detect at least one poll from a base station. As each “Poll Timeout” passes without a successful poll from the base station, the 8525 channel quality decreases. If the channel quality falls to below 46%, the terminal begins searching for a new channel. A value from 1 to 200 can be assigned to this parameter. Late TX Limit The value entered for this parameter (measured in milliseconds) sets the maximum allowable deviation time from the start of a response window during which an 8525 can make a transmission. After this threshold, the transmission will not be attempted and the 8525 will try again at the next opportunity. For example, suppose this parameter is set to 5. From the beginning of the response window, the 8525 can be up to 5 milliseconds late sending a transmission. Beyond this threshold, the transmission is not attempted. The vehicle-mount waits for the next opportunity. 18-Nov-2004 The allowable range for this parameter is from 1 and 10 – the default value is 2. 94 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Power Tab Test Polling Values Tapping on this button allows you to test the suitability of the polling values you’ve assigned before they are saved to memory. 5.5.7.4 Power Tab Figure 5.36 Power Tab Enable Power Saving When this parameter is checked (√), power saving is enabled. Idle Poll Limit Note: The “Idle Poll Limit” parameter is only used when “Enable Power Saving” is enabled (√). This parameter determines how many transmit opportunities – base station polls with available response windows – must be consecutively skipped before the 8525 places the radio into power-down mode for power saving. The allowable range for this parameter is from 1 to 200. The default value is 10. Lower values cause the vehicle-mount to enter power saving mode quickly, extending battery life but reducing 8525 responsiveness. Higher values increase responsiveness but decrease battery life. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 95 Chapter 5: Configuration Radio Tab Power Off Time This parameter determines the amount of time (in seconds) the 8525 radio stays in power-down mode when a power down period has been initiated. “Power Off Time” is only used when the “Enable Power Saving” parameter is enabled (√) The allowable range for this parameter is 1 to 60. 5.5.7.5 Radio Tab Figure 5.37 Radio Tab Modulation/Baud Rate The options listed in the “Modulation / Baud Rate” dropdown menu are: 2 Level/4800, 2 Level/9600, 4 Level/9600 and 4 Level/19200. The value assigned to this parameter must be identical to the corresponding parameter in the Psion Teklogix Base Station. This parameter is stored in the radio’s non-volatile memory. The default value for “Modulation/Baud Rate” is 2 Level/9600 Data Squelch “Data Squelch” controls the radio receiver, cutting it off when the signal is too weak for reception of anything but noise. Receive Signal Strength Indicator values below the “Data Squelch” threshold prevent further processing of the receive signal while higher values allow further processing. The allowable range is 0 to 100 with a default value of 0. 18-Nov-2004 96 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Radio Tab In noisy environments, this value can be increased to reject noise. In environments with less noise, this value can be decreased to allow the received signal and increase range. This parameter is stored in the radio’s non-volatile memory. Test Squelch • Tap on the Test Squelch button to prompt the radio to use the "Data Squelch" value without committing it to the radio’s non-volatile memory – in other words, to ‘test’ the value assigned to the “Data Squelch” parameter. To commit the new “Data Squelch” value to the radio’s non-volatile memory: • Tap on the OK button – the dialogue box is closed and the new value is saved. To discard the new value, and keep the old “Data Squelch” value: • Tap on the X button at the top of the dialogue box. The old value is sent to the protocol driver. Frequency Table • Tap on the Frequency button to display the “Frequency Table” dialogue box. • Tap on the Copy "Receive" to "Transmit" button to copy the contents of the “Receive” fields into the corresponding “Transmit” fields. Figure 5.38 When you tap on this button, a warning box is displayed asking “Copy all the Rx frequencies to the Tx frequencies?” 18-Nov-2004 • Tap on the Yes button to go ahead or No to stop the copy process. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 97 Chapter 5: Configuration Bluetooth Setup Statistics • Tap this button to display communication statistics. Refer to “Statistics Screen” beginning on page 86 for details about this screen. Advanced This button launches the “Radio Test Application”. 5.6 Bluetooth Setup Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area Networks (PAN). The technology is based on a short-range radio link that operates in the ISM band at 2.4 GHz. When two Bluetooth-equipped devices come within a 2 meter range of each other, they can establish a connection. Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio-based link, it does not require a line-of-sight connection in order to communicate. Note: The Bluetooth radio card uses an internal antenna. • In the Control Panel, choose the Bluetooth Device Properties icon to display the Bluetooth Manager screen. Figure 5.39 Bluetooth Icon The Bluetooth Manager dialogue box is used to display the other Bluetooth devices with which you can communicate. 18-Nov-2004 98 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration The Devices Tab 5.6.1 The Devices Tab Figure 5.40 Bluetooth Controls Dialogue Box Scan • Click on the Scan button to list available devices. Wait for the 8525 to complete its scan (approximately 20 seconds). When scanning starts, the Scan button will change to Stop – if necessary, you can tap on this button to stop the process. Once scanning is complete, all discovered devices will be displayed in the list box, with Name, Address, Active status, and PIN information. Note: During the scanning process, addresses are located first, followed by names. Only the names of devices that are within the Bluetooth radio coverage range will be retrieved. The Active column indicates whether any service is activated for that device. When a service is activated, the device is displayed in the list even when it 18-Nov-2004 is not detected during the scan. The PIN column indicates whether you have a PIN (password) set for the device. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 99 At this point you can either query for services or set the PIN for each device. Once you highlight a device in the list box, both the Services and Set PIN buttons become available. Services A discovered device may display several service profiles that it can use to communicate, and you will want to activate the type you need. Supported profiles that can be activated include: DUN (Dial-Up Networking service), Printer (serial service), and LANPPP (LANAccessUsingPPP service). ASync (ActiveSync) is another available profile. • To start the service scan, highlight a device in the Devices tab list, and then click on the Services button or double-click on the device entry. Note: If the remote device is out of reach or turned off, it can take a considerable amount of time for the Services dialogue box to appear – it may appear to be frozen. Once the device’s service profiles are displayed in the Services list box: • Highlight the desired service, and then click on Activate or Deactivate, as required. Once the service is successfully activated, the assigned port (if applicable) will appear in the Port column of the Services list box. You can choose to use BSP or COM as the port name. BSP is the latest Microsoft Bluetooth stack standard, but older applications assume serial ports are COM. When using COM as the port name, the Bluetooth manager will try to find and use a free port between COM7 and COM9. When using BSP as the port name, BSP2 to BSP9 are available for use. The port is available as soon as it is activated. Note: The CH column shows the RFCOMM channel of the service IF the service is RFCOMM-based. This information is not generally needed except for debugging purposes. The Authentication and Encryption options can be changed only before activation. To change those after activation, deactivate the service first, then change the options. Once a service is activated, all the information regarding the service, including the RFCOMM channel number, is saved in the registry. (Some remote devices may 18-Nov-2004 change their RFCOMM channel numbers when they reboot, so your saved setting may not work when the remote device is rebooted. In that case, you must deactivate the service and reactivate it to detect the current RFCOMM channel.) Chapter 5: Configuration The Server Tab Set PIN PINs can be set for each device by pressing the Set PIN button in the Devices tab, or you can skip this step and try to connect to the device first. Important: • The remote device must have authentication enabled, otherwise the PIN authentication will fail. Highlight a device, click on the <Set Pin> button, and type the PIN. You will receive a message, either that the PIN has been successfully validated or that it has been rejected. If the PIN has been validated, an asterisk (*) appears in the PIN column in the Devices list box, indicating that this device has a PIN set. Once a PIN is entered, it is saved in the registry. To remove the PIN: • Tap on Set PIN and press <ENTER>. If the 8525 attempts to connect to a remote device that has Authentication enabled and does not have a required PIN set, an Authentication Request dialogue box appears. • Enter the PIN, and tap on OK to connect the devices. 5.6.2 The Server Tab Figure 5.41 Bluetooth Servers Tab 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 101 Chapter 5: Configuration The Properties Tab The Bluetooth connection is initiated from your 8525 to the remote device – therefore the 8525 is called the ‘client’ and the remote is called the ‘server’. The Servers tab displays the server profiles that can be activated in your 8525. There is currently one server profile available: Serial. • Tap on the checkbox to activate (√) the server, and it will display the associated port name beside the server name. Once you activate a server profile, it is recommended that the 8525 be rebooted before you try to bond from a server. Note: You do not need to reboot if you are deactivating a server. 5.6.3 The Properties Tab Figure 5.42 Bluetooth Properties Tab The Properties tab displays information about your 8525, and provides some port options. The Device Name field shows the device name of your 8525. This name can be changed (see the Note in this section for details). Device Class shows the Class of Device (e.g. desktop, hand-held), which is always set to Handheld. Local Bluetooth Address shows the address of your 8525 radio. Port Prefix is used to set the port name to either BSP or COM. When the name is set to BSP, BSP2 to BSP9 are available for activated services (including the server). When COM is chosen, COM7 to COM9 are available. 18-Nov-2004 102 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Active Conn. Tab 5.6.3.1 Active Conn. Tab Figure 5.43 Bluetooth Active Conn. Tab The Active Conn. tab lists the Name, Address, and Type of the currently active connections. The table is periodically updated while on display, but it can take a few seconds before it reflects the actual list of connections. The Type column of the table shows ‘ACL’ or ‘SCO’. The Connection list table shows the connections for scanning as well as the service connections. Note: You can change the device-name and description of your radio by clicking on the System icon in Control Panel, which will open the System Properties dialogue box. Click on the Device Name tab to access the menu and change your settings. Then click on OK. Although the name will have changed in the Properties menu in Bluetooth Controls, the radio only reads it on boot-up. For the changes to take effect, you must reset the 8525. 5.6.4 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 1. To connect to the internet using a GPRS phone equipped with a Bluetooth radio, begin by setting up the Bluetooth radio. The setup information is outlined beginning on page 98. Remember to choose the modem with which you want your 8525 to communicate from the Scan Device list. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 103 Chapter 5: Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 2. To set up the internet parameters, select the Network And Dial-up Connections icon from the Control Panel. Figure 5.44 Network And Dial-up Connection Icon 3. Select the Make New Connection icon. Figure 5.45 Creating A GPRS Connection 4. In the Make New Connection dialogue box, choose Dial-Up Connection. Enter a name for your GPRS network connection.ˆ 18-Nov-2004 Figure 5.46 Setting Up The Connection 104 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 5. Tap on the Next> button to display the Modem dialogue box. Figure 5.47 Setting Up The Modem 6. In the dropdown menu labelled Select a modem:, choose the name of the modem with which you want to connect, and then choose the Configure button to display the Device Properties dialogue box. The 8525 communicates with your phone and retrieves the parameters for the Device Properties dialogue box. The 8525 then disconnects. Figure 5.48 Port Settings 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 105 Chapter 5: Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 7. Under the Call Options tab, turn off Cancel the call if not connected within... and press <ENTER> to save your changes. Figure 5.49 Call Options 8. In the Modem dialogue box, select the Next> button to display the Phone Number dialogue box. Figure 5.50 Setting The Phone Number The phone number you enter is network carrier dependent. Once you’ve specified all the necessary information, choose the Finish button. 18-Nov-2004 106 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 9. In the Control Panel, choose the Dialing icon. Figure 5.51 Dialing Icon 10. The values in the Dialing Properties dialogue box need to be edited according to your network carrier specifications. Figure 5.52 Setting Up Dialing Properties Once you’ve edited this dialogue box to reflect your network carrier requirements, press <ENTER> to save your changes. 11. At this point, you’ll need to return to the Control Panel and select the Network and Dial-up Connections icon. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 107 Chapter 5: Configuration The Bluetooth GPRS Phone 12. In the network connection window, the new network configuration – in this case – GPRS Network – is displayed. Choose the new icon. Figure 5.53 GPRS Network Connection This onscreen message indicates the status of your connection – connected, disconnected, error messages, and so on. Figure 5.54 Successful Connection • Select the Hide button to move this message to the background. You can now access the internet. Figure 5.55 Accessing The Internet 108 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 5: Configuration Total Recall 5.7 Total Recall Total Recall is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to maintain applications and setting over cold boots. This utility is based on a backup and restore concept and is extended to incorporate power advanced features. • In the Control Panel, choose the Total Recall icon. Figure 5.56 Total Recall Icon 5.7.1 Creating A Backup Profile Figure 5.57 Backup Profile In the dropdown menu, you can choose from four options: Create Backup Profile, View Selected Profile, Restore Selected Profile and Delete Selected Profile. Keep in mind however that until a profile is created, the only available option is Create Backup Profile. Help Files – BACK And FORWARD Buttons 18-Nov-2004 The BACK and FORWARD buttons allow you to scroll through the help files that provide steps to guide you through the Total Recall operation. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 109 Chapter 5: Configuration Creating A Backup Profile • Tap on the Next> button to begin the process. Figure 5.58 Profile Details Profile Information This dialogue box lists the possible storage destinations for the profile file. • To begin, type a name for the profile in the field labelled Profile Name. This dialogue box also lists the image type – OS Version and Registry Type for the 8525. • Tap on the Location. icon to expand your settings for AutoRetore Profile and Profile Figure 5.59 Profile Options • - Not an AutoRestore Profile – creates a backup that is manually restored by the operator. - AutoRestore Profile for this device only – creates a profile that automatically restores itself following a cold boot. - Clone Profile for other devices – creates a profile that automatically restores after resuming from a cold boot, but it will not contain the touch screen calibration coordinates or the Wireless radio settings. - Profile Location – allows the operator to specify where the profile is to be saved. The location for the profile will typically be Flash or a 18-Nov-2004 Storage card. Tap on the Next button to display the next dialogue box – Add Files. 110 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Creating A Backup Profile Add Files Figure 5.60 Adding Files By default, All Files: is selected so that all installed or copied files, database entries, and the Registry will be saved. You can, however, limit the backup to database, and/or the registry only. The backup By Individual File option allows you to select the exact file or files you want to backup. The By File Type option allows you to select by predefined file types. • Tap on the Next> button to view your selections. Figure 5.61 By File Type 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 111 Chapter 5: Configuration Restoring A Profile View Selections Depending on what you have selected for inclusion in your profile, you can view a list of the selected files, databases and/or registry. Figure 5.62 Viewing Selections • Tap on the Next> button to perform the operation. Performing The Backup Figure 5.63 Performing The Backup • Tap on the Backup To \Flash or \Storage Card button to start the process and create a profile. 5.7.2 Restoring A Profile To manually restore a profile: • Choose Restore Selected Profile from the dropdown menu, and select the Profile Name displayed in the drop down box. 18-Nov-2004 Note: You can also manually restore an auto restore profile located in flash or a storage device. 112 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration IPv6 Support 5.8 IPv6 Support The IPv6 Support icon in the Control Panel allows you to activate IPv6 network support on your unit. This internet protocol specification (version 6) supports 128-bit IP addresses, replacing version 4. Figure 5.64 IPv6 Support Icon • Tap on the icon to display the IPv6 Support dialogue box. Figure 5.65 IPv6 Support Tab • Tap the stylus on the checkbox next to Enable IPv6 Network Support to enable (√) this internet protocol. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 113 Chapter 5: Configuration Scanner Properties Setup 5.9 Scanner Properties Setup The Teklogix Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialogue boxes in which you can tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize. Figure 5.66 Teklogix Scanners Icon 5.9.1 Scanner Options Figure 5.67 Bar Code Options To display the sub-menus available in the Options tab: • Tap on the + symbol to the left of the option with which you want to work. To change a parameter: • Double-tap on the parameter, or press the <SPACE> key. If a field requires text entry, a text field is displayed in which you can type the appropriate value. 18-Nov-2004 114 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Scanner Options Display Parameters Scan Result When this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is released, this information is cleared from the screen. Scan Indicator When this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated. Scan Result Time (sec) The value assigned to the “Scan Result Time (sec)” parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in seconds, and a value of “0” (zero) disables the parameter. Note: To remove the scan result from the screen before the “Result Time” has expired, point the scanner away from the bar code and press the trigger. Scan Good This parameter determines whether or not the 8525 emits an audible scanner ‘beep’ when a ‘good’ or successful scan is performed. Set this parameter to either ‘ON’ to enable the beeper or ‘OFF’ to disable it. Scan Bad This parameter determines whether or not the 8525 emits an audible scanner ‘beep’ when a ‘bad’ or unsuccessful scan is performed. Set this parameter to either ‘ON’ to enable the beeper or ‘OFF’ to disable it. Scan Log File If this parameter is enabled, the input barcode and the modified/translated output bar code are logged in the file \Flash Disk\ScanLog.txt. Keep in mind that if the ‘Scan Log File’ is enabled, there is a slight performance effect when performing multiple scans since the log file is written to persistent storage. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 115 Chapter 5: Configuration Scanner Options Double Click Parameters Click Time (msec) This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click. If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is considered a double-click. The allowable range is 0 to 1000. A value of zero disables this feature. A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the “Click Data” parameter. When a value is not assigned for the “Click Data”, double-clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the “Dot Time” parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for the “Click Data” parameter, double-clicking the scanner trigger inserts the “Click Data” value rather than initiating a scan. Click Data For both integrated and external scanners, this parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in your 8525 following a double-click. A dialogue box appears, asking that you press the key you want to insert. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed. Pressing the <ESC> key in this dialogue box resets the data to zero. Options Dot Time (msec) The value selected for “Dot Time (msec)” determines (in milliseconds) how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. The allowable values are: 0, 0.1, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 and 3.0 seconds. A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot. Short Code When enabled (set to ‘ON’), this parameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 bar codes (2 characters). When disabled, these short bar codes are rejected. Enabling “Short Code” may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the 8525 must decode more potential bar codes; it is therefore not recommended for general-purpose bar codes with 4 or more characters. 18-Nov-2004 116 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Bar Codes Verify The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional decodes required after the initial decode before a bar code is accepted. Higher values significantly increase the time it takes to decode a bar code but also improve the reliability of the decoded bar code. Security This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge bar codes (Code 93, Code 128, UPC/EAN). Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code. The default value of 30 is generally a good compromise setting. 5.9.2 Bar Codes Figure 5.68 Bar Code Selection All the available bar code symbologies can be selected from this tab. Important: To improve the decode speed and performance, enable (set to ‘ON’) only those codes that are required by the application. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 117 Chapter 5: Configuration Code 39 Settings The bar code settings do not affect the operation of external decoded scanners. These scanners must be configured by scanning special configuration bar codes. These configuration bar codes affect the communication speed or data format between the scanner and the 8525 and must not be changed. The scanner manufacturer provides programming manuals for configuration purposes. • For Symbol, refer to “Programming Guide P300”. • For PSC, refer to “Powerscan Programming Guide (PSC)”. Figure 5.69 Code 39 Bar Code Settings A ‘plus’ sign (+) to the left of the each bar code listed in this Barcodes tab indicate that that a sub-menu of parameters is attached. To work with a sub-menu: • • Tap on the ‘plus’ sign (+) to display the sub-menu. To change a parameter value, double-tap on the parameter or press the <SPACE> key. 5.9.2.1 Code 39 Settings Enabled Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable Code 39 or ‘off’ to disable it. Full Ascii If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character. Include Check 18-Nov-2004 If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. 118 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration Code 39 Settings AIAG Strip If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the AIAG data identifier is removed from each decoded Code 39 label. The data identifier occurs in the first position next to the Code 39 start character. It can be a single alphabetic character or a series of numeric digits followed by an alphabetic character. This identifier defines the general category or specific use of the data contained in the rest of the bar code. Note: If your unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix TESS application, this parameter should not be used in conjunction with the TESS AIAG feature. This is because the 8525 vehicle-mount performs the strip function before it processes the data through the AIAG feature; if the prefix is stripped, the data is not identified as AIAG. Error Accept If the “Err Accept” and “AIAG Strip” parameters are enabled (set to ‘ON’), all label data without an AIAG identifier character is accepted. If the “Err Accept” parameter is disabled and the “AIAG Strip” parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the label data is not accepted. Mod Checks Mod 43 Check If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the Mod 43 check digit is calculated. Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. None If you choose ‘None’, a check is not executed. Field Size/Chars Field Size The field size is the length of the field after the first character is stripped and the prefix and suffix characters are added. If the field size is non-zero, only bar codes of that length are passed through. Prefix Char 18-Nov-2004 This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key you want to insert in the dialogue box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 119 Chapter 5: Configuration Code 128 Settings Pressing the <ESC> key in this dialogue box resets the data to zero. Suffix Char Note: The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character. For example, if <BKSP> is pressed, the usual action for that key is performed. If your unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix ANSI emulation application, the 8525 transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data. This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key you want to insert in the dialogue box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed. Pressing the <ESC> key in this dialogue box resets the data to zero. Strip Leading This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added. Note: For Code 39 bar codes, the “AIAG Strip” is performed before the “Strip Leading”. Strip Trailing The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added. 5.9.2.2 Code 128 Settings Enabled Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable Code 128 or ‘off’ to disable it. Include Sym Setting “Include Sym” to ‘ON’ causes the group separator(s) and start code contained in this type of bar code to be displayed on the screen. Note: This option is available only when ‘EAN/UCC 128’ is selected. Variations When using Code 128, you can choose the variation or type of bar code variation the 18-Nov-2004 scanner will recognize. The options available are Standard, UCC and EAN/UCC. These options are described below. 120 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration EAN 13 Settings Standard Enable (set to ‘ON’) “Standard” if Code 128 is desired. UCC 128 “UCC” is a variation of Code 128. EAN/UCC 128 To successfully scan this type of bar code, “EAN/UCC” must be enabled (set to ‘ON’). “EAN/UCC” bar codes include group separators and start codes. Field Size/Chars Refer to the description beginning on page 119 for details. 5.9.2.3 EAN 13 Settings Enabled Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable EAN 13 or ‘off’ to disable it. Include Country If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the country code is included with the decoded bar code data. Include Check If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Addendum Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter in the Options menu (see page 116) must be enabled (set to ‘ON’). An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Optional and Required. Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored. When “Addendum” is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the 18-Nov-2004 parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 121 Chapter 5: Configuration EAN 8 Prefix/Suffix Chars Prefix Char This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key you want to insert in the dialogue box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed. Pressing the <ESC> key in this dialogue box resets the data to zero. Suffix Char This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Press the key you want to insert in the dialogue box attached to this parameter. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed. Pressing the <ESC> key in this dialogue box resets the data to zero. Strip Leading This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added. Note: The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character. For example, if <BKSP> is pressed, the usual action for that key is performed. If your 8525 is operating with the Psion Teklogix ANSI emulation application, the vehicle-mount transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data. Strip Trailing The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added. 5.9.2.4 EAN 8 Enabled Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable EAN 8 or ‘off’ to disable it. Include Check If this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. 18-Nov-2004 122 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 5: Configuration UPC And EAN Settings Addendum Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter in the Options menu (see page 116) must be enabled (set to ‘ON’). Refer to “Addendum” on page 121. Prefix/Suffix Chars See “Prefix/Suffix Chars” on page 122. 5.9.2.5 UPC And EAN Settings Enabled Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable UPC And EAN or ‘off’ to disable it. Field Size/Char Refer to page 119 for details. 5.9.2.6 UPC A Settings Enabled Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable UPC A or ‘off’ to disable it. Include Number Sys If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Include Check If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit will be included with the decoded bar code data. Addendum Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter in the Options menu (see page 116) must be enabled (set to ‘ON’). Refer to “Addendum” on page 121. Prefix/Suffix Chars 18-Nov-2004 Refer to page 122 for details. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 123 Chapter 5: Configuration UPC E Settings 5.9.2.7 UPC E Settings Enabled Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable UPC E or ‘off’ to disable it. Convert to UPC-A Setting this parameter to ‘ON’ results in a non-standard decoding that returns 12 digits from the 6 digit UPC E bar code. Include Number Sys If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Include Check When enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Addendum Important: Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter in the Options menu (see page 116) must be enabled (set to ‘ON’). Refer to “Addendum” on page 121. Prefix/Suffix Chars Refer to page 122 for details. 5.9.2.8 Codabar Enabled Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable Codabar or ‘off’ to disable it. Field Size/Char Refer to page 119 for details. 5.9.2.9 Code 93 Enabled Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable Code 93 or ‘off’ to disable it. 124 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 5: Configuration Code 11 Field Size/Char Refer to page 119 for details. 5.9.2.10 Code 11 Enabled Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable Code 11 or ‘off’ to disable it. Include Check If “Include Chk” is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Check Digits This parameter can be set to None, One Check Digits or Two Check Digits. If this parameter set to One Check Digits, it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit. If this parameter is set to Two Check Digits, it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits. Field Size/Chars Refer to page 119 for details. 5.9.2.11 Interleaved 2 of 5 Enabled Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable Interleaved 2 of 5 or ‘off’ to disable it. Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit. ITF Check If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the ITF-14/16 Mod10 check digit is calculated. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 125 Chapter 5: Configuration MSI Plessey Include Check If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Field Size/Chars Refer to page 119 for details. 5.9.2.12 MSI Plessey Enabled Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable MSI Plessey or ‘off’ to disable it. One Check Digit If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit. Include Check If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Field Size/Chars Refer to page 119 for details. 5.9.2.13 Discrete 2 of 5 Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit. ITF Check If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the ITF-14/16 Mod10 check digit is calculated. Include Check If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Field Size/Chars Refer to page 119 for details. 126 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 5: Configuration IATA 2 of 5 5.9.2.14 IATA 2 of 5 Mod 10 Check If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. ITF Check If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the ITF-14/16 Mod10 check digit is calculated. Include Check If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Field Size/Chars Refer to page 119 for details. 5.9.3 Translations Figure 5.70 Translation Tab • In the Translation tab, choose the Add button. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 127 Figure 5.71 Translation Dialogue Box Input This value is compared with the decoded bar code reading. If there is a match, the “Output” string is translated into the decoded bar code. Output If there is a match between the decoded bar code and the corresponding “Input” string, the decoded bar code will be translated into the “Output” string. This string entry parameter can be null, or it may contain any combination of standard and special characters (e.g., function keys, <ENTER>, etc.). Type The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines what is compared with the decoded bar code reading – the beginning of decoded bar code, the end of decoded bar code, the entire decoded bar code or anywhere within the decoded bar code (default). 18-Nov-2004 TEKTERM APPLICATION 6 6.1 The Tekterm Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 6.2 Additional Keyboard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 6.2.1 Function Keys And Softkeys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 6.2.1.1 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 6.2.1.2 Softkey Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 6.2.2 Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 6.3 Changing The Screen Font Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 6.4 Panning The Screen Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 6.5 The Task Manager–Switching Between Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 6.6 The Tekterm Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 6.7 TESS Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 6.7.1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 6.7.2 Working With Multiple Sessions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 6.7.3 The Field Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 6.7.4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 6.7.5 Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 6.7.5.1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement . . . . . . . . . . .140 6.7.5.2 <DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 6.7.5.3 <BKSP> Key Behaviour In TESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 6.7.6 TESS Status Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 6.7.7 Lock Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 6.7.8 Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 6.7.9 Resetting A TESS Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 6.7.10 The Local Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 6.7.11 Selecting Another Host Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 6.7.12 Queuing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 6.8 ANSI Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 6.8.1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 6.8.2 Sending Data To The Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 6.8.3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys. .18-Nov-2004 . . . . . . 147 6.8.4 Block Mode (Local Editing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 6.8.5 Working With Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 6.8.5.1 Establishing A New Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 129 6.8.5.2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions. . . . . . . 149 6.8.5.3 Closing A Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 6.8.5.4 Printing A Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 6.8.5.5 Smart Echo – Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 6.9 The Radio Statistics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 6.9.1 802.IQ Stats Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 6.9.2 Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 6.10 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 6.11 Working With Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 6.11.1 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus . . . . . . . .154 6.11.1.1 Sub-Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 6.11.1.2 Numeric Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 6.11.1.3 Y/N Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 6.11.1.4 Alpha Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 6.11.1.5 String Entry Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 6.11.2 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus . . . . . . . . . .155 6.11.2.1 Sub-Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 6.11.2.2 Numeric Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 6.11.2.3 Y/N Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 6.11.2.4 Alpha Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 6.11.2.5 String Entry Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 6.11.3 Saving Changes To Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158 6.11.4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 6.12 Resetting The 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 6.13 The Parameters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 6.13.1 Security Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 6.14 Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 6.15 More Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 6.16 Radio Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 6.17 System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 6.17.1 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 6.17.1.1 Macro Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 6.17.1.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 6.17.1.3 Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 6.17.1.4 Ctrl Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 6.17.2 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 6.17.3 Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 6.17.4 User Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-Nov-2004 . . .167 6.17.5 Auto Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 6.18 Scanner Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 6.19 View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 130 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application 6.19.1 Split Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 6.19.1.1 Splitting And Displaying Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 6.19.1.2 Moving Between Split Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 6.19.1.3 Toggling Between Full & Split Screens . . . . . . . . . . .171 6.19.1.4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 6.19.2 Custom Characters (Unicode™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 6.19.2.1 Creating A Unicode™ Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 6.19.2.2 Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window . . . . . . . . .173 6.20 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 6.20.1 ANSI Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 6.20.1.1 Host Conn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 6.20.1.2 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 6.20.1.3 Xmit Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 6.20.1.4 Kbd Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 6.20.1.5 Edit Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 6.20.1.6 Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 6.20.1.7 Host Char Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 6.20.1.8 Anchor View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 6.20.2 TESS Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 6.20.2.1 Host Conn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 6.20.2.2 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 6.20.2.3 Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 6.20.2.4 Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 6.20.2.5 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 6.20.2.6 Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 6.20.2.7 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 6.20.2.8 Anchor View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 6.20.2.9 Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 6.21 Ports– Tether And Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 6.21.1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 6.21.2 Tether, Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . 218 6.21.3 Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . 221 6.21.3.1 Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport . . . . . . . .221 6.21.3.2 Scan-See Keyboard Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 6.22 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 6.22.1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 6.22.2 802.IQ v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 131 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application The Tekterm Application 6.1 The Tekterm Application Tekterm is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data transaction applications associated with mainframes and servers. The 8525 includes unique features that support Tekterm – a Psion Teklogix application that has the ability to maintain multiple simultaneous sessions with a variety of host computers. 6.2 Additional Keyboard Functions In addition to the standard keyboard functions (see “The Keyboard” on page 29), Tekterm supports function keys, softkeys and macro keys. 6.2.1 Function Keys And Softkeys 6.2.1.1 Function Keys The 8525 is equipped with a series of function keys each of which is defined in the application software. Accessing Function Keys <F1> to <F10> Function keys <F1> to <F10> can be directly accessed by pressing the function keys labelled in yellow along the top of the keyboard. No key combination is required. Accessing Function Keys <F11> To <F20> These keys are labelled in orange in the top-left corner of the function keys. To access these keys, press the <ORANGE> key followed by <F1> to <F10>. • • To access function key <F11>, press the <ORANGE> key followed by <F1>. Press <ORANGE> <F2> to access function key <F12>, and so on. Accessing Function Keys <F21> To <F30> These keys are labelled in blue in the top-right corner of the function keys. To access these keys, press the <BLUE> key followed by <F1> to <F10>. • • To access function key <F21>, press the <BLUE> key followed by <F1>. Press <BLUE> <F2> to access Function key <F22>, and so18-Nov-2004 on. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 133 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Softkey Function Keys 6.2.1.2 Softkey Function Keys To speed the process of moving through menus and changing parameters, function keys <F1> to <F5> have been programmed to perform specific actions in the Tekterm menus. Table 6.1 describes these function keys. These softkeys can be reprogrammed to perform different functions within TESS and ANSI applications. Important: Tapping the stylus on the appropriate softkey label executes the function of the softkey providing that the labels are visible at the bottom of the 8525 screen. See “Softkeys” on page 164 if they are not visible. Function Key <F1> <F2> <F3> <F4> <F5> Softkey Function NEXT – Displays the next sub-menu PREV – Displays the previous menu. DEFLT – Restores parameters to default settings – even after pressing <F4> to save the changes. SAVE – Saves a change to a parameter value. LITRL – Literal mode allows special characters to be entered in a string parameter such as macro key strings. Table 6.1 Softkeys Note: The SAVE onscreen label only appears when a parameter value has been changed and has not yet been saved. 6.2.2 Macro Keys Important: Refer to “Keyboard Macro Keys” on page 73 for details about creating macros. 8525 vehicle-mounts are equipped with a twelve macro keys that can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys like the <ENTER> key, the <BKSP> key, any function key and arrow key, and so on. 18-Nov-2004 134 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Changing The Screen Font Size Macro Keys <M1> To <M12> These keys are displayed in blue print across the top row of alpha keys and the first two alpha keys in the second row on the keyboard. To access a macro key, press the <BLUE> key followed by the appropriate alpha key. For example, on a Qwerty keyboard: • • Press <BLUE> <Q> to access macro key <M1>. To access <M2>, press <BLUE> <W>, and so on. 6.3 Changing The Screen Font Size To cycle through the available screen fonts: • Press <CTRL> <ALT> <F>. 6.4 Panning The Screen Contents If the content of a screen is too large to fit in the margins of the 8525 display, the content can be panned or shifted to bring the information outside the margins into view. Normally, the Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow pressed. However, if you lock the <BLUE> key ‘on’, you can pan the entire contents of the screen. Panning relies on the values set in the “Use Increment”, “X Increment” and “Y Increment” parameters to determine the number of columns (spaces) and rows (lines) the screen contents shift. • • In the “More Parameters” menu, position the cursor on “View Manager” and press <F1>. First, enable the “Use Increment” parameter – set it to “Y”. “X Increment” determines the number of columns (spaces) the screen pans when the <BLUE> key is locked ‘on’ and the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow key is pressed. “Y Increment” determines the number of rows (lines) the screen pans when the <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key is pressed when the <BLUE> key is locked ‘on. • Assign a value to the “X Increment” and “Y Increment” parameters. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 135 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application The Task Manager–Switching Between Applications To pan the screen contents: • Press the <BLUE> key twice to lock it ‘on’. It will be displayed in uppercase letters – BLUE – in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. • Press the <RIGHT>, <LEFT>, <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key. Note: Pressing the <LEFT> arrow pans the screen to the right, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow pans the screen to the left, and so on. Once you’re done: • Press the <BLUE> key a third time to unlock or turn it off. 6.5 The Task Manager–Switching Between Applications To display the Task Manager screen: • Tap on Task Manager in the Start Menu. Figure 6.1 Task Manager Screen Note: A shortcut – to bypass the Start Menu and go directly to the ‘Task Manager’ screen, press <ALT> <ESC>. To switch between applications: • Highlight the application with which you want to work. • Tap on the Switch To button. To end or close an application: • Highlight the application you want to end, and tap on the End Task button. 18-Nov-2004 136 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application The Tekterm Status Area 6.6 The Tekterm Status Area Tekterm provides a status area just above the softkey labels. The status area indicates the operating condition of the vehicle-mount. Figure 6.2 Status Area In the sample screen above, the security level assigned within the Tekterm application is displayed in the status area. One of the following levels can be displayed – Supervisor or Teklogix. 6.7 TESS Emulation TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) is the normal operating mode of Psion Teklogix computers. Teklogix protocol emulation software resident on network controllers or a Psion Teklogix Software Development Kit (SDK) and installed in the host converts host screens to TESS commands. The 9150 Access Point is also equipped with protocol emulation software. Note: If the message “RESET: Press Enter” flashes at the bottom of the TESS screen when you turn on the 8525, press the <ENTER> key once. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 137 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Configuration 6.7.1 Configuration Note: Each TESS session must have a unique name assigned to it. The title you assign will be displayed in the Display Menu. The process of renaming an existing TESS session and adding a new session is described in the section titled, “Applications” on page 175. A unique number must be assigned in the “Terminal #” parameter for each TESS session. Refer to “Terminal #” in the section titled “TESS Settings” on page 194 for details. 6.7.2 Working With Multiple Sessions To display another session in TESS: • Go to the startup ‘Display Menu’. If you are in a TESS session, press <CTRL><ALT><0> to go to the ‘Display Menu’. • Type the letter corresponding to the application you want to launch. For example, suppose the sessions are listed in the “Display Menu” as ‘D TESS1’ and ‘E TESS2’. To launch the session named TESS2, type the letter e. 6.7.3 The Field Types Fixed Field – displays information that cannot be changed from the keyboard. Entry Field – allows the operator to enter data. This type of field is usually shown as: “........” Match Field – the host computer loads data in the format of the expected entry. If the entered data does not match the expected format, the unit emits a long beep. Auto-tab Field – automatically moves the cursor to the next field when the current field is filled. Bar code only Field – is filled with data from a bar code reader. Keyboard entries are not accepted in this type of field. Serial I/O Field – is filled with data coming from a serial port. Keyboard input is not accepted in this type of field. 18-Nov-2004 138 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 6.7.4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys The following keys allow the Psion Teklogix computer to better emulate the functions of a true IBM 5250 terminal. Note: These keys are active at all times in TESS applications. Key Sequence <PgDn> key <PgUp> key <End> key <Home> key Cursor Movement Cursor moves to the first position in the next input field. If already in the last field, the cursor moves to the first input field on the screen. Cursor moves to the beginning of the current field. If already in the first position, the cursor moves to beginning of the previous field. Current field is cleared from the cursor position to the end of the field, and the cursor moves to the next input field. Cursor moves to the first input field on the screen. 6.7.5 Data Entry The 8525 accepts data until the operator presses a key that sends a transmission to the host computer. The following actions cause the 8525 to transmit: • • Pressing a function key or the <ENTER> key (which is considered to be <F0>) causes the 8525 to transmit. Completing data entry into a “transmit on entry” field also causes the 8525 to transmit. There are several ways to configure the 8525 vehicle-mount to complete a data field: • • • • Pressing <ENTER> after entering data. Pressing a function key after entering data. Pressing an arrow key after entering data. Filling an auto-tab field. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 139 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement 6.7.5.1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement The TESS editing modes and cursor movements in each type of mode are described in the table below. Field mode Fcursor mode Insert mode Replace mode Press <CTRL> f to enter field mode. In this mode, once data entry into a field has been completed, the entry cannot be changed without retyping the entire field. In field mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys do not perform any functions. Pressing the <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key completes the entry field and then, moves the cursor to the previous or next field. Press <CTRL> u to enter fcursor mode. In this mode, once data entry into a field has been completed, the entry cannot be changed without retyping the entire field. In fcursor mode, the <UP>, <DOWN>, <LEFT> and <RIGHT> arrow keys move the cursor between fields. Press <CTRL> i to enter insert mode. In this mode, data can be entered between two characters that have been previously entered. In insert mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys move the cursor right and left within a field. The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previous or next field. Press <CTRL> r to enter replace mode. In this mode, data can be entered over previously entered characters. In replace mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys move the cursor to the right and left within a field. The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the previous or next field. Note: When the “Enter on Arr” parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys do not complete an entry field. Refer to page 207 for details about this parameter. 18-Nov-2004 140 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application <DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS 6.7.5.2 <DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS Field mode Replace mode Insert mode Fcursor mode • In a left justified field, the <DEL> key erases all characters in the field and places the cursor in the left most position of that field. • In a right justified field, the <DEL> key erases all characters in the field and places the cursor in the right most position of that field. • If the <DEL> key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre-filled by the host application, the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message. • In both left and right justified fields, the <DEL> key erases characters beginning from the current cursor position to the end of the field. The cursor remains in the same position in the field. • If the <DEL> key is pressed while cursor is in the right most position in the field, the 8525 emits a keyboard error beep. • If the <DEL> key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre-filled by the host application, the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message. • In both left and right justified fields, the <DEL> key erases the characters from one character position to right of the cursor to the end of the field. • If the <DEL> key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most position in the field, the 8525 emits a keyboard error beep. • If the <DEL> key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre-filled by the host application, the field is flagged as modified and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message. • Refer to “Field Mode” at the beginning of this table. The <DEL> key operates in the same manner in “Fcursor mode” as it does in “Field mode”. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 141 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application <BKSP> Key Behaviour In TESS 6.7.5.3 <BKSP> Key Behaviour In TESS Field mode Replace mode • In a left justified field, the <BKSP> key erases the character directly to the left of the cursor and then moves the cursor one position to the left. When the last character in the field is deleted, the field displays the value that it contained before it was modified, and the field is opened. • In a right justified field, the <BKSP> key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned and shifts the remaining characters to the right by one position. When the last character in the field is deleted, the field displays the value that it contained before it was modified, and the field is opened. • If the <BKSP> key is pressed when the field is empty, the 8525 emits a keyboard error beep. • The <BKSP> key does not delete data pre-filled by the host application. • If the <BKSP> key is pressed in a field that has not been modified, the 8525 emits a keyboard error beep. • If data is entered into a field and is then deleted before the field is completed, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted. • In a left justified field, the <BKSP> key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned unless it is one position to the right of the last character in the string; in this case, the <BKSP> key erases the character to the left of the cursor. • In a right justified field, the <BKSP> key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned. The remaining characters are then shifted to the left of the cursor, and the cursor is shifted to the right by one position. • If the <BKSP> key is pressed while the cursor is in the right-most character position of the field, the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased; it remains in the right most position in the field. • When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains empty – that is, any pre-filled data is not displayed. Pressing the <BKSP> key in the empty field results in a keyboard error beep. • The <BKSP> key can delete data pre-filled by the host application. • If data is entered in a field and is then deleted before the field is completed, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field 18-Nov-2004 or when the screen is transmitted. 142 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application TESS Status Message Insert mode • In a left justified field, the <BKSP> function erases the character on which the cursor is positioned, unless it is at the right end of the character string; in this case, it erases the character to the left of the cursor. When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains empty, and any further <BKSP> functions in the empty field result in a keyboard error beep. • In a right justified field, the <BKSP> function erases the character that is to the right of the cursor and then shifts the data remaining to the right one position. • If the <BKSP> key is pressed while the cursor is in the right-most character position of that field, the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased; it remains in the right-most position in the field. • When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains empty – i.e. any pre-filled data is not displayed. Pressing the BKSP key in the empty field sounds a keyboard error beep. • The <BKSP> key can delete data pre-filled by the host application. • If data is entered into a field and then deleted before the field is completed, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field or when the screen is transmitted. Fcursor mode • Refer to “Field Mode” at the beginning of this table. The <BKSP> key operates in exactly the same manner in “Fcursor mode” as it does in “Field mode”. 6.7.6 TESS Status Message • • Press <CTRL> <S> to continuously display the status message in the lower left corner of the screen. Press <CTRL> <S> again if you want the status message to appear only during transmit (lock-H). The message should look similar to the sample below: V6.0 fld 0.6 “V6.0” is the TESS version number. “fld” indicates that TESS is currently in field mode. Insert and replace mode are represented as “ins” and “rep” respectively. The number “0.6” indicates the response time of the last transmission in seconds. Press <CTRL> <T> to display the unit number instead of the TESS version number. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 143 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Lock Messages 6.7.7 Lock Messages When information is transmitted to the host computer, the keyboard locks to prevent further data entry until the 8525 receives a reply. A locked state is indicated by either “LOCK-B” (base) or “LOCK-H” (host) in the lower left corner of the display. When the reply is received by the 8525, the lock message disappears and the keyboard can be used again. 6.7.8 Control Commands A group of <CTRL> key commands can be used within TESS to dictate how the 8525 will operate under a variety of conditions. • <CTRL> <P> – Reprints the last print page sent from the host. This key combination will not print anything if a print page from the host was not previously received at the 8525 vehicle-mount. • <CTRL> <S> – Displays the 8525 status continuously. Below is a sample status line as it might appear at the bottom of your screen: Lock-B/Lock-H • enh “application name” <CTRL><T> – Displays the 8525 status with the terminal number instead of the name. Lock-B/Lock-H • fld rep “terminal nn” <CTRL> <H> – Displays a menu of available hosts. 6.7.9 Resetting A TESS Session Resetting a TESS session requires that <CTRL> C be pressed three times within a two second period to generate the “RESET – User request” message. • • Press and hold down the <CTRL> key, and press the <C> key three times within a two second period. Press <ENTER>. This procedure restarts the TESS session without affecting the rest of the 8525. 18-Nov-2004 144 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application The Local Menu 6.7.10 The Local Menu The host can store local procedures in the 8525 for use when the unit is off-line. A menu of these procedures appears whenever <CTRL> <L> is pressed (see Figure 6.3). • Press the function key corresponding to the procedure you want to perform. Local procedures will not function when the “Lcl Process” and “Queuing” parameters are disabled (see “Lcl Process – Save on Reset” on page 201 and “Queuing” on page 201). Although using local procedures eliminates the advantages of an on-line 8525, it allows work to continue when the host is unavailable. The “LOCK-B/H” messages are replaced with “NEXT-B/H” in this mode. F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 LOCAL MENU - Select Host Figure 6.3 Local Menu 6.7.11 Selecting Another Host Computer • Press <CTRL> <H> or <F9> from the local menu to display a menu of available hosts. This menu appears only when more than one host is available. Select Host: ...... F1 - Host 1 F2 - Host 2 Figure 6.4 Select Host Screen Note: This feature will not function when the “Lcl Process” and 18-Nov-2004 “Queuing” parameters are disabled (see “Lcl Process – Save on Reset” on page 201 and “Queuing” on page 201). Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 145 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Queuing Mode 6.7.12 Queuing Mode In some applications, queuing mode can decrease the computer lock time. In queuing mode, the host computer may send several pages to an 8525 without waiting for a response. These pages are stored in a queue within the 8525 vehicle-mount. The operator completes the entries on the first page and then, presses a function key. The 8525 simultaneously transmits to the host and displays the next page in the queue. The computer does not lock, allowing the operator to enter data on the next page immediately. This continues as long as there are pages in the queue. Queuing mode is used for repetitive tasks, and the queued screens look identical. The 8525 displays a “Next” message indicating that a new page is on the display. “Next” messages also contain information about radio communications: “NEXT-B” indicates that the 8525 has data to transmit to the base station. “NEXT-H” indicates that the base station has acknowledged a transmission. Unlike lock messages, “Next” messages do not lock the keyboard. Keying is allowed while “Next” messages are displayed. While queuing mode may improve apparent response time, it can present difficulties to hosts that are operating in real time. It should only be used after careful consideration of the host environment. The 8525 must be configured for queuing mode (see the “Queuing” parameter on page 201). Additional information on queuing can be found in the TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) Manual. 6.8 ANSI Emulation The Psion Teklogix 8525 in ANSI mode operates like most other ANSI terminals. This means software that supports ANSI terminals requires little or no changes. 6.8.1 Configuration To configure the 8525 for ANSI mode, the “Name” and “Type” of session – in this case, ANSI – must be specified in the Applications menu. This menu is described in the section titled, “Applications” on page 175. Next, a unique number must be assigned using the “Terminal #” parameter. This number should be unique across the entire system – that is, each 8525 and each application session in each 8525 across your system must have a unique number assigned. This parameter is described in the section titled “ANSI Settings” on 18-Nov-2004 page 176. Once the 8525 is configured, an ANSI operation can be selected from the startup “Display Menu”. 146 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Sending Data To The Host 6.8.2 Sending Data To The Host 8525 vehicle-mounts running ANSI sessions transmit characters to the host as soon as they are typed. The 8525 provides parameters that determine when the computer transmits characters to the host. The 8525 can be configured to transmit after a number of characters are typed in (the “Xmit Count” parameter) or after some time has elapsed (the “Xmit Wait” parameter), or both. This reduces overhead on the radio link and improves response time. See page 185 for more information about these parameters. You can also determine whether the 8525 transmits immediately after the <ENTER> key, an arrow key, or a function key is pressed. The 8525 computer also responds immediately to the device attribute requests “CSIc”, “CSI0c” and “ESCZ”. Note: For a more detailed description of the parameter settings for ANSI, refer to “ANSI Settings” on page 176. 6.8.3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys The Psion Teklogix keyboard differs from most ANSI terminals. Table 6.2 maps the equivalent VT220 keys. Psion Teklogix Key <UP> arrow <DOWN> arrow <RIGHT> arrow <LEFT> arrow <F1>-<F4> <F5> <F6>-<F10> <F11> <F12> <F13> <F14> <F15> <F16> <F17>-<F20> Equivalent VT220 Key Up arrow Down arrow Right arrow Left arrow PF1-PF4 None F6-F10 F11 (ESC) F12 (BS) F13 (LF) F14 Help Do F17-F20 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 147 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Block Mode (Local Editing) Psion Teklogix Key <F21> <F22> <F23> <F24> <F25> <F26> <F27>-<F36> Equivalent VT220 Key Find Insert Here Remove Select Previous Screen Next Screen None Table 6.2 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 6.8.4 Block Mode (Local Editing) The Psion Teklogix 8525s support “block mode” (or Local Editing). Application programs must be specifically written to support this mode. For software that supports this mode, the keys shown in Table 6.3 have special meaning. Key Function <ENTER> Starts transmission of data. Function keys Start transmission of data. Arrow keys Move cursor to the next unprotected position in the appropriate direction. <SHIFT> <RIGHT> arrow Moves the cursor to the next unprotected area. <SHIFT> <LEFT> arrow Moves the cursor to the previous unprotected area. <DEL> Deletes the character to the left of the cursor, and moves cursor one position to the left. Erases the data in an area and moves the cursor to the first position in the area. <CLR> Table 6.3 Function Of Keys In Block Mode 18-Nov-2004 148 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Working With Sessions 6.8.5 Working With Sessions Important: Use only lowercase letters when entering commands at the “TCP >” prompt. 6.8.5.1 Establishing A New Session • Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a. At the TCP> prompt: • Type tel in lowercase letters followed by the Host Name or IP address. • Press <ENTER>. • Log in as usual to begin working with the new session. 6.8.5.2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions To list the current sessions: • Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a. At the TCP> prompt: • Type sess in lowercase letters, and press <ENTER>. To move to another session: • At the TCP> prompt, type sess in lowercase letters followed by the session number to which you want to move. e.g., Type sess 2 to move to session 2. • Press <ENTER>. 6.8.5.3 Closing A Session To close a session: • Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a. • At the TCP> prompt, type cl in lowercase letters followed by the session number you want to close. e.g., Type cl 2 to close session 2. • Press <ENTER>. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 149 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Printing A Screen 6.8.5.4 Printing A Screen To print each line of a screen with a CR/LF between each line: • Press <CTRL>, and type p. The screen will be printed using the port configured as “Print”. 6.8.5.5 Smart Echo – Disabling In some circumstances – like entering a password – you many want to temporarily disable “smart echo”, disguising the characters you type with ‘.’ (periods). • Press <CTRL> <ALT> <P>, and type a ‘.’ (period). • Type the necessary information using the keyboard, and then press <ENTER> to return to “smart echo mode. 6.9 The Radio Statistics Screen To access the radios statistics screen, you’ll need to use the ‘Applications’ menu to assign a radio title: • In the ‘More Parameters’ menu, choose ‘Applications’. • In the ‘Type’ field, choose RadioStats. • In the ‘Title’ field, type a name for the radio screen – e.g., Radio. • Press <F4> to save your changes, and then reset the 8525 – press and hold down the <BLUE> and <ENTER> keys for a minimum of 6 seconds. • In the ‘Display’ menu, type the letter corresponding to the radio statistics screen. For example, in the sample screen below, you’d type d to display the radio statistics screen. 01 A B C D Display Menu Parameters TESS ANSI Radio 18-Nov-2004 150 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application 802.IQ Stats Screen 6.9.1 802.IQ Stats Screen 802.IQ Stats AP/Controller MAC 00:00:00:00 Terminal MAC 00:00:00:00:00:00 bootnum: C33B rm 12 xm 7 rb 50 xi 1 ra 7 xa 12 bt 0 xr 1 rt (avg/lst) 10000: 0 fr:00 ar:00 fh:00 ah:00 ca:0 tn:0 sts:0 typ:0 msk:0 Q:0 AcQ:1 TxQ:1 -----Address Info------------Radio Address 0 End of statistics. • AP/Controller mac • MAC address of the Teklogix access point/controller with which this 8525 is currently associated. Terminal MAC MAC address of the 8525 vehicle-mount computer. • bootnum • • • rm xm rb • • xi ra • xa e.g., C33B – the boot number of the network controller. This number increments each time the controller reboots so that 8525s can detect the reboot when they reinitialize. number of unique received messages. number of unique transmitted messages. number of received beacons. This number should continuously increment. number of initializations with the network controller. number of received acknowledgements. (Normally, this number should match the value in xm.) number of transmitted acknowledgements.18-Nov-2004 (Normally, this number should match the value in rm.) Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 151 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen • bt • xr • rt beacon timeouts. Number of times the beacon has not been received as expected. number of retransmissions. This number should remain low if radio coverage is adequate. average round trip time. This number represents the milliseconds taken to send a message and receive a response from the base station. Cellular Protocol message numbers: • • • • • fr ar fh ah ca • • • • • tn sts typ msk Q • AcQ • TxQ forward remote number (hex). acknowledged remote number (hex). forward host number (hex). acknowledged host number (hex). radio address. This is the Cellular Address, including session number (hex). host terminal number of session (decimal). session status (hex). data stream type (hex). message mask (hex). memory address of first message in receive queue (i.e. if 0 then the receive queue is empty). number of messages that have been sent but not yet acknowledged by the Cellular Master (decimal). number of messages waiting to be sent (decimal). 6.9.2 Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen • Press <CTRL> <ALT> <0> (zero) to return to the ‘Display’ menu. 18-Nov-2004 152 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application The Tekterm Startup Display Menu 6.10 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu The values assigned to Tekterm parameters can be viewed and adjusted to optimize communication at the site in which an 8525 is operating. While some parameters are accessible through the “Parameter Manager”, others can be adjusted through the Windows CE .NET Control Panel. This section provides a description of all parameters and how to adjust them. • Press <CTRL> <ALT> <0> (zero) to work with the ‘Display’ menu. From this startup menu, you can launch the “Parameters” menu along with TESS and/or ANSI sessions. You can also display the Radio Statistics screen. 01 A B C Display Menu Parameters TESS ANSI Note: Aside from the ‘Parameters’ menu, all other applications listed in the ‘Display Menu’ are created in the ‘Applications’ menu. Refer to “Applications” on page 175 for details. To launch an application, either type the letter to the left of the application you want to use, or tap the stylus on the item. For example, to display the “Parameters” menu: • Type the letter a, or • Tap the stylus on the “Parameters” item. Note: To return to the ‘Display Menu’, press <F2> – the ‘Previous’ key. 6.11 Working With Menus The 8525 offers two ways to navigate menus and choose values – you can either use the keyboard or, you can select items by tapping a stylus on the screen. There are four types of parameters: numeric, Y/N, alpha and string entry. Some menus have sub-menus attached to them and others utilize a Control Panel dialogue box 18-Nov-2004 to make adjustments. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 153 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus Important: Depending on the method you use when working with menus, review either “Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus” on page 154 or “Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus” on page 155. 6.11.1 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus 6.11.1.1 Sub-Menus The “»” character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has a sub-menu. Displaying Sub-Menus To display a sub-menu: • Double-tap the stylus on the menu item with the sub-menu you want to display. Returning To The Previous Menu • • If the softkey labels are visible at the bottom of the screen, tap the stylus on the “PREV” (previous) softkey label. If the softkey labels are not visible, you’ll have to press <F2> – the “PREV” function key. 6.11.1.2 Numeric Parameters Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video. • • To decrease the numeric value, tap the stylus on the left side of the number. To increase the numeric value, tap the stylus on the right side of the number. Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it – for example, a preset range of 1 through 10. If you attempt to enter a number which either exceeds 10 or falls below 1, the incorrect value will be rejected – the original value for this parameter, if any, will be displayed. 6.11.1.3 Y/N Parameters Y/N parameters can only be enabled (Y) or disabled (N). To enable or disable 18-Nov-2004 a Y/N parameter: • Tap the stylus on the parameter associated with the Y/N value – the value will toggle between “Y” and “N”. 154 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Alpha Parameters Some Y/N parameters have sub-menus. For these parameters, a double right arrow (») appears next to the “Y” or “N”. • Tap the stylus on the sub-menu arrow (») to display the sub-menu. 6.11.1.4 Alpha Parameters Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter. The allowable values for this type of parameter consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or words. To cycle through the set: • Tap the stylus on the alpha field to cycle through the options. 6.11.1.5 String Entry Parameters You’ll need to use the keyboard to enter values in string entry fields. Refer to “String Entry Parameters” on page 156 for details. 6.11.2 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus • Press the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys to move the cursor up and down the current menu. The currently selected parameter name will be displayed in reverse video. 6.11.2.1 Sub-Menus The “»” character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has a sub-menu. Displaying Sub-Menus To display a sub-menu: • • Use the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys to position the cursor on the menu item with the sub-menu you want to display. Press <F1> – the “NEXT” menu function key. Returning To The Previous Menu • • Press <F2> – the “PREV” function key, or Press <ESC>. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 155 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Numeric Parameters 6.11.2.2 Numeric Parameters Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video. To increment or decrement a number: • Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow keys, or • Type the desired number in the field. Negative values are entered by typing a “-” (minus) sign and then the number. • Press <ENTER>. Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it – for example, a preset range of 1 through 10. If you attempt to enter a number which either exceeds 10 or falls below 1, the incorrect value will be rejected – the original value for this parameter, if any, will be displayed. 6.11.2.3 Y/N Parameters Y/N parameters can only be enabled (Y) or disabled (N). To enable or disable a Y/N parameter: • Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key once, or • Type y to enable or n to disable the parameter. Some Y/N parameters have sub-menus. For these parameters, a double right arrow (») appears next to the “Y” or “N”. 6.11.2.4 Alpha Parameters Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter. The allowable values for alpha parameters consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or words. To cycle through the set: • Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow keys. 6.11.2.5 String Entry Parameters Important: For detailed information about using string entry fields to program macro keys, refer to “Macro Control Panel” on page 164. A sequence or string of characters can be entered in this type of parameter. When a 18-Nov-2004 string entry parameter contains data, it is displayed in reverse video. (Empty fields are not displayed in reverse video.) The methods that can be used to enter information in string entry parameters are described in this section. 156 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application String Entry Parameters In string entry parameters, the <UP> arrow, <DOWN> arrow, <ENTER> and <BKSP> keys have the following functions: • • • • The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys move the cursor between entry fields in the direction of the arrow. <ENTER> completes the entry field. <BKSP> deletes the character to the left of the cursor. <DEL> (key combination <BLUE> <BKSP>) clears the entire field. Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys Important: Make sure the <CTRL> and <SHIFT> keys are turned off! By pressing either the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key, you can cycle through a set of printable characters not directly accessible from the keyboard. • Press the <RIGHT> arrow to display the next character in this sequence, and the <LEFT> arrow to display the previous one. Adding Additional ASCII Characters When you’ve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same field, the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character. Normally, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key moves the cursor to the right, but in a string entry field, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key cycles through the available ASCII characters instead. If you’ve already chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the field, you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor to the right. To add another ASCII character in the string entry field, next to the one you’ve already chosen: • Type a numeric character – for example, type the number 7. • Next, press the <BKSP> key. The cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected ASCII character. • Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the ASCII characters, and select another character. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 157 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Saving Changes To Parameters Entering Information In A String Entry Field In addition to using the fixed set of ASCII values assigned to this type of parameter, you can also type text in a string entry field. • Type the required text in the string entry field – including letters, numbers and symbols. • Press <ENTER> to save the text. Entering Unicode Values Unicode is a trademark of The Unicode Consortium. To enter a Unicode™ value for one-time use: • Press and hold down the <ALT> key while typing a four digit decimal value that represents the Unicode™ character you want to display. • Release the <ALT> key. Important: If you have a set of Unicode™ values that you use frequently, you may want to create and save them in a pop-up window so that you can access them whenever necessary. Refer to “Custom Characters (Unicode™)” on page 172 for details. 6.11.3 Saving Changes To Parameters Whenever a parameter value is altered, the new value must be saved. To do this: • Press <F4> – the “SAVE” key, or • Tap the stylus on the “SAVE” softkey label. Note: If the softkey labels are not visible, you’ll have to press <F4> – the “SAVE” function key. If a parameter value is changed and the menu exited before the change is saved, a dialogue box appears asking whether or not the operator wants to save the changes. 18-Nov-2004 158 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Retrieving Default Parameter Values 6.11.4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values Important: • • • When <F3> – the DEFAULT key – is pressed, all parameter values revert to the factory defaults, including those values that you’ve changed and saved. Press <F3> – the “DEFAULT” function key, or tap the stylus on the “DEFAULT” softkey label – to reinstate the default parameter values. Press <F4> – the “SAVE” function key, or tap the stylus on the “SAVE” softkey label – to save the changes. Reset the 8525. See "Resetting The 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer" in the next section. 6.12 Resetting The 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer Some parameter adjustments require that the 8525 be reset before the changes can take effect. To reset the 8525: • Press and hold down the <BLUE> key and the <ENTER/ON> key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds. A reset results in a complete reboot of the unit. All RAM memory contents are lost. The contents of the flash memory and memory card are preserved. When the 8525 is reset, the screen displays the Psion Teklogix and Microsoft® Windows® CE.net splash screen before displaying the startup desktop. 6.13 The Parameters Menu • At the ‘Display’ menu, type a to display the Parameters menu. 01 Parameters More Parameters Security Display » User » Range see page 161 see page 160 see page 160 The “Parameters” menu allows you to adjust the screen contrast and select a security level. With a Supervisory or Teklogix password, you can also access the parameters 18-Nov-2004 listed in the “More Parameters” sub-menu. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 159 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Security Settings 6.13.1 Security Settings To access the “More Parameters” sub-menus, the “Security” parameter must be set to either a Supervisor or a Teklogix level password. The default security level is User. 01 Parameters Range More Parameters » see page 161 Security see text Display » see text • Tap on the Security parameter to display the Security Level dialogue box. Refer to “Security Levels” on page 51 for details about setting the security level for your 8525. 6.14 Display Options The ‘Display’ sub-menu is used to adjust your unit’s display properties. • Press <F1> to access the ‘Display’ sub-menu. 02 Display Backlight Ctrl Panel » Range see text The Display Properties dialogue box is displayed where you can adjust the appearance, backlight and contrast of your 8525 display. Important: The ‘Display Properties’ dialogue box options are described in detail beginning on page 68. 18-Nov-2004 Figure 6.5 Display Properties 160 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application More Parameters 6.15 More Parameters The “More Parameters” sub-menus contain the Tekterm parameters and can only be accessed with the proper security password – either a Supervisory or a Teklogix password. (Refer to “Security Settings” on page 160 for details.) Warning: • Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of how they operate. Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase response time or cause communication difficulties. Generally, parameters are configured for each site during installation. At the startup ‘Display’ menu, type ‘a’ to display the ‘Parameters’ menu. 01 Parameters More Parameters Security Display • » Supervisor » Range see page 161 see page 160 see page 160 To open the ‘More Parameters’ menu, press <F1>. 02 Parameters Radio System Scanner Ctrl Panel View Manager Applications Ports Network » » » » » » » 6.16 Radio Parameters Important: Radio parameters should not be changed from their factory settings without a clear understanding of your system. The 8525 is equipped with an 802.11b radio. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 161 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Radio Parameters • Press <F1> to display the ‘Radio’ sub-menu. 03 Radio 802.11 » • Press <F1> to access the ‘802.11’ sub-menu. 04 802.11 DS SS 802.IQ v1 N » • Set ‘802.IQ v1’ to ‘Y’ to activate these parameters. and press <F1> to display ‘802.IQ v1’ parameters. Range 05 802.IQ v1 Auto Radio Addr Y Y/N Radio Address 0 1-3840 Initial RTT 0 0-1000 Protocol Type 2457 1501-65535 802.IQ v1 When 802.IQ v1 is set to “Y”, the attached sub-menu of parameters is enabled. Auto Radio Addr If this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), a request is sent to the network controller to assign a radio address to the vehicle-mount computer radio. If “Auto Radio Addr” is set to “N”, the value entered in the “Radio Address” parameter is used. (Refer to "Radio Address" in this section for details about manually assigned radio addresses.) Important: Ensure that all 8525s grouped in the system use the same addressing process – that is, if you choose to use automatic radio addressing, use this addressing process for all units operating in the same system. If you choose to assign radio addresses manually using the “Radio Address” parameter, use this process for all units in the same system. Radio Address The value entered in the “Radio address” parameter is used to identify the 8525 over the radio link. A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned 18-Nov-2004 for each 8525 vehicle-mount computer. 162 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application System Parameters Initial RTT (Round Trip Time) Round trip time is the elapsed time between a vehicle-mount computer transmission and an access point acknowledgement. Each 8525 continuously adjusts the acceptable round trip time, calculating the average elapsed time over a number of transmissions. If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the average round trip time calculated, the computer will send the transmission again. Because 8525s cannot calculate an average round trip time without a number of transmissions, a starting point or “Initial Round Trip Time” is required. The computer uses the time assigned to the “Initial RTT” parameter as a starting value for round trip calculations. Once the 8525 begins transmitting and receiving data, this value will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between transmissions and acknowledgements. Protocol Type “Protocol Type” is used to identify the Ethernet packet frame type sent by the 8525. The default value – 2457 – assigned to this parameter identifies the Teklogix 802.IQ protocol Ethernet packet frame types. The “Protocol Type ID” should only be altered if the default value is already being used to specify another application Ethernet frame type. Important: If you change the value assigned to “Protocol Type ID”, ensure that all 8525s and 9150s in your system use the same number. 6.17 System Parameters 03 System Keyboard Audio Pwr Mgmt Ctrl Panel User Permissions Auto Start » » » » Y 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 163 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Keyboard 6.17.1 Keyboard Keyboard 04 Macro Ctrl Panel Indicators Softkeys Ctrl Panel » Y Y » 6.17.1.1 Macro Control Panel • Highlight ‘Macro Ctrl Panel’, and press <F1> to display the Macros tab in the Keyboard Properties dialogue box. Figure 6.6 Macro Dialogue Box Important: Refer to “Keyboard Macro Keys” on page 73 for detailed instructions about creating macros. Important: For information about using the macro keys you’ve created, refer to “Macro Keys” on page 134. 6.17.1.2 Indicators When the “Indicators” parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), onscreen indicators are displayed to indicate the operating condition of the 8525. Refer to “Onscreen Indicators” on page 35 for a list of possible indicators. 6.17.1.3 Softkeys Enabling (setting to “Y”) the “Softkeys” parameter displays softkey labels18-Nov-2004 at the bottom of the screen to indicate the function of each softkey. To block the display of softkey labels, set this parameter to “N”. 164 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Ctrl Panel Softkeys are function keys which are programmed to execute specific actions when pressed. Refer to Table 6.1 on page 134 for a list of softkey labels. 6.17.1.4 Ctrl Panel This menu item displays the Keyboard Properties dialogue box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys, the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the <BLUE> and <ORANGE> keys. Figure 6.7 Keyboard Properties Important: Refer to “Keyboard Properties” on page 70 for details about this dialogue box. 6.17.2 Audio 04 Audio Beep Tone Beep Time Error Tone Error Time Scan Tone 1 Scan Time 1 Scan Tone 2 Scan Time 2 Scan Tone 3 Scan Time 3 Sounds Ctrl Panel Range 3000 250 1000 1000 1500 100 2000 100 2500 100 » Figure 6.8 Audio Menu 800-3000 0-2000 800-3000 0-2000 800-3000 0-2000 800-3000 0-2000 800-3000 0-2000 see text 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 165 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Audio Beep Tone And Beep Time These parameters regulate the frequency and duration of beeps emitted in a TESS or ANSI session when one of the following is received at the 8525: an advisory, a hey you or a bell character. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds. Error Tone And Error Time These parameters determine the frequency and duration of each error tone. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds. Scan Tone 1 And Scan Time 1 “Scan tone 1” and “Scan time 1” determine the frequency and duration of the first beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds. Scan Tone 2 And Scan Time 2 “Scan tone 2” and “Scan time 2” determine the frequency and duration of the second beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds. Scan Tone 3 And Scan Time 3 “Scan tone 3” and “Scan time 3” determine the frequency and duration of the third beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds. Sounds Ctrl Panel This option displays the Volume & Sounds Properties dialogue box. Figure 6.9 Adjusting The Volume This dialogue box is used adjust the beeper volume and to select the conditions 18-Nov-2004 under which the 8525 will emit a beep. 166 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel Important: Refer to “Volume And Sound Properties” on page 79 for details about this dialogue box. 6.17.3 Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel This menu item displays the Power Properties dialogue box. Figure 6.10 Power Properties Dialogue Box Important: Refer to “Power Management Properties” on page 80 for details about this dialogue box. 6.17.4 User Permissions 04 User Permissions Screen Switch Y Font Change Y Exit N Range Y/N Y/N Y/N At User security level, the operator is restricted to a small group of parameters. Important: Only Supervisor and Teklogix level passwords can change the values of the User options. Screen Switch When set to “Y”, the operator can use the “Split screen” parameter to toggle between screens when multiple applications are running on the 8525. Refer to “Split Screen” on page 170 for details about using this function. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 167 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Auto Start Font Change When “Font Change” is set to “Y”, operators at the User level can change the font size of their 8525s. Exit If this parameter is set to “Y”, an operator with user level security can exit Tekterm by pressing <ALT> <F4>. If “Exit” is set to “N”, the operator cannot exit Tekterm. 6.17.5 Auto Start “Auto Start” determines whether or not Tekterm is automatically launched when the 8525 is reset. If this parameter is set to “N”, Tekterm will not be launched when the terminal resets. 6.18 Scanner Control Panel This menu item displays a Scanner Properties dialogue box in which you can set up the particulars of your unit’s scanner performance, choose the bar codes which will be decoded, and so on. Figure 6.11 Scanner Properties Dialogue Box Important: Refer to "Scanner Properties Setup" beginning on page 114 for details about setting up your scanner. 18-Nov-2004 168 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application View Manager 6.19 View Manager View Manager Display Shift Y Block Cursor Y Use Increment N X-increment 5 Y-increment 5 Split Screen » Custom Chars » Font Override N» Default Colours » Range Y/N Y/N Y/N 1..40 1..12 see text see text see text see text Display Shift If this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the display in application screens shifts so that there are no blank columns on the left-most side of the display. Block Cursor When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor is presented as a flashing block. When “Block Cursor” is set to “N”, the cursor is presented as a flashing underline character. Use increment When “Use increment” is enabled (set to “Y”) and the cursor is moved off the display, the screen contents shift by the values specified in the “X-increment” and “Y-increment” parameters. X-increment This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view. The value assigned here doesn’t take effect until “Use Increment” is set to “Y”. Y-increment This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view. The value assigned here doesn’t take effect until “Use 18-Nov-2004 Increment” is set to “Y”. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 169 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Split Screen 6.19.1 Split Screen 04 Split screen Type 2 Way ||| View IDs A This parameter allows you to split the display view so that more than one application screen can be displayed at the same time. The split screen parameters, “Type” and “View IDs”, are used to tailor the screen view for your needs. Type And View IDs The “Type” parameter determines how a screen will be split. The 8525 supports up to four application screens. The “View IDs” parameter determines which application screens will be displayed in each pane of the split screen. “Moving Between Split Screens” on page 171 describes how to move the cursor from one split screen to the next. 6.19.1.1 Splitting And Displaying Screens Before splitting the screen, you need to determine which applications should appear in each pane of the split screen. The available applications are listed in the main “Display Menu”. Each application listed in the “Display Menu” is preceded by a letter – for example, Parameters is preceded by an A. This letter is used in the “View IDs” string entry field to fix each pane of a split screen to a corresponding application. If you need to display the startup “Display Menu”: • Press <CTRL> <ALT><0>. To split a screen: • With the cursor on the “Type” parameter, use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the types of split screens available. The vertical and horizontal lines displayed at the “Type” parameter indicate how the screen will be split – for example, in the sample screen on page 172, the vertical lines indicate the screen will be vertically split into two segments. The screen can also be split horizontally 3 ways or 4 ways. 18-Nov-2004 170 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Moving Between Split Screens Once you’ve indicated how you want to split the screen in the “Type” parameter: • Use the <DOWN> arrow key to move the cursor to the “View IDs” parameter. • For each application you want to display, type the letter corresponding to the application. For example, suppose you want to split the screen into two vertical segments with the Parameters menu in the left pane of the screen and a TESS session in the right pane. In the “Display Menu”, the letter A represents “Parameters” and B represents “TESS”. The “Type” and “View ID” values would be represented as follows: 04 Split screen Type 2 Way ||| View IDs AB • Press <ENTER>. To display the split screen on the 8525: • Press <CTRL> <DOWN> arrow. 6.19.1.2 Moving Between Split Screens To move the cursor from one pane in a split screen to the next: • Press <CTRL> <RIGHT> or <LEFT>. The cursor moves in order from the left-most pane to the right and from the top-most pane to the bottom. 6.19.1.3 Toggling Between Full & Split Screens To toggle between a split and full screen format: • Press <CTRL> <DOWN> arrow. The application displayed when toggling from a split to a full screen format is determined by the cursor location in the split screen. For example, if the cursor is in the pane of a split screen in which the TESS application is displayed and <CTRL> <DOWN> is pressed to display a full screen, the TESS application will be displayed in the full screen. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 171 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card 6.19.1.4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card When a screen is split, the application displayed in each pane is fixed in the “View IDs” parameter. Using an asterisk * in the “View IDs” parameter indicates that a particular pane in the split screen is not fixed to any particular application and can be changed as required. For example, suppose you want to split the screen into two vertical segments with the left pane containing the “Parameters” menu and the right pane containing no fixed application. The “Type” and “View IDs” parameters would be completed as follows: 04 Split screen Type 2 Way ||| View IDs A* To change the application displayed in the pane with no fixed application: • If the cursor is not currently in the pane, press <CTRL> <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow to move the cursor into the appropriate screen. • Press <CTRL> <ALT><0> to display the startup “Display Menu”. • Type the letter corresponding to the new application you want to display. 6.19.2 Custom Characters (Unicode™) Note: The Unicode ™ characters created here are accessible only within the Tekterm application. To create Unicode ™ characters that are accessible system-wide, refer to “Unicode Mapping” on page 75. The “Custom Characters” parameter allows you to create Unicode™ characters not available directly from the keyboard, including accented characters. Unicode is a trademark of The Unicode Consortium. You can create up to 20 Unicode™ characters that will be stored in a pop-up menu accessible from any application. 6.19.2.1 Creating A Unicode™ Character Note: You can create a Unicode™ character by pressing and holding down the <ALT> while typing the decimal value that represents the Unicode™ character you want to use. However, you will need to press <ALT> and 18-Nov-2004 retype the decimal value each time you want to use the special character. 172 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window The advantage to creating special characters using the “Custom Chars” parameters is that the characters you create in the customer characters table are saved in a pop-up window that is accessible from any application. • • In the Parameters menu, highlight “View Manager” and press <F1>. Highlight “Custom Chars”, and press <F1> to display the custom characters table. 04 Custom Chars Font Small U+ 0000 U+ 0000 • • • • • Position the cursor on ‘Font’ at the top of the table. Press the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow keys until the character set you want to use is displayed. You can create up to 20 Unicode™ characters in the custom characters table. To create a Unicode™ value: • • Replace the 0000 value with a hex value that represents the Unicode™ character you want to use. Press the <DOWN> arrow key to accept the value and move the cursor to the next field. When you have finished creating the Unicode™ characters you want to use: • • Press <F4> to save your changes. Reset the 8525 – press and hold down the <ENTER> and <BLUE> key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds. 6.19.2.2 Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window The Unicode™ values you create are stored in a pop-up window that you can access from any application. To display the pop-up window within any application: • Press <CTRL> <ALT> <A>. 18-Nov-2004 Note: Unicode™ characters that cannot be displayed on your screen with the Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 173 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window font you are currently using are displayed as rectangles in the pop-up window. (See the sample menu on page 174.) However, the actual Unicode™ value you created will be sent to the host. Select item with arrow keys. Press ENTER when done. Press ESC to cancel. • Use the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow key to position the cursor on the Unicode™ value you want to use, and press <ENTER>. To close the pop-up menu when you’re done: • Press the <ESC> key. Font Override Font Override 04 Font Code 0 ... is font 18x32 Font Code 1 ... is font 18x32 Font Code 2 ... is font 10x26 Font Code 3 ... is font 18x32 Font Code 4 ... is font 8x20 This parameter is used to redefine the font to which 5 different font codes refer. 18-Nov-2004 174 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Applications Default Colours 04 Default Colours Foreground Black Background White Range see text see text Foreground And Background This menu is used to select the foreground and background colours used within Tekterm. If an unreadable combination is assigned – the foreground and background have the same value – the foreground colour will be inverted. The allowable values are: Red, Green, Yellow, Blue, Magenta, Cyan, White and Black. Note: The 8525 must be reset – press and hold down the <BLUE> and <ENTER> keys for a minimum of six seconds – in order for the new colour assignments to take affect. 6.20 Applications “TESS” and “ANSI” applications require unique names so that several different sessions of “TESS” and “ANSI” can operate simultaneously. 8525s can support up to 8 sessions at one time. 03 Applications Type1 #1 ANSI Title1 #1 parts Settings 1 » . . . Type1 #8 None Title1 #8 Settings 8 » Important: Range None, ANSI,TESS see text see text These applications will become active only after the changes made in the Application screen are saved by pressing <F4> – the SAVE key. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 175 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application ANSI Settings Type And Title Up to eight applications can be entered in this parameter. The “Type #” field indicates the type of session you will be running. The “Title #” parameter should be completed with a name that is meaningful to the operator. • The available options for the “Type #” field are TESS, ANSI and None. Use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the options. • The “Title #” field needs a name that is meaningful to the operator. In addition, “TESS” and “ANSI” applications require unique titles so that several different sessions of “TESS” and “ANSI” can operate simultaneously. These titles will appear in startup “Display Menu”. Each session will have its own set of parameters. • To display the “Settings” menu for your application, position the cursor on “Settings”, and press <F1> – the NEXT key. Note: Before you can access the “Settings” menu, you must first complete the “Name” and “Type” fields. 6.20.1 ANSI Settings Ansi 04 Auto Term # Terminal # Host Conn Screen Xmit Modes Kbd Modes Edit Modes Serial Host Char Set Anchor View N» 1 » » » » » » » N» Range see text 1..1024 see text see text see text see text see text see text see text see text Each session you create has its own “Settings” parameters. Additional ANSI information is documented in “ANSI Emulation” on page 146. Auto Term# Note: Refer to “Group” on page 177 for additional instructions. 176 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Host Conn When this parameter is set to “Y”, a unique number is assigned for the current ANSI session. If “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, any value assigned to the “Terminal #” parameter is ignored. Note: “Auto Term#” is available when 802.IQv2 is assigned to the “Host Conn” parameter or when 802.IQv1 is enabled in the Radio Menu (see “802.IQ v1” on page 162). Group Auto Term# Group 1 Range 1-5 When “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, the ‘Group’ parameter is used to identify the group or pool of numbers from which an auto-address is chosen. Terminal # For every application session you create, the “Terminal #” assigned must be nonzero and unique. This parameter defines the number for the ANSI session and uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the 8525. Other applications running in the 8525, such as a TESS session or another ANSI session must each have a different number. In addition, each Psion Teklogix 8525 using the radio link must have a unique number. 6.20.1.1 Host Conn Range Host Conn Conn Type Telnet 802.IQv2 9010t Telnet Narrow Band Settings » see text Conn Type The options for this a parameter vary depending on the type of application you are running – ANSI or TESS and the type of radio installed in your 8525. For ANSI applications, this parameter allows you to choose one of the following types of connections: 802.IQv2, 9010t (TCP Direct), Telnet and Narrow 18-Nov-2004 Band. Keep in mind that choosing Telnet allows the 8525 to communicate directly with the host. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 177 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Host Conn Settings Note: The “Settings” sub-menu is not available when 802.IQv2 is selected as the “Conn Type”. In addition, this sub-menu varies depending on which option you’ve selected – Telnet or 9010t. Telnet Settings Host Port 23 Terminal Type VT220 ENTER Pmpt Press ENTER to connect ESC Prompt Press ESC to cancel Auto Login N» Func Key Remap N» Arrow Key Remap N» 9010t Settings Host Port 9999 Range see text 0-32767 see text see text see text Y/N Y/N Y/N Range see text 0-9999 Host This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format ###.###.###.### or a host name if DNS is used. Port “Port” specifies the 9010t (TCP Direct) or Telnet port number. The default 9010t port number assigned is 9999, the maximum allowable value. The default Telnet port number assigned is 23 with a maximum allowable value of 32767. Terminal Type This parameter allows the 8525 to perform its own emulation (as opposed to the controller). The value assigned to this parameter informs the host of the terminal type the session is emulating. ENTER Pmpt This string indicates that the 8525 is waiting for the user to press <ENTER> at the 18-Nov-2004 time of connection. 178 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Host Conn ESC Prompt This string indicates that the user can press the <ESC> key to terminate a connection attempt before the connection is established. Auto Login Auto Login Login Prompt Login Password Prompt Password Password Echo Login Failed gin: word: Y incorrect Range see text see text see text see text Y/N see text The “Auto Login” parameters are used to define whether or not the 8525 will attempt to log in automatically. The Auto Login sequence is as follows: 1. Host sends “Login Prompt”. 2. 8525 responds with “Login”. 3. Host sends “Password Prompt”. 4. 8525 responds with “Password”. 5. Host may send password echo. 6. 8525 ignores password echo if “Password Echo” is set to “Y”, otherwise skip to step 7. 7. 8525 looks for “Login Failed” in next transmission from host. 8. Login successful or Login failed and return to step 1. Login Prompt When the unit receives the string assigned to this parameter, it will respond with “Login”. Login The unit responds with this string when it receives a “Login Prompt”. Password Prompt When the 8525 receives this string, it responds with a “Password”. Password 18-Nov-2004 The computer responds with this string when it receives a “Password Prompt”. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 179 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Host Conn Password Echo When this parameter is set to “Y”, the host will echo data back to the terminal after receiving a “Password”. Login Failed When the unit receives this string, it assumes that the login attempt has failed and returns to the “Enter Pmpt”. Func Key Remap In ANSI, each function key has a default string associated with it. When a function key is pressed, the corresponding default string is sent to the host. The ‘Func Key Remap’ table allows these function key character sequences to be redefined. 07 F 1 F 2 F 3 • • • F28 F29 F30 Func Key Remap 1B 4F 50 00 1B 4F 51 00 1B 4F 52 00 1B 1B 1B 5B 5B 5B 34 34 34 32 33 34 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 7E 7E 00 00 00 00 To change values: • Press the <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key to highlight a function key. • Press the <TAB> key to move through the string of values. • Either type new values, or press the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow key to change the values. 18-Nov-2004 180 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Screen Arrow Key Remap In ANSI, the arrow keys have a default string associated with them to move the cursor in the direction of the arrow. The ‘Arrow Key Remap’ table allows the arrow key character sequences to be redefined. Arrow Key Remap Up Arrow 1B 5B Down Arrow 1B 5B Right Arrow 1B 5B Left Arrow 1B 5B 07 41 42 43 44 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 To change arrow key values: • Press the <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key to highlight an arrow key. • Press the <TAB> key to move through the string of values. • Either type new values, or press the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow key to change the values. 6.20.1.2 Screen Screen 05 # of Pages # of Rows # of Cols Default Font 80-col. Font 132-col. Font Video Label F1-F10 Colour override 4 24 80 16x30 16x30 16x30 » » N» Range 0..16 4..60 80 or 132 see text see text see text see text see text see text # of Pages This parameter defines how many pages are accessible to application programs. The ANSI control functions – Next Page (NP) and Previous page (PP) – are used to select another page. These pages are independent of each other so that if lines of text scroll off a page, the other pages are unaffected. 18-Nov-2004 There is no error indication from the vehicle-mount computer if the memory required by the selected number and size of pages exceeds the memory available in the computer. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 181 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Screen # of Rows This parameter defines the logical page length (in lines) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length. This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the vehicle-mount’s display. Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display. Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number. # of Cols This parameter defines the logical page width (in characters) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width. This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the display. Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display. Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number. Default font This parameter determines the default font that appears when the 8525 memory is reset. • Use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the available options. 80-col. font & 132-col. font These parameters are used to set the font size on the screen if the default font is not acceptable. An escape sequence must be sent from the host before a vehicle-mount can switch to either 80-col. font or 132-col. font. • Use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow keys to scroll through the size options for these parameters. 18-Nov-2004 182 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Screen Video 06 Video Bold Blink Reverse Underline NONE BLNK REV ULIN Range see text see text see text see text The possible attributes for these parameters are: “BLNK” (blink), “ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse), and “NONE” (normal). Bold This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Bold” ANSI attribute. Blink This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Blink” ANSI attribute. Reverse This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Reverse” ANSI attribute. Underline This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Underline” ANSI attribute. Label F1-F10 Note: This menu uses string entry fields. For detailed information about completing this type of field, refer to “String Entry Parameters” on page 156. Label F1-10 06 F1 • • • F10 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 183 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Xmit Modes Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions in your application. These keys are identified through softkey labels – reverse video labels that are displayed at the bottom of the screen. These softkey labels can be reconfigured using the menu attached to the “Label F1-F10” parameter. To edit a label: • Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the Label menu, and type a new name – preferably one that describes the corresponding key’s function. Note: The number of allowable characters in a softkey label is dynamically calculated based on the screen size and the number of softkeys the unit supports Colour Override Note: This menu is available only if the 8525 is equipped with a colour display. 06 Colour Override Foreground Black Background White Range see text see text Foreground And Background When “Colour Override” is set to ‘Y’, the colours chosen in this menu are displayed in the ANSI sessions. These colour settings will override the “Default Colours” set from within the “View Manager” menu. Refer to “Default Colours” on page 175 for details. The allowable values are: Red, Green, Yellow, Blue, Magenta, Cyan, White and Black. 6.20.1.3 Xmit Modes 05 Xmit Modes Xmit Count Xmit Wait Dev Attr Auto-Answer 7 bit Block Mode 99 1 [ ? 62 ; 1 ; 2 ; 6 c Y » 184 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Range 0..99 0..999 see text see text Y/N see text 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Xmit Modes Xmit Count This parameter determines how many characters from the keyboard or scanner are buffered by the 8525 before being transmitted to the host. If 0 (zero) is selected, the vehicle-mount transmits only according to the “Xmit Wait” parameter. If the ANSI block mode features are used, this parameter should be set to 99. Note: If the 8525 is not in local edit mode, the <ENTER>, arrow, <CTRL>, and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the “Xmit Count” parameter setting. Xmit Wait This parameter determines the length of time the 8525 collects keystrokes before transmitting them to the host. This value is specified in increments of one 10th of a second (i.e., a value of 10 represents 1 second). If 0 (zero) is selected, the computer transmits only according to the “Xmit Count” parameter. Note: If the 8525 is not in local edit mode, the <ENTER>, arrow, <CTRL>, and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the “Xmit Wait” parameter setting. Dev Attr This string entry parameter specifies a device attribute string. This string can be up to 16 characters long. The computer sends this string to the host when it receives a DA or DECID control. The example shown in the “Xmit Modes” screen sample on page 184 is the device attribute sent to a VAX, identifying the Psion Teklogix vehicle-mount computer as a VT220 terminal. This parameter may or may not be set, depending on the requirements of the host computer. Auto-Answer This string can be up to 30 characters long and is sent by the 8525 as a reply to an “ENQ” character from the host. The “Auto-Answer” string is programmable in the same manner as the keyboard macros. For example, this string can be used to automatically send the username and password when logging into the host. Refer to "Macro Control Panel" beginning on page 164 for additional details about macros. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 185 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Xmit Modes 7 bit When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the vehicle-mount computer transmits 8 bit controls. When enabled (set to “Y”), the vehicle-mount transmits 7 bit controls. This parameter applies to character mode, block mode, and media copy mode. Block Mode 06 Block Mode Kbd lock N Xmit key N FETM N GATM N MATM N SATM Y TTM Y EOL chars EOB chars All modes in this section affect the data stream sent to the host computer, the serial port and the console port. These modes apply to the Block mode (Local Editing) and the Media Copy function, unless otherwise noted. Consult the Teklogix ANSI Terminal Programmer’s Manual for more information. Kbd lock When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the 8525 does not lock the keyboard after a block mode transmission. When enabled (set to “Y”), the keyboard is locked after a transmission. The application program must unlock the keyboard by resetting the Keyboard Action Mode (KAM), using the Reset Mode (RM) or Enable Manual Input (EMI) controls. Xmit key When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the key that causes the 8525 vehiclemount to transmit is not sent to the host as part of the transmitted data. When enabled (set to “Y”), the key that causes a transmission is sent after the page data has been sent to the host. This parameter applies only to block mode. 18-Nov-2004 186 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Xmit Modes FETM When the Format Effector Transfer Mode (FETM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”), Format Effectors are inserted in data sent to the host or included in data when transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), the Format Effectors are not inserted into the data sent to the host and are not included in the data transferred to the console or serial ports. GATM When the Guarded Area Transfer Mode (GATM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”), only unguarded data is transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), both guarded and unguarded data can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports. MATM When the Multiple Area Transfer Mode (MATM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”), only the selected area containing the cursor can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), all selected areas can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports. This mode is significant only if the Selected Area Transfer Mode (SATM) is disabled. SATM When the Selected Area Transfer Mode (SATM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the selected areas defined by SSA/ESA and DAQ can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), the full contents of the buffer can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports. TTM When the Transfer Termination Mode (TTM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the cursor position determines the end of the string that can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor position is ignored. EOL chars This string entry parameter specifies a string of up to 8 characters that are sent after each line in a block transmission. If the parameter is not used, the rules specified in 18-Nov-2004 “Transmitted Data Stream” are used to determine end of line characters. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 187 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Kbd Modes EOB chars This string entry parameter specifies a string of up to 8 characters that are sent after each block transmission. 6.20.1.4 Kbd Modes 05 Kbd Modes Arrow mode Echo mode DEL key BKSP key PrintScreen key Xmit Enter Insert Newline Disable kbd DEC Cursor Keys cursor Smart DEL BS 16 Y N N N cursor mode Range cursor, field Smart, Local, Host BS, CLEAR DEL, CLEAR 1..255 Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N see text Arrow mode This parameter determines whether arrow keys move the cursor within a field or between fields. When set to “field”, pressing an arrow key causes the cursor to move to the next field in the direction of the arrow. When set to “cursor”, pressing the <LEFT> and <RIGHT> arrow keys move the cursor within the current field. Echo Mode This parameter selects echo mode for the 8525. The available modes are “Local”, “Host”, and “Smart”. Local: In this mode, any character entered using the keyboard is displayed before being sent to the host. Certain keys cause additional action at the 8525, as shown in Table 6.4 on page 189. Host: In this mode, the vehicle-mount computer sends all keyboard entries to the host and displays only data received from the host. Smart: This mode reduces or eliminates the delay between typing18-Nov-2004 a character on the keyboard and displaying the character echoed by the host computer. The 8525 displays all printable characters on the 188 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Kbd Modes screen before sending them to the host. The vehicle-mount compares the characters echoed by the host to the characters placed on the page and fixes the display if the host echoes are different. The maximum number of characters waiting for echo is 25. Any additional characters are sent to the host but not displayed. When the 8525 is in insert mode, smart echo is disabled. Key Function ENTER In newline mode, this key moves the cursor to the first column of the next line. In line feed mode, this key moves the cursor to column one of the current line. CTRL-G (Bell) The 8525 beeps. CTRL-H (Backspace) The cursor moves back one space. CTRL-I (Tab) The cursor moves to the next horizontal tab stop. CTRL-J (Line Feed) CTRL-L (Form Feed) The cursor moves down one line in the same column. CTRL-K (Vertical Tab) The cursor moves down to the next line with a vertical tab set. DEL This key deletes the character to the left of the cursor and moves the cursor to the left by one position. Table 6.4 Function Of Special Keys In Local Echo Mode DEL Key This parameter determines whether the <DEL> key acts as a delete key, erasing the character to the right of the cursor, or a backspace key, erasing the character to the left of the cursor or as a clear key, erasing the contents of a field. BKSP Key This parameter determines whether the <BKSP> key acts as a backspace key, 18-Nov-2004 erasing the character to the left of the cursor, as a delete key, erasing the character to the right of the cursor or as a clear key, erasing the contents of a field. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 189 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Kbd Modes PrintScreen Key This parameter determines the “hot-key” for printing the screen contents via the 8525 serial port. The default is <CTRL> P (16). Note: The 8525’s port must be set to “printer” (see“Ports– Tether And Console” on page 217). Xmit Enter The <ENTER> key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the next field. However, some applications require that the <ENTER> key start a transmission from the 8525. When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter causes the <ENTER> key to start a transmission. Insert When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), it behaves in “replace” mode – a character entered at the keyboard or received from the host replaces the character at the cursor position. The cursor then advances one character position. When enabled (set to “Y”), the character entered at the keyboard or received from the host is inserted at the cursor position after shifting the characters at and following the cursor forward one position. The cursor is advanced one position. The extent of the characters affected by the shift depends on the setting of the “Edit Extent” parameter (see page 191). Newline When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), an LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move down one line in the same column. In addition, the <ENTER> key transmits a CR. When enabled (set to “Y”), an LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move to the first column of the next line. The <ENTER> key transmits both a CR and an LF. Disable kbd Setting this parameter to “Y” disables the keyboard and scanner. When this parameter is set to “N”, the keyboard and scanner are enabled. 18-Nov-2004 190 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Edit Modes DEC Cursor Keys This parameter can be set to either Cursor Mode or Appl. Mode. Cursor Mode causes the cursor keys to generate ANSI cursor control sequences. Application Mode causes the cursor keys to send application control functions. 6.20.1.5 Edit Modes 04 Edit Modes Auto wrap Erasure mode Tab stop mode Edit extent Disp controls N N N Line N Range Y/N Y/N Y/N see text Y/N Auto wrap If “Auto wrap” is disabled (set to “N”), characters received when the cursor is at the right edge of the screen replace the previously displayed characters. If “Auto wrap” is enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor wraps to the next line when the current line is filled. The display scrolls up if the cursor is at the bottom margin. Erasure mode When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), erase functions can only erase unprotected characters. When enabled (set to “Y”), the erase functions can erase characters regardless of their protected state. Tab stop mode When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the setting and clearing of horizontal tab stops apply to the same horizontal position of all lines on the page. When enabled (set to ‘Y”), horizontal tab setting and clearing apply only to the current line. Edit extent This parameter selects the extent of the display to be affected by the ICH and DCH controls and received character insertion. The possible values are Line, Area, Display or Fld. The shifting caused by ICH, DCH and character insertion is confined to the selected extent. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 191 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Serial Disp controls When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), any control codes received from the host are performed as described. When enabled (set to “Y”), any received control functions are displayed and are not performed. If any C0 or C1 controls are received from the host, their standard ANSI mnemonics are displayed in reverse video. Other characters are displayed as normal characters. This mode can also be set with the Set Mode (SM) control but can only be reset from the Parameters menu. 6.20.1.6 Serial 05 Serial Primary Port Secondary Port Async In Start End Any Available Any Available N 0 0 Range see text see text Y/N 0..255 0..255 Primary Port & Secondary Port ANSI print commands (such as ‘MC’ or Media Copy) control the transfer of data to and from the serial and console ports on the 8525. At the 8525, the value assigned at the ‘Primary Port’ and ‘Secondary Port’ parameters determines which port the ANSI print command will identify and use as primary and secondary. The allowable options are: Any Available, 1st printer, 2nd printer, 3rd printer, 4th printer, 1st Serial, 2nd Serial, 3rd Serial, 4th Serial and Disabled. Async In When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the serial (async) port is ready to receive input at all times. Start/End These parameters specify the “start” and “end” characters of input received from the serial (async) port. 18-Nov-2004 192 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Host Char Set 6.20.1.7 Host Char Set The ‘Host Char Set’ menu allows you to specify a character set in the ‘Lower’ and ‘Upper’ character tables. 05 Host Char Set Lower ASCII ISO-IR 006 Upper DEC Multinational Note: When an 8-bit set is selected from the ‘Lower’ character set, the ‘Upper’ character set will change to the same value. The ‘Upper’ character set cannot be altered until a non-8-bit value is assigned for the ‘Lower’ character set. To choose ‘Lower’ and ‘Upper character sets: • Position the cursor on the ‘Lower’ or ‘Upper’ parameter, and press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to display the character set options. • Press <F4> to save your selection to memory. Important: When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed, a rectangular box is used as a substitute. 6.20.1.8 Anchor View 05 Anchor x origin y origin 1 1 Range 1..24 1..80 When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter locks the display at a defined location on the screen, preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved. The “x origin” and “y origin” coordinates specify where the screen origin, the upper left corner of the screen, will be fixed. x origin and y origin The “x origin” parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left corner of the screen will be anchored. The “y origin” parameter is used to specify the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 193 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application TESS Settings 6.20.2 TESS Settings TESS 04 Auto Term # Terminal # Host Conn Screen Characters Tests Features Scanner Fields Anchor View Emulation Range N» 1 » » » » » » » N» » see see see see see see see see see see text text text text text text text text text text Each session you create has its own “Settings” parameters. Additional TESS information is documented in “TESS Emulation” on page 137. Auto Term# Note: “Auto Term#” is available when 802.IQv2 is assigned to the “Host Conn” parameter (page 195) or when 802.IQv1 is enabled in the Radio Menu (see “802.IQ v1” on page 162). When this parameter is set to “Y”, a unique unit number is assigned for the current TESS session. If “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, any value assigned to the “Terminal #” parameter is ignored. Group Auto Term# Group 1 Range 1-5 When “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, the ‘Group’ parameter is used to identify the group or pool of numbers from which an auto-address is chosen. Terminal # For every application session you create, the “Terminal #” assigned must be nonzero and unique. This parameter defines the terminal number for the TESS session 18-Nov-2004 and uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the 8525. 194 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Host Conn. Other applications running in the 8525, such as an ANSI session or another TESS session must each have a different number. In addition, each Psion Teklogix 8525 using the radio link must have a unique number. 6.20.2.1 Host Conn. Host Conn Conn Type 802.IQv2 Settings » Range see text see text Conn Type For TESS applications, this parameter allows you to choose one of the following types of connections: 802.IQv2, 9010t (TCP Direct), 2392/Telnet, 3274/Telnet, 5250/Telnet and Narrow Band. Settings Note: The “Settings” sub-menu is not available when 802.IQv2 is selected as the “Conn Type” Range Settings Host see text Port 9999 0-9999 Host This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format ###.###.###.### Port “Port” specifies the port number. By default, the port is assigned the value 9999. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 195 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Screen 6.20.2.2 Screen 05 Screen # of Cols # of Rows Origin Scroll Field Scroll Pages Saved App. Parameter Label F1-F10 Colour Override 80 24 N N 16 0 » N» Range 20..132 4..100 Y/N Y/N 1..16 -1..79 see text see text # of Cols This parameter defines the logical page width (in characters) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width. This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the 8525 display. Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display. Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number. # of Rows This parameter defines the logical page length (in lines) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length. This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the vehicle-mount computer’s display. Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display. Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number. Origin Scroll When enabled (set to “Y”), the display window moves to the origin (upper-left corner) after “LOCK-H” or “LOCK-B” messages. Field Scroll When enabled (set to “Y”), the display window moves to the left after entering a new entry field. 18-Nov-2004 196 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Screen Pages Saved This parameter determines the number of pages that can be stored and recalled at the 8525. Storing frequently used page data at the 8525 reduces the need for the host to retransmit complete page data over the radio link. Retransmitting data can reduce the system response time. Increasing the number of saved pages decreases the available memory for other functions. App. Parameter The “Application” parameter is sent to the host system as part of the response to the TESS query command. Enter zero to disable this parameter. Label F1-F10 Note: This menu uses string entry fields. For detailed information about completing this type of field, refer to “String Entry Parameters” on page 156. 06 F1 • • • F10 Label F1-F10 Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions in your application. These keys are identified through softkey labels – reverse video labels that are displayed at the bottom of the screen. These softkey labels can be reconfigured using the menu attached to the “Label F1-F10” parameter. To edit a label: • Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the Label menu, and type a new name – preferably one that describes the corresponding key’s function. Note: Although you can enter up to 8 characters for each softkey label, the text will be shortened to better fit in the available space on your display. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 197 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Characters Colour Override Note: The menu is available only if your 8525 is equipped with a colour display. Range 06 Colour Override Foreground Black Background White see text see text Foreground And Background When “Colour Override” is set to ‘Y’, the colours chosen in this menu are displayed in the TESS sessions. These colour settings override the “Default Colours” set from within the “View Manager” menu. Refer to “Default Colours” on page 175 for details. The allowable values are: Red, Green, Yellow, Blue, Magenta, Cyan, White and Black. 6.20.2.3 Characters 05 Characters Char Set V Match Char H Match Char Fill Chr Upper Case » 0 0 46 N Range see text 0..255 0..255 0..255 Y/N Char Set 06 Char Set ISO N» IBM Y» DEC N» Misc. N» This menu contains all the character sets available with your Psion Teklogix computer. In this menu, the “Y” or “N” is used to visually guide you to the selected character set. For example, in the sample menu above, the “Y” next to IBM 18-Nov-2004 indicates that a character set has been chosen from this group. 198 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Characters To choose a character set: • Position the cursor on the appropriate item – for example, ISO – and press <F1> to display the character set options. • To activate a character set, press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to set it to “Y”. Important: If you choose a Chinese character set from the ‘Misc.’ menu and a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the 8525 screen, a shaded box character is used as a substitute. Please review “Default font” on page 208. If you are using a Korean character set, a right arrow character is used as a substitute. V Match Chr This parameter enables visible field matching and defines the character that identifies visible field match data from the host. Field matching allows the host to pre-load data into an entry field that is compared with the user’s input. The vehicle-mount beeps if the entered data does not match. Visible field matching means that the data to be matched is displayed in the entry field. Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to identify visible match field data. Enter 0 (zero) to disable this feature. Note: Another method of field matching is available directly through the TESS data stream. H Match Chr This parameter enables hidden field matching and defines the character that identifies hidden field match data from the host. Field matching allows the host to pre-load data into an entry field that is compared with the user’s input. The 8525 beeps if the entered data does not match. Hidden field matching means that the data to be matched is not displayed in the entry field. Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to identify hidden match field data. Enter 0 (zero) to disable this feature. 18-Nov-2004 Note: Another method of field matching is available directly through the TESS data stream. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 199 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Tests Fill Chr This parameter specifies the character that identifies empty entry fields. Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. The most commonly used characters are: _ (underline) Enter 95 . (period) Enter 46 Note: 8525s in some systems may use the “space” character with the host using reverse video attributes to mark entry fields. Upper Case When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), lowercase input is converted to uppercase. 6.20.2.4 Tests 05 Tests AutoRep Fn AutoRep T/O 7 5 Range 0..63 0..255 AutoRep Fn This parameter determines which function key is sent to the host in auto reply mode. The value represents the number of the function key – not the ASCII decimal equivalent. After sending this key, the unit locks and waits for the host to unlock the 8525. To disable “AutoRep Fn”, set the “AutoRep T/O” parameter to zero. AutoRep T/O This parameter determines the time (in seconds) between the 8525 unlocking and the next transmission of the function key specified by the above parameter. A value of zero disables auto reply mode. 18-Nov-2004 200 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Features 6.20.2.5 Features 05 Features Printer Binary print Queuing Lcl Process Send Mile Next X Kbd Locked Remap Passthru Disable Beep Serial Any Available N Y Y N N N N N » » Range Y/N Y/N Y/N see text Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N see text Printer The value assigned for the “Printer” parameter determines which port the print command will use. The allowable options are: Any Available, 1st printer, 2nd printer, 3rd printer, 4th printer and Disabled. Binary print When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the page displayed on the 8525 computer is spooled as is, except for trailing white-space removal. When disabled (set to “N”), each line of the page displayed on the vehicle-mount is preceded by a linefeed (LF) and followed by a carriage return (CR). Queuing This parameter enables and disables queuing mode (see “Queuing Mode” on page 146). It also enables TESS procedures to be loaded into the 8525. This parameter should be enabled if local procedures and the ability to switch between hosts within a TESS session are required. Changes to this parameter take effect only after the 8525 is reset. Lcl Process – Save on Reset The menu item “Local Process” has a sub-menu attached to it – “Save on Reset”. When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), data stored in the 8525 18-Nov-2004 is saved if the unit is reset. Local procedures are defined on page 145. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 201 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Features Send Mile This parameter controls the sending of a milestone from the 8525 after a “hey_you” command. Consult the Teklogix Screen Subsystem (TESS) User Manual for more information on milestones. Next X This parameter enables and disables the next messages used in queuing mode. Kbd Locked This parameter allows you to lock (set to “Y”) or unlock (set to “N”) the keyboard for all alphanumeric input in TESS. When the keyboard is locked, the function keys, arrow keys and the <ENTER> key are still functional. The 8525 emits an error beep if a character is rejected because the keyboard is locked. Changes to this parameter take effect only after the unit is reset. Remap Passthru When this parameter is set to “Y”, passthru data is remapped from the host charset to the port charset. (Normally passthru data is sent as is to the port without any remapping.) Disable Beep Setting this parameter to “y” disables the beep generated by the ‘o’, ‘G’ and ‘#’ TESS commands. Keep in mind that Error and Scan beeps are not disabled. 18-Nov-2004 202 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Features Serial 06 Serial Serial Port Serial Out Serial In SI mode SI prefix SI suffix SI CRC SI Fkey SO prefix SO suffix SO CRC Range Any Available see text Y Y/N N Y/N see text 10 0..255 13 0..255 N Y/N 0 0..255 10 0..255 13 0..255 N Y/N Serial Port TESS print commands control the transfer of data to and from the serial and printer ports on the 8525. At the 8525 computer, the value assigned at the ‘Serial Port’ parameter ranks which port the TESS print command will identify and use as the first to fourth port. The allowable options are: Any Available, 1st Serial, 2nd Serial, 3rd Serial, 4th Serial and Disabled. Serial Out This parameter enables serial port output fields. Serial In This parameter enables the serial port input fields. If enabled (set to “Y”), the TESS application has exclusive use of the serial port. Acceptance of data in a SI field is determined by the SI prefix and suffix. SI mode The possible values for this parameter are field (the default) and command. When the SI mode is set to field, data received through the serial port is displayed in the serial input fields. If you are using serial-input fields, make sure the “SI mode” parameter is set to field. When “SI mode” is set to command, data received by the serial port is transmitted as 18-Nov-2004 Passthrough data to the host. Note: “Command” mode is supported by SDKs but not by emulations. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 203 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Features SI prefix This parameter determines the start-of-message character on serial input. Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character. A value of 0 (zero) indicates no prefix. SI suffix This parameter determines the end-of-message character on serial input. Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character. A value of 0 (zero) indicates no suffix. SI CRC This parameter enables or disables CRC validity check on serial input. When enabled (set to “Y”), a packet is rejected if the CRC is not valid. Also, when this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), each time a DLE (^P=0x10) character is encountered in the serial input, it is removed and the character following it will be replaced with its 1’s complement. SI Fkey This parameter allows you to choose the function key you want appended to the serial input. For example, entering a value of “1” appends <F1> to serial input. A value of “0” (zero) disables this parameter; a suffix is not added. Note: Data is transmitted as soon as the function key has been appended. SO prefix This parameter determines the start-of-message character on serial output. Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character. A value of “0” (zero) indicates no prefix. SO suffix This parameter determines the end-of-message character on serial output. Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character. A value of “0” (zero) indicates no suffix. 18-Nov-2004 204 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Scanner SO CRC When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), a CRC16 value is appended to the serial output message. Also, when this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), for each control character in the serial output stream, a DLE is inserted to precede that character. The control character is replaced with its 1’s complement. 6.20.2.6 Scanner 05 Scanner Cont Nxt Fld Append Enter Append F0 Mixed AIAG Rjct if Alpha Beam Lockout Y Y Y N N N Range Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Cont Nxt Fld This parameter only applies to string entry data. When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter allows bar codes that are longer than the field length to continue in the next field. If “ContNxtField” is disabled (set to “N”), OFF data will flow into the next field. Append Enter When enabled (set to “Y”), “Append Enter” causes an <ENTER> code to be appended to the bar code. The <ENTER> code completes the entry of the bar code and moves the cursor to the next field. Append F0 When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter causes an <F0> code to be appended to the bar code. The <F0> code completes the entry of the bar code data in the field. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 205 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Fields Mixed AIAG When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), AIAG labels are always accepted and processed – even if mixed with keyboard input. The AIAG label can replace the partially entered keyboard data. If this parameter is disabled, AIAG labels are rejected if field entry is in progress. Rjct if Alpha When the cursor is in a numeric field and “Rjct if Alpha” is enabled (set to “Y”), bar codes containing alphabetic characters are rejected. Beam Lockout When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter disallows scanner use when the current session is in “LOCK-H” mode. 6.20.2.7 Fields Fields 05 Field Order Enter To F0 Enter On Arrow Video All Fld Video Default Font Entry Mode Open Fky Only Ign Bcode_fld Enh Edit Mode Valid Numerics Y Y Y » Y 16x30 field N N N +-%*/.,$ Range Y/N Y/N Y/N see text Y/N see text see text Y/N Y/N Y/N see text Field Order This parameter determines the mode of cursor movement between fields. The next field can be defined by location on the screen or by the assignment of field numbers. When enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor moves according to field location. If disabled (set to “N”), the cursor moves according to the numeric order of the fields. 18-Nov-2004 206 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Fields Enter To F0 The <ENTER> key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the next field. However, some applications require that the <ENTER> key start a transmission from the 8525. When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter causes the <ENTER> key to be interpreted as <F0> which starts a transmission. Enter On Arr When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the arrow keys can be used to complete data entry into a field. Video 06 Video Blink Bold Reverse BLNK ULIN REV Range see text see text see text Blink The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Blink” TESS attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink), “ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal). Bold The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Bold” TESS attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink), “ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal). Reverse The value assigned to the “Reverse” parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created with the “Reverse” TESS attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink), “ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal). All Fld Video Usually, the video attributes apply only to the text that is in an entry field. When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the entire field (including blanks) takes on the video attributes. Some systems use this option to identify empty entry fields with reverse video. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 207 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Fields Default font This parameter determines the default font that appears when the memory is reset. • Use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the options. Entry Mode “Entry Mode” parameters allow you to select a data entry mode. The modes are: insert, replace, field and fcursor. “TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement” on page 140 describes these modes in detail. Open Fky Only When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the screen is open for function keys only, and the cursor is not positioned. When this parameter is disabled, the screen is open for data entry, and the cursor is placed in the first field (if it exists). Ign Bcode_fld When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), fields that were defined as “bar code only” accept data from the keyboard as well as the bar code reader. In effect, they behave as data entry fields. Enh Edit Mode This mode provides extended (enhanced) functions to users of Psion Teklogix’ IBM 5250 terminal emulation. When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the arrow keys move the cursor anywhere on the screen, unrestricted by fixed or entry fields. Certain 5250 emulation keys (e.g. Field Exit) that were originally available only when “Enh Edit Mode” was set to “Y” are now active at all times in TESS applications. Refer to “IBM 5250 Emulation Keys” on page 139 for details about these keys. Valid Numerics This parameter is used to configure valid characters for numeric fields to a maximum of 39 characters. Since this field is numeric, numbers 0 through 9 do not need to be configured. The default values for this parameter are: + - % / . , $. 18-Nov-2004 208 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Anchor View 6.20.2.8 Anchor View 05 Anchor x origin y origin 1 1 Range 1..24 1..80 When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter locks the display at a defined location on the screen, preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved. The “x origin” and “y origin” coordinates specify where the screen origin, the upper left corner of the screen, will be fixed. x origin and y origin The “x origin” parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left corner of the screen will be anchored. The “y origin” parameter is used to specify the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored. 6.20.2.9 Emulation Note: These parameters are only accessible when one of the following TESS ‘Host Conn’ options is selected: ‘2392/Telnet’, ‘3274/Telnet’ or ‘5250/Telnet’. 2392/Telnet Emulation 05 Emulation Send CR with Fkey Features N » Range Y/N see text Send CR with FKEY A function key press generates a string of text to be sent back to the host. If this parameter is enabled, a carriage return is appended to the function key. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 209 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Emulation Features – 2392/Telnet Features 06 Clear Entry Fields N Passthru Printing N AIAG Character 0 Barcode Character 0 Serial IO Character 0 Fixed Field Ovrhd 5 Enable Alarm N Command Region Up 0 Command Region Down 0 Command Region Left 0 Command Region Right 0 Range Y/N Y/N 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-80 Y/N 0-24 0-24 0-80 0-80 Clear Entry Fields When this parameter is set to ‘Y’, an empty entry field is created in place of an entry field filled with spaces. Note: This operation is only performed on screens received from the host. Data sent to the host remains unaffected. Passthru Printing Setting this parameter to ‘Y’ allows the host to send data directly to the 8525 serial port. This option is most commonly used for printing. AIAG Character This parameter is used to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character code of the AIAG character. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature. When a bar code data is scanned, the 8525 searches for AIAG fields on the current page that can accept the bar code data. The application program distinguishes an entry field as AIAG by preceding the field with this special mode character which indicates the existence of AIAG fields. Barcode Character Barcode-input-only fields are special entry fields that only accept input from a bar 18-Nov-2004 code reader. The application program identifies a barcode-input-only entry field by preceding the field with a special character. 210 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Emulation This parameter is used to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character code of the barcode-input-only character. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature. Serial IO Character Serial I/O fields are special entry and fixed fields that accept input from and output to a serial port. The application program distinguishes this field as Serial I/O by preceding the field with a special character. If this character precedes a fixed field, the data will be sent to the 8525’s serial port. If it precedes an entry field, the field accepts data from the 8525’s serial port. This parameter allows you to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character code of this special character. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature. Fixed Field Ovrhd This parameter defines the maximum number of characters allowed within two adjacent, fixed fields that can be sent as a single field. For example, if two fields are 4 characters apart and this parameter is set to 5, these fields are joined into a single field of data. The allowable range for this field is 0 to 80. This feature affects fields with the “Normal” display attribute only. Enable Alarm If this parameter is set to ‘Y’, the 8525 emits a beep when the word ALARM appears on the application screen, in the location specified by the “Command Region” parameter. Command Region Up & Down And Command Region Left & Right The value assigned to the ‘Command Region Up’ and ‘Command Region Down’ parameters represent rows on the 8525 screen. The allowable values range from 0 to 24. The value assigned to ‘Command Region Left’ and ‘Command Region Right’ parameters represent columns on the 8525 screen. The allowable values range from 0 to 80. These four numbers represent the row and column addresses of the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the command region. Currently, the only commands supported in the command region are ALARM and FONT: 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 211 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Emulation 3274/Telnet Emulation Emulation 05 Fujitsu Host Intl EBCDIC Nulls in Fields IP for SysReq BRK for Attn LU Name Enabled LU Name Features FKEY0-7 FKEY8-15 FKEY16-23 FKEY24-31 FKEY32-39 N N N N N N » » » » » » Range Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N see text see text see text see text see text see text see text Fujitsu Host If this parameter is set to ‘Y’, data is sent in Fujitsu format. Enabling ‘Fujitsu Host’ causes the standard IBM formatting codes (for start of field, setting buffers, etc.) to be replaced by the codes used by Fujitsu host computers. Intl EBCDIC If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘Y’), the ‘international’ EBCDIC character set is used, swapping the positions of the ! and ] characters. Nulls in Fields Setting this parameter to ‘Y’ allows ‘null’ characters – e.g., hyphens (-) or periods (.) – to fill in empty entry fields. IP for SysReq When the system request key is pressed, a Telnet “Interrupt Process” command is generated. The “Interrupt Process” command is sent to the host in place of the standard mechanism used to send the system request key press to a host using Telnet. 18-Nov-2004 212 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Emulation BRK for Attn When the attention key is pressed, a Telnet “Break” command is generated. This command is sent to the host in place of the standard mechanism used to send the attention key press to a host using Telnet. LU Name Enabled If enabled (set to ‘Y’), this parameter allows the 8525 to negotiate a specific device name for itself. LU Name The value assigned in this field is used when the “LU Name Enabled” parameter (see above) is set to ‘Y’. The current terminal number is appended to the name to generate a unique device name (for example, LUA00001). Features – 3274/Telnet Features 06 Clear Entry Fields N Passthru Printing N AIAG Character 0 Barcode Character 0 Serial IO Character 0 Fixed Field Ovrhd 5 Enable Alarm N Command Region Up 0 Command Region Down 0 Command Region Left 0 Command Region Right 0 Range Y/N Y/N 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-80 Y/N 0-24 0-24 0-80 0-80 These parameters are identical to those described for 2392/Telnet. Refer to "Features – 2392/Telnet" beginning on page 210. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 213 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Emulation FKEY0-7, FKEY8-15, FKEY16-23, FKEY24-31 And FKEY32-39 06 FKEY0-7 FKEY0 ENTER FKEY1 F1 FKEY2 F2 FKEY3 F3 FKEY4 F4 FKEY5 F5 FKEY6 F6 FKEY7 F7 The sub-menus attached to these parameters allow you to map the 8525 function keys. 5250/Telnet Emulation Emulation 05 WEC Remap Underline to Intl EBCDIC Nulls in Fields Term Type Virtual Dev Enable Virtual Dev Prefix Features FKEY0-7 FKEY8-15 FKEY16-23 FKEY24-31 FKEY32-39 Advisory None N Y IBM-5251-11 N » » » » » » Range see text see text Y/N Y/N see text Y/N see text see text see text see text see text see text see text WEC (Write Error Code) This parameter determines the type of WEC used. If set to “advisory”, a TESS advisory message is generated when the host sends a WEC command to the 8525. Otherwise, if set to “screen text”, the 8525 locks the keyboard and displays the error message contained in the WEC command on the screen at the line specified by the host. In this case, the 8525 must be unlocked manually using the function key 18-Nov-2004 mapped to RESET. 214 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Emulation Remap Underline To This parameter allows you to remap the underline cursor to: blink, bold, reverse or none. Intl EBCDIC If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘Y’), the ‘international’ EBCDIC character set is used, swapping the positions of the ! and ] characters. Nulls In Fields Setting this parameter to ‘Y’ allows ‘null’ characters – e.g., hyphens (-) or periods (.) – to fill in empty entry fields. Term Type The value assigned for this parameter – IBM-5555-001 or IBM-5251-11 – indicates the type of terminal to report during the Telnet negotiations. It determines how the AS/400 host treats the terminal. IBM-5251-11 is a standard 5250 terminal. IBM5555-001 is a Korean language terminal. Virtual Dev Enabled If enabled (set to ‘Y’), this parameter allows the 8525 to negotiate a specific device name for itself. Virtual Dev Prefix The prefix assigned in this field is used when the “Virtual Dev Enabled” parameter (see above) is set to ‘Y’. The current terminal number is appended to the prefix to generate a unique device name. You can assign up to 9 upper-case alphanumeric characters in this field. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 215 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Emulation Features – 5250/Telnet Features 06 Clear Entry Fields N Passthru Printing N AIAG Character 0 Barcode Character 0 Serial IO Character 0 Fixed Field Ovrhd 5 Enable Alarm N Command Region Up 0 Command Region Down 0 Command Region Left 0 Command Region Right 0 Range Y/N Y/N 0-255 0-255 0-255 0-80 Y/N 0-24 0-24 0-80 0-80 These parameters are identical to those described for 2392/Telnet. Refer to "Features – 2392/Telnet" beginning on page 210. FKEY0-7, FKEY8-15, FKEY16-23, FKEY24-31 And FKEY32-39 06 FKEY0-7 FKEY0 ENTER FKEY1 F1 FKEY2 F2 FKEY3 F3 FKEY4 F4 FKEY5 F5 FKEY6 F6 FKEY7 F7 The sub-menus attached to these parameters allow you to map the 8525 function keys. 18-Nov-2004 216 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Ports– Tether And Console 6.21 Ports– Tether And Console 03 Ports Tether Port Settings 1 Console Port Settings 2 Console » Disabled » 6.21.1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options The “Tether Port” and “Console Port” options allow you to enable, disable and specify the accessories attached to these ports. Both the Tether Port and the Console Port have the same options. These are: Disabled, Serial, Console, Printer and Scan-See. To scroll through the options for each port: • Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key. These ports operate differently depending on the accessories selected. • Disabled – indicates that the serial port is not being used. • Serial – standard serial port. • Console – used to connect another PC to the 8525. A communication program is required so that communication can proceed between the 8525 and the PC. • Printer – all TESS print operations are directed to the port. All ANSI media copy operations to the “primary port” are directed to this port. • Scan-See – TESS and ANSI accepts input from the Scan-See through the Tether or Console port. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 217 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Tether, Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings 6.21.2 Tether, Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings The parameters for the “Tether Port”, “Serial Port” and “Console Port” are identical. Settings 04 Character Set » Baud 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity none Stop Bits 1 Flow Ctrl None Buffer 512 Retries 3 Input Tmo 2 Output Tmo 5 Test Y Range see text see text for range of baud rates 6..8 none odd even mark space 1, 1.5, 2 None Software Hardware Both 1..2048 1..100 1..100 1..100 Y/N Character Set These menus define the character set for the 8525 port. Important: When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed, a right arrow character is used as a substitute. Char Set ISO N» IBM Y» DEC N» Misc. N» This menu contains all the character sets available with your Psion Teklogix computer. In this menu, the “Y” or “N” are used to visually guide you to the selected character set. For example, in the sample menu above, the “Y” next to IBM indicates that a character set has been chosen from this group. 18-Nov-2004 218 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Tether, Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings Choosing A Character Set To choose a character set: • Position the cursor on the appropriate item – for example, ISO – and press <F1> to display the character set options. • To activate a character set, press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to set it to “Y”. Important: If you choose a Chinese character set from the ‘Misc.’ menu and a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the screen, a shaded box character is used as a substitute. If you are using a Korean character set, a right arrow character is used as a substitute. Baud This parameter determines the bit rate of the port. Allowable values include: 110 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14.4kbps 19.2kbps 38.4kbps 57.6kbps 115.2kbps 128.0kbps or 256.0kbps. Data Bits This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port. Possible values are: 6, 7, 8. Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port. The options are: none, odd, even, mark and space. Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits – 1, 1.5, 2 – used for asynchronous communication. Flow Control This parameter selects the type of flow control used in your vehicle-mount computer. The 8525 can perform Software or Hardware handshaking, or you can choose Both to enable both of these options. 18-Nov-2004 The function of each mode is as follows: Enable: Used to input and output data. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 219 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Tether, Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings Supports XON/XOFF or no handshaking. Print: Used to output data only. All input characters except XON and XOFF are ignored. Supports XON/XOFF or no handshaking. Output: Used to output data only. All input characters are ignored. Supports no handshaking. Note: To enable the input and/or output, ‘serial in’ and/or ‘serial out’ must be enabled in the TESS menu. Buffer The value assigned to this parameter determines the size of the serial buffer used by the application for both input and output. The buffer controls the amount of data the application can send to or receive from a serial device. Retries This parameter determines the number of times the 8525 attempts to transmit a byte from the serial port. If the count specified in this parameter is exceeded, the transmission fails. Input Tmo This parameter sets the time in tenths of a second that the 8525 waits before passing received data to the TESS or ANSI tasks. Output Tmo The value assigned at this parameter determines the maximum number of milliseconds that the application will wait for a ‘write’ sent to the port to succeed before it is aborted. The ‘write’ may be one or several bytes in length. Test When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), data is output through the serial port to make certain that it is operating appropriately. 18-Nov-2004 220 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters 6.21.3 Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters When ‘Scan-See’ is specified as the peripheral for either the Tether or the Console port, the parameters listed under the “Scan-See” sub-menu are used to tailor the operation of this type of scanner. The other parameters listed in this menu – “Character Set”, “Baud” and so on – are identical to those described beginning on page 217. Scan See 05 Character Set » Baud 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity none Stop Bits 1 Retries 3 Input Tmo 2 Scan-See » 6.21.3.1 Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport 05 Range Scan-See Anchor Line Anchor Column Follow Cursor Line Offset Column Offset Wraparound Panning Line Scrolling Brightness Arrows Version 1 19 Y 0 0 N Y N 3 Bright 2 0...1 0...19 Y/N -25...25 -80...80 Y/N Y/N Y/N 0 to 5 Bright Horz Vert 0...2 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 221 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport The Scan-See display is mapped to a specific area on the 8525 screen – called the viewport – and is continuously updated to reflect that portion of the screen. The Scan-See viewport is defined as follows: Anchor Line/Anchor Column A location on the Scan-See display – the anchor – is chosen as a reference point. Line Offset/Column Offset A predefined displacement – the offset – is added to the location of the 8525 cursor to create a point – the pivot . This pivot is mapped to the anchor , and whatever is displayed in its vicinity is also displayed on the Scan-See. For example: • the anchor is chosen as (9,0) whereas “9” is the column and “0” is the line (on the Scan-See display) • the offset is chosen as (4,2) • the cursor on the 8525 is currently located at (7,5) • the pivot would thus be located at (7+4, 5+2) or (11,7) • and so the area displayed on the Scan-See will be: (11–9,7–0) to (11–9+9,7–0+1) or (2,7) to (11,8). 1 18-Nov-2004 1 These computations assume that “Wraparound” (described on page 224) is disabled (set to “N”) and that “Follow Cursor” (described on page 224) is enabled (set to “Y”). 222 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 . . . 0 1 (0,0) terminal cursor 2 3 4 (7,5) +4 5 offs 6 anchor (0,0) (4 +2 (11, 7) 8 ,2) et +2 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 et 7 +4 offs (9,0) 10 pivot = Scan-See Display terminal cursor + offset ... 11 1 Terminal Display superimposing the anchor on the pivot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 . . . 0 1 (0,0) 2 anchor 3 4 5 6 (2,7 ) (11, 7) pivot 7 (11, 8) 8 9 Scan-See Viewport 10 ... 11 Note: To enter negative values, press the “-” (minus) key and then, type the number you want to use. The <LEFT> arrow key can also be used to decrement the value assigned to the parameter. Each time the <LEFT> arrow is pressed, the number is decremented by one. For example, to enter a value of “–5”, start from zero and press the left arrow key five times. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 223 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport Follow Cursor When the “Follow Cursor” parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the cursor is always assumed to be located at the origin. Using the previous example: • the area displayed will be (4–9,2–0) to (4–9+9, 2–0+1), or, after clipping values that are negative or higher than 80: (0,2) to (4,3). Wraparound When “Wraparound” is enabled (set to “Y”), the Scan-See display is treated as a one-line by 20 column display, rather than 2 lines by 10 columns. Panning If “Panning” is disabled (set to “N”), the Scan-See viewport does not move when the cursor moves one position to the right, and the pivot is still inside the Scan-See display. However, the Scan-See display is updated to reflect the changes within that viewport. If the pivot goes outside the viewport, or if the 8525 display changes without the cursor being moved, the viewport is re-synchronized to coincide the pivot with the anchor. Line Scrolling When “Line Scrolling” is enabled (set to “Y”), the Scan-See display is treated as two separate one line by 10 column displays. The top line always displays the previous value of the bottom line. In an application where the cursor skips from one entry field to another, the field that the cursor just entered is displayed on the top line, and the next field is displayed at the bottom. Note: When this feature is enabled (set to “Y”), the “Panning” option should be disabled to prevent updates to both lines after every keystroke Brightness The “Brightness” parameter controls the backlight brightness of the display. It only has an effect on Model 7000 Scan-Sees – scanners equipped with LED (light emitting diode) displays. 18-Nov-2004 224 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport Arrows The “Arrows” parameter assigns one of three possible functions to the two arrow keys on the Scan-See keyboard: Value Function “Bright” Arrow keys control Scan-See display brightness “Horiz” Arrow keys control “Column Offset” “Vert” Arrow keys control “Line Offset” Table 6.5 “Arrow” Parameter Options Note: For “Horiz” and “Vert,” changing the offset will take affect only after the 8525 display has been updated. Version Scan-See units with serial numbers that read 1594120224 or higher contain firmware that implements a different communication protocol with the 8525 than older units. The “Version” numbers represent the following unit versions: Value Scan-See Version 0 • First LED version – up to serial number 1594080275; these are encased in grey plastic. 1 • Model 7000 LED units – versions after the serial number above; these are also encased in grey plastic. 2 • Metrologic 7000M LCD units; these are encased in grey plastic. • Psion Teklogix 7000M LCD units; these are encased in black plastic. Table 6.6 Scan-See Versions Note: To interface the 8525 to the Scan-See units with older firmware (serial number lower than 1594120224), set “Parity = space”; all other parameters are identical to the newer firmware. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 225 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application Scan-See Keyboard Mapping 6.21.3.2 Scan-See Keyboard Mapping • Digits (0-9) are passed verbatim • The CLR key forces a sign-on message and display refresh. This only occurs when CLR is pressed and the CLR key on the display is pressed, then released. • The three F-keys are mapped to F1, F2 and F3, respectively. • The ENT key is mapped to the carriage-return (‘\r’) character. • The two arrow keys are handled locally, and control the brightness, and the line and column offsets, as described on page 224. • Bar-code data is stripped off any identifying headers (symbology, etc.) and passed verbatim. The Scan-See is capable of displaying only a subset of the default PC-8 ASCII character set. Any characters that cannot be displayed are currently translated to ‘.’. 6.22 Network 03 Network Ctrl Panel 802.IQv2 » » 6.22.1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings This option displays a Windows CE .NET screen where you can set up your radio, launch an existing network connection or create a new connection. 18-Nov-2004 Figure 6.12 Network Settings 226 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 6: Tekterm Application 802.IQ v2 Important: Follow the steps outlined in “Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio Installed In The 8525” on page 15 for details about configuring your radio. 6.22.2 802.IQ v2 Important: For setup information about 802.IQ v2, refer to the “9400 and 9450 Network Controllers User Manual” and/or the “9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual”. Range 04 802.IQ v2 Port 8888 see text More Parameters » see text Port “Port” specifies the UDP port used by 802IQ v2. The default value is 8888. Keep in mind that the value assigned here must match the value set at the network controller. Note: When using 802.IQ v2, make certain that the 8525 “Net Mask” matches the network controller net mask. More Parameters Important: The 802.IQ radio items listed in this menu are only available to Psion Teklogix personnel. 05 802.IQ v2 Parameters Auto Radio Addr Y Radio Address 0 Initial RTT 100 Range Y/N 1 to 3840 500...5000 Auto Radio Addr If this parameter is set to “Y”, the 8525 requests an automatically assigned radio address. 18-Nov-2004 Note: If ‘Auto Radio Addr’ is enabled (set to “Y”), any value assigned to the ‘Radio Address’ parameter is ignored. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 227 Chapter 6: Tekterm Application 802.IQ v2 Radio Address Important: “Radio Address” only takes effect when “Cellular” is enabled (set to “Y”). The value entered in the “Radio address” parameter is used to identify the 8525 vehicle-mount over the radio link. A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each 8525. Initial RTT (Round Trip Time) Round trip time is the elapsed time between an 8525 vehicle-mount computer transmission and an access point acknowledgement. Each 8525 continuously adjusts the acceptable round trip time, calculating the average elapsed time over a number of transmissions. If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the average round trip time calculated, the 8525 will send the transmission again. Because 8525s cannot calculate an average round trip time without a number of transmissions, a starting point or “Initial Round Trip Time” is required. The 8525 uses the time assigned to the “Initial RTT” parameter as a starting value for round trip calculations. Once the 8525 begins transmitting and receiving data, this value will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between transmissions and acknowledgements. 18-Nov-2004 228 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual PERIPHERAL DEVICES & ACCESSORIES 7.1 External Bar Code Readers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.1 PowerScan™ Standard, LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners 7.1.2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader. . . . . . . . . 7.2 Bluetooth Peripherals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 GPS Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Mounting Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.1 8525 Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.2 Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate. . . . . 7.4.3 Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Mount. . . . . . . . 7.4.4 Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.5 8525 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles: . . . . . . . . 7.4.6 8525 Installation In Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.7 Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 231 231 231 232 232 233 234 237 237 238 239 239 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 229 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories External Bar Code Readers 7.1 External Bar Code Readers 7.1.1 PowerScan™ Standard, LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners The 8525 supports Psion Teklogix’ PowerScan™ industrial bar code scanner with standard, long range and extra long range options. To connect this scanner to the 8525, attach the device to the tether port. Before using the bar code reader, you may need to change some parameters. For details, review “Scanner Properties Setup” on page 114 and “Bar Codes” on page 117. 7.1.2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader Note: For helpful scanning tips, refer to “Scanning Techniques” on page 38. When a label is scanned successfully, the 8525 will beep if configured appropriately and the scan LED will flash. Occasionally, the bar code labels are poorly printed or damaged and cannot be read properly. In this case, use the keyboard to enter data from the label. 7.2 Bluetooth Peripherals If the 8525 is equipped with a Bluetooth radio, it is possible to communicate with a variety of Bluetooth peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scanners, printers, and so on. The range of the Bluetooth radio in the 8525 is limited to between 2 and 5 meters. Psion Teklogix provides built-in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below. • • GSM/GPRS tri-band universal handset Bluetooth printer Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802.11b radios both operate in the 2.4GHz band. Although the 8525 includes features to minimize interference, performance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously. Typically, when both radios operate in the 8525 at the same time, they cannot transmit simultaneously – this has a negative impact on overall system throughput. To minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11b network, Psion Teklogix recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction rates (such as 18-Nov-2004 printers and scanners). Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 231 Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories GPS Unit Bluetooth peripherals are configured using the Bluetooth control panel applet. Refer to “Bluetooth Setup” on page 98 for information about setting up your Bluetooth devices for communication. In addition, review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth device to determine the method used to associate with the 8525 host. 7.3 GPS Unit The 8525 can support an optional GPS unit. This unit, a Garmin GPS 35HVS (TLX PN 30969), is a complete GPS receiver and antenna contained in a small, water resistant package. The Garmin GPS 35HVS can track up to 12 satellites at a time, while providing fast time-to-first-fix and one second navigation updates. The GPS unit was designed to be used in conjunction with the Psion Teklogix Powered Sled (Model 7937B), the Lithium Ion Battery Pack (PN 20605-003) and the Psion Teklogix Port Replicator (TLX PN 21655). The GPS unit plugs directly into the Port Replicator which supplies the GPS unit with power (from the Powered Sled supply) and connects the data lines to the 8525. The GPS unit should be mounted with a clear, unobstructed view of the GPS satellites. For optimal performance, the GPS unit should be mounted in an area that provides exposure to as large a swath of unobstructed sky as possible – a vehicle roof is an excellent choice. Important: Keep in mind that some windows have thermal and/or UV filter or tint coatings that may shield satellite signals from the GPS receiver. Psion Teklogix provides four types of Garmin mounting brackets to secure your GPS unit in position. 7.4 Mounting Accessories There are two mounting options for the 8525: • • Quick-Release Mount, includes two adaptor plates, quick release and cradle mount (along with necessary hardware) – Kit PN 1008424 Dual Ball and Socket Mount 18-Nov-2004 232 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories 8525 Mounting Recommendations 7.4.1 8525 Mounting Recommendations Warnings: Before mounting an 8525 in a vehicle, there are a number of operator safety issues that require careful attention. An improperly mounted 8525 may result in one or more of the following: operator injury, operator visibility obstruction, operator distraction and/or poor ease of egress for the operator. Psion Teklogix strongly recommends that you seek professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer. Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration, especially for separately tethered scanners and other devices with loose cables. If you are unable to obtain suitable advice, contact Psion Teklogix for assistance (see "Appendix A: Support Services and Worldwide Offices" at the end of this document). Note also that for better protection, the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage. Use of the Powered Fork Lift Cradle while charging the fork truck battery is prohibited. Important Safeguards • To avoid possible injury, this device must be properly secured when in a moving vehicle. • Keep this device away from magnetic fields. • Do not place the computer near a television or radio receiver. • Do not disassemble your 8525 computer—there are no user-serviceable parts inside. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 233 Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate 7.4.2 Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate Mounting Kit PN 1008424 Cradle Mounting Plate and Quick Release Adaptor Plate Adaptor Plate Figure 7.1 Quick Release Mount Installed First, the 8525 must be attached to the cradle (Figure 7.2 on page 235). To do this: • Place the terminal in the cradle so that the display side of the terminal is on the same side as the quick release fasteners. The keyboard side of the terminal should be on the same side as the tabs. 18-Nov-2004 234 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate • Match the side screw holes on the 8525 with the appropriate pairs of holes on the cradle and screw them together. The choice of holes determines the angle at which the terminal tilts. Screw Holes 29.8 c.4m5 in. 11 Fro Tabs n t Quick Release Fasteners 5.25 cm 2 in. Bac k cm .75 n. 10 .25 i 4 Figure 7.2 Mounting Cradle And Quick Release Installing The Cradle Mounting Plate Next, the cradle mounting plate must be attached to the vehicle. The cradle mounting plate shown in Figure 7.3 holds the 8525 and cradle in place. • Screw the cradle mounting plate onto the vehicle using the four 1/4" holes. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 235 Note: The bolts used for all installations are SAE 1/4-20. Post Fr on t 25.4 cm10.0 in. Tab Guides Ba ck cm 13 in. 5 Figure 7.3 The Cradle Mounting Plate Attaching The Cradle To The Cradle Mounting Plate Next, the 8525 and cradle must be attached to the cradle mounting plate. • • Align the tabs on the front of the cradle to the tab guides on the mounting plate and push the cradle back and down. Slide the fasteners on the back of the cradle until they snap to the posts on the mounting plate. Warning: Never operate the vehicle if the quick release fasteners are not locked. 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Mount 7.4.3 Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Mount Standard Cradle (PN 1008441) RAM Mount Standard RAM Ball Ends (Vesa Plate also available) Figure 7.4 Dual Ball And Socket Mount With the standard RAM ball end or vesa plate(s) installed on the RAM mount: • • Attach the RAM mount to a standard cradle (PN 1008441) using the hardware included with your kit. Attach the other end of the mount to almost any surface. The ball design allows both ends of the RAM mount to be angled to suit the operator's needs. 7.4.4 Wiring Guidelines Before installing the cables between the computer and other devices, consider the following: • • • • Ensure the vehicle body and underlying wiring is not damaged while drilling mounting holes. Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage. Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal. 18-Nov-2004 Use plastic straps and tie-downs to secure cables and connectors in their desired location, away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 237 Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories 8525 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles: • • • Keep the cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid, and other potential hazards. Keep the cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may pull on the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle. Leave enough slack on the cables so that the computer can be removed easily for maintenance. Note: Make sure the cables run inside the roll cage of the vehicle. 7.4.5 8525 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles: Warning: Voltages exceeding 60VDC are considered hazardous. For 8525 installations on vehicles with batteries above this voltage, ensure the 8525 power connector is mounted in a secure location out of the vehicle operator’s reach. Due to the hazardous voltages present on these vehicles, it is necessary to ensure that the unit’s power supply cable connector is not accessible to the vehicle operator, and is not exposed to water or other liquids. To accomplish this: • • • Ensure the power connector is installed in a dry location on the vehicle, away from the vehicle operator’s reach (perhaps under a vehicle dash or in a sealed housing). Cover the power connector with a waterproof heat shrink material. Wrap the connector securely with a waterproof electrical tape in an area out of the vehicle operators reach. All other installation requirements outlined in this document should also be followed for High Voltage vehicles to insure safe installation and operation of the 8525 vehicle-mount. 18-Nov-2004 238 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories 8525 Installation In Vehicles 7.4.6 8525 Installation In Vehicles Note: The metal chassis of the 8525 is equipped with a ground lug (located on the underside of the 8525, beside the cable management bar) to provide an additional ground to the vehicle, if desired. The grounding strap must connect from the ground stud on the 8525 to a solid, reliable contact point on the main portion of the vehicle chassis. It must not be connected to battery negative or a terminal block. As with other vehicle cables, the routing of the ground strap should be carefully considered to ensure it does not pose a hazard to the operator or the safe operation of the vehicle. If necessary, secure the ground strap with cable ties or some other mechanical means to prevent loops or loose lengths of wire that could catch on stationary items when the vehicle is in motion. 7.4.7 Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525 Warning: The 8525 accepts DC power sources between 10V and 90VDC nom. Applying a voltage above 90VDC or reversing polarity may result in permanent damage to the 8525 and will void the product warranty. A 1.8 meter (6 ft.) extension power cable (P/N 13985-002 std or –001 display off) is supplied with your 8525.This cable should be wired to a filtered, fused (maximum 10A) accessory supply on the vehicle. The 8525 draws no more than 8A (less if the accessory supply is greater than 12V). Any additional wiring (minimum 18 gauge), connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 90 VDC, 10A. When connecting P/N 13985-001 (display-off version), ensure that the screen blanking wires (clearly labelled) and the power wires (red/black leads) are reliably secured away from each other, or are separated with reliably secured certified insulation. Minimum 2.8mm distance, or 0.4mm distance through insulation is required for the separation. The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply. The black lead connects to the negative supply – this should be connected to a proper terminal block and not to the vehicle body. The 8525 is fully isolated and can be used with both negative and positive chassis vehicles. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 239 Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices & Accessories Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525 You may have the option of connecting power before or after the ‘key’ switch. It is preferable to wire the 8525 after the key switch – that is, the 8525 cannot be switched on without turning the vehicle key on. However, if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift, it may make more sense to wire the 8525 before the switch. Keep in mind that the 8525 will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as long as its back up battery has sufficient charge. If an unfused power source must be used, a fuse assembly (PN 19440) must be added to the extension power cable (the fuse and instructions are supplied with the cable). Use only a 10A slow blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly. The fuse assembly must be located as close as practical to the DC supply, and shall connect to the positive side of the DC supply. 18-Nov-2004 240 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8.1 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer Specifications . . . . . . . . 8.2 Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Bar Code Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3.1 External Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 External Scanner Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.1 PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs . 8.4.2 PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs . . . . . 8.5 Internal Lithium-Ion Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 245 246 246 246 246 248 250 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 241 Chapter 8: Specifications 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer Specifications Note: Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice. 8.1 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer Specifications Size • 298mm W x 117mm H x 292mm L (11" W x 4 5/8" H x 11" L) Weight 4.3 kg (9.5 lbs) Operating System Windows CE .NET 4.2 Processor And Memory • • • • 400MHz ARM RISC (400 MIPS). 32KB instruction/32KB data cache on-board RAM: 128mByte SDRAM on-board ROM: 64 MByte FLASH. Power • • • • • Internal power supply 10-90VDC designed for forklift power 12.6V Li-Ion standard battery for brown-out Advance Smart Battery Built-in fast charger 1 week real-time clock backup 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 243 Chapter 8: Specifications 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer Specifications Communication Ports • One Tether port with: - one RS232 serial port (decoded scanner, printer) - undecoded scanner port - USB host port • One Port with: - DB9 plug RS232 • One Port with: High density socket - one RS232 serial comm. port - 1 USB device port - 2 USB host ports Environmental Standard Temperature Unit Temperature Range Storage Temperature Rain And Dust Resistance Humidity 3 axis Vibration 3 axis Shock -20˚ C to 60˚ C (-4˚ F to 140˚ F) -35˚ C to 70˚ C (-31˚ F to 158˚ F) IEC 529, classification IP66. 5% - 95% RH non-condensing 1.5g RMS PSD (4 - 500 Hz) 30g 11ms saw tooth. Freezer Unit Temperature Range Storage Temperature Rain And Dust Resistance Humidity 3 axis Vibration 3 axis Shock -30˚ C to 60˚ C (-22˚ F to 140˚ F) -35˚ C to 70˚ C (-31˚ F to 158˚ F) IEC 529, classification IP66. 5% - 95% RH non-condensing 1.5g RMS PSD (4 - 500 Hz) 30g 11ms saw tooth. Approvals Safety EMC UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No950, LVD EN60950 FCC Part 15 Class B, EMC Directive Class B 18-Nov-2004 244 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 8: Specifications Radio Specifications 8.2 Radio Specifications 802.11b Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Compact Flash form factor Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels Range Rx Sensitivity Data Rates 32 mW 2.400-2.4835 1 to 13 50-115m -93dBm @ 1Mbps 1,2,5.5 and 11 Mbps auto fallback 802.11g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (for future release) Compact Flash form factor Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels Range RX Sensitivity Data Rates 32mW max 2.400-2.4835 1 to 13 30-115m -86dBm @ 6Mbps 54,48,36,34,18,12,9,6Mbps auto fallback 802.11a Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (for future release) Compact Flash or PC Card form factor Transmit Power 40mW max Frequency Range 5.15-5.35GHz, 5.47-5.85GHz Channels 1 to 20 Range 50-115m Rx Sensitivity -87dBm @ 6Mbps Data Rates 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 1,2 9 and 6 Mbps auto fallback 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 245 Chapter 8: Specifications Bar Code Scanning RA1001 - Narrow Band Radio Psion Teklogix Proprietary Narrowband Modulation (2/4 level FSK) Type III PC Card Form Factor Transmit Power 1W or 0.5W Frequency Range 403-422 MHz, 419-435 MHz, 435-451 MHz, 450-470 MHz, 464-480 MHz, 480-496 MHz, 496-512 MHz Rx Sensitivity < -110 dBm @ 19.2 kbps (4 level FSK) Data Rates 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19.2 kbps Bluetooth Radio SDI/O form factor Transmit Power Frequency Range RX Sensitivity Data Rate 0dBm max, -9dBm min 2.400-2.4835 -72dBm typ, -75dBm max 784Kbps 8.3 Bar Code Scanning Scanner Types Decoded and non-decoded. Non-Decoded Codes Supported Code 39, code 128, EAN 13, EAN 8, EAN 128, UPC-A, UPC-E, Codabar, Code 93, Code 11, Interleaved 2-of-5, MSI/PLESSY, Discrete 2-of-5. Decoded Codes Supported Dependent on external scanner choice. Code Discrimination Automatic for all selected codes, NonDecoded input. Decoded input is external scanner dependent. 8.3.1 External Scanners Supported Types Decoded and Non-Decoded 5V only. Interface Via tether port. 246 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 18-Nov-2004 Chapter 8: Specifications External Scanner Specifications 8.4 External Scanner Specifications 8.4.1 PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs Communication Undecoded Standard and Intermec-compatible. Mechanical Dimensions Weight Cable lengths 6.9 x 11.2 x 18.3 cm (2.7 x 4.4 x 7.2 in) Scanner - 280 g (9.9 ozs) Cable (82.3 cm 32 in) - 176 g (6.2 ozs) Collapsed: 81 cm (32 in) Max working: 183 cm (72 in) Electrical Operating voltage Operating current - nominal 4 VDC to 14 VDC Undecoded: 75 mA @ 5 VDC Decoded: 100 mA @ 5 VDC Idling current - low power mode < 50 µA @ 5 VDC Optical Light source Scan System Rate Depth of field - Long Range Extra bright 650 nm Visible Laser Diode (VLD) Frictionless lifetime flexure mechanism 35 scans/sec nominal Paper Labels (decoded) 7.5 mil 6 to 10 in (15 to 25 cm) 10 mil 5 to 20 in (13 to 51 cm) 15 mil 5 to 32 in (13 to 81 cm) 20 mil 5 to 48 in (15 to 122 cm) 40 mil 8 to 85 in (20 to 216 cm) 55 mil 15 to 108 in (38 to 274 cm) Reflective Labels (decoded) 18-Nov-2004 40 mil 22 to 100 in (56 to 254 cm) 55 mil 30 to 104 in (76 to 366 cm) 70 mil 40 to 180 in (102 to 457 cm) Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 247 Chapter 8: Specifications PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs 100 mil 45 to 264 in (114 to 671 cm) Depth of Field-Extra Long Range Paper Labels (decoded) 15 mil 28 to 60 in (71 to 152 cm) 20 mil 28 to 72 in (71 to 182 cm) 40 mil 28 to 144 in (71 to 144 cm) 55 mil 40 to 180 in (102 to 457) Reflective Labels (decoded) 40 mil 40 to 180 in (102 to 457 cm) 70 mil 80 to 300 in (2032 to 762 cm) 100 mil 80 to 432 in (203 to 1097 cm) Print Contrast Ratio Pitch Skew Ambient Light Immunity 25% minimum ± 65˚ ± 55˚ Artificial light: 1200 ft. candles. Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles. Environmental Temperature Rating Humidity Shock (at 23˚ C) Vibration Water and Dust Operating: -22˚ to 122˚ F (-30˚ to 50˚ C) Storage: -40˚ to 158˚ F (-40˚ to 70˚ C) 5 to 95% NC Withstands multiple 6 foot drops to concrete. Meets MIL-STD-810E IEC529 rating IP54DW Decoding Capabilities Auto-discriminates between: UPC A, E/EAN8, 13/JAN8, 13 (P2/P5, Code 128 EAN add-ons) Code 128, MSI/Plessey, Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, Code 39 Full Ascii, Standard 2 of 5, Code 93, Codabar, 18-Nov-2004 Safety/Regulatory Electrical Emissions Complies to: Gost R; TUV; UL; cUL Complies to: FCC-A;EN55022-B 248 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Chapter 8: Specifications PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs BCIQCNS13438; AS/NZS3548; VCCI-B CDRH Class 2;IEC60825 Class 2 Laser Classification 8.4.2 PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs Communication Undecoded Standard and Intermec-compatible. Mechanical Dimensions Weight 6.9 x 11.2 x 18.3 cm (2.7 x 4.4 x 7.2 in) Scanner - 280 g (9.9 ozs) Cable (82.3 cm 32 in) - 176 g (6.2 ozs) Collapsed: 81 cm (32 in) Max working: 183 cm (72 in) Cable lengths Optical Light source Scan System Rate Depth of field - Standard (paper) Print Contrast Ratio Pitch Skew Extra bright 650 nm Visible Laser Diode (VLD) Frictionless lifetime flexure mechanism 35 scans/sec nominal Paper Labels (decoded) 7.5 mil 3.0 to 6 in (9 to 15 cm) 10 mil 1.5 to 15 in (4 to 38 cm) 15 mil 1.0 to 25 in (2.5 to 64 cm) 20 mil 1.0 to 35 in (2.5 to 89 cm) 55 mil 6.0 to 60 in (15 to 152 cm) High Density (decoded) 3 mil 1.0 to 2 in 4 mil 1.0 to 3 in 5 mil 0.8 to 3.8 in 7.5 mil 0.6 to 4.5 in 10 mil 0.2 to 5.5 in 25% minimum ± 65˚ ± 55˚ (2.5 to 5.1 cm) (2.5 to 8 cm) (2 to 10 cm) (1.5 to 11 cm) (0.5 to 14 cm) 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 249 Chapter 8: Specifications Internal Lithium-Ion Battery Ambient Light Immunity Artificial light: 1200 ft. candles. Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles. Electrical Operating voltage Operating current - nominal 4 VDC to 14 VDC Undecoded: 75 mA @ 5 VDC Decoded: 100 mA @ 5 VDC Idling current - low power mode < 50 µA @ 5 VDC Environmental Temperature Rating Humidity Shock (at 23˚ C) Vibration Water and Dust Operating: -22˚ to 122˚ F (-30˚ to 50˚ C) Storage: -40˚ to 158˚ F (-40˚ to 70˚ C) 5 to 95% NC Withstands multiple 6 foot drops to concrete. Meets MIL-STD-810E IEC529 rating IP54DW Decoding Capabilities Auto-discriminates between: UPC A, E/EAN8, 13/JAN8, 13 (P2/P5, Code 128 EAN add-ons) Code 128, MSI/Plessey, Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, Code 39 Full Ascii, Standard 2 of 5, Code 93, Codabar, Safety/Regulatory Electrical Emissions Laser Classification Complies to: Gost R; TUV; UL; cUL Complies to: FCC-A;EN55022-B BCIQCNS13438; AS/NZS3548; VCCI-B CDRH Class 2;IEC60825 Class 2 8.5 Internal Lithium-Ion Battery Not user accessible. Technology 12.6V Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) backup battery 18-Nov-2004 250 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual APPENDIX A SUPPORT SERVICES AND WORLDWIDE OFFICES Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its customers worldwide. These services include technical support and product repairs. A.1 Technical Support Technical Support for Mobile Computing Products is provided via e-mail through the Psion Teklogix customer and partner extranets. To reach the website, go to www.psionteklogix.com and click on the appropriate Teknet link on the home page. Then click on the “Log-in” button or the “Register” button, depending on whether you have previously registered for Teknet. Once you have logged in, search for the “Support Request Form”. A.2 Product Repairs International For technical support outside of Canada or the U.S.A., please contact your local Psion Teklogix office listed on our worldwide website: http://www.psionteklogix.com Click on the heading labelled ‘Contacts’ to choose a Psion Teklogix technical support representative closest to you. Canada/U.S.A Canadian and U.S. customers can receive access to repair services, by calling the toll-free number below, or via our secure website (see Technical Support, above). Note: Customers calling the toll-free number should have their Psion Teklogix customer number or trouble ticket number available. Voice: 1 800 387-8898 (press option ‘2’) Fax: 1 905 812-6304 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual A-1 A.3 Worldwide Offices COMPANY HEADQUARTERS AND CANADIAN SERVICE CENTRE NORTH AMERICAN HEADQUARTERS AND U.S. SERVICE CENTRE Psion Teklogix Inc. 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 Psion Teklogix Corp. 1810 Airport Exchange Boulevard Suite 500 Erlanger, Kentucky USA 41018 Tel: Fax: Tel: Fax: +1 905 813 9900 +1 905 812 6300 Email: [email protected] +1 859 371 6006 +1 859 371 6422 Email: [email protected] INTERNATIONAL SUBSIDIARIES (see also www.psionteklogix.com) Psion Teklogix S.A. La Duranne 135 Rue Rene Descartes BP 421000 13591 Aix-En-Provence Cedex 3; France Tel: +33 4 42 90 88 09 Fax: +33 4 42 90 88 88 E-mail: [email protected] 18-Nov-2004 A-2 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual APPENDIX B PORT PINOUTS B.1 Tether Port Pinout The tether port connector incorporates multiplexed undecoded scanner, decoded scanner, RS232 serial, and USB interfaces. In order for it to operate, a special wiring scheme is needed. If you need to create cables for the tether port, contact Psion Teklogix and request an instruction sheet for tether port termination. Important: Do not attempt to interface with the tether connector without direction from a qualified Psion Teklogix technician. Doing so may cause damage to the 8525 and/or the tethered device. B.2 RS232 Port Pinout Pin No. Description 1 DCD (Data Carrier Detect) 2 RXD (Receive Data) 3 TXD (Transmit Data) 4 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) 5 GND (Signal Ground) 6 DSR (Data Set Ready) 7 RTS (Ready To Send) 8 CTS (Clear to Send) * 9 5V POWER * * CAUTION: If enabled (software configurable), 5V power will appear on18-Nov-2004 this line, which may be the Ring Indicator line on some devices such as modems. 1/2 Amp Max. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual B-1 Appendix B: Port Pinouts DB-26 Auxiliary Port Pinout B.3 DB-26 Auxiliary Port Pinout Pin No. Signal And Description 1 EXT_5V_SW – Configurable 5V power for External devices (such as USB). 1/2 Amp max. 2 EXT_5V_SW – Same as above. 3 MIC_IN – Microphone input. 4 MIC_GND – Microphone signal ground. 5 Speaker + (positive). 6 Speaker - (negative). 7 GND - Signal Ground 8 USB_HOST_PORT_4_PLUS - for connecting external devices such as keyboards, mice, printers. 9 USB_HOST_PORT_4_PLUS - for connecting external devices such as keyboards, mice, printers. 10 GND - Signal Ground. 11 USB_DEVICE_PLUS – For connections to USB Hosts such as computers. 12 USB_DEVICE_NEGATIVE – For connections to USB Hosts such as computers. 13 GND - Signal Ground. 14 USB_HOST_PORT_3_PLUS – For connecting external devices such as keyboards, mice, printers. 15 USB_HOST_PORT_3_NEGATIVE – For connecting external devices such as keyboards, mice, printers. 16 GND – Signal Ground 17 CONSOLE_RXD – Console Port (RS-232) Receive Data ** Internal use only. 18 CONSOLE_TXD – Console Port (RS-232) Transmit Data ** Internal use only. 19 GND – Signal Ground B-2 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 18-Nov-2004 Appendix B: Port Pinouts DB-26 Auxiliary Port Pinout Pin No. Signal And Description 20 CONSOLE_TXD_SEL – Transmit data Select - selects whether the PCON or PXA-255 (CPU) is sending data out the CONSOLE_TXD pin. **Internal use only. 21 MOTION DETECT – Alternate input- blanks the screen for the period that this pin is grounded -(usually implemented via extra wires in the Unit input Power cable. 22 AUXILIARY_ID – External device Identity Input Pin. 23 NO CONNECT. 24 PCON_PROGRAM – Input – used to program Peripheral Controller **Internal use only. 25 NO CONNECT. 26 NO CONNECT. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual B-3 C APPENDIX USB SETUP APPLICATION C.1 USB Setup The USB Setup application (PN 1000997) is used to update a Windows PC so that it can connect to a Psion Teklogix 8525. System Requirements • • Windows® 2000 or XP ActiveSync 3.1 or later The two driver classes that control USB communication are usbstor (for communication with a device running BooSt) and wceusbsh (for communication through ActiveSync with a device running Windows CE .NET). These drivers must be updated with 8525-specific information so that the 8525 can be recognized by your PC. The install program: • updates copies of the device installation scripts usbstor.inf and wceusbsh.inf with Psion Teklogix-specific information, • sets up a USB connection between the PC and the 8525, and • installs the 8525 as a device on your PC. This may require notifying the PC OS that the device should be reinstalled and then reconnecting the USB device. C.1.1 Launching The Application The log file is initialized and the program introduction is written to it. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual C-1 Appendix C: USB Setup Application Pre-Installation: Updating usbstor.inf And wceusbsh.inf C.1.2 Pre-Installation: Updating usbstor.inf And wceusbsh.inf 1. Welcome Dialogue Box: You can click on the <Back> and <Next> buttons to navigate between the pre-install windows. At any time during the pre-installation process, you can tap on <Cancel> to exit the program. • • Shut down all other software programs – especially ActiveSync – to avoid a restart request during installation. Tap on the <Next> button. The program checks that ActiveSync is installed and that it is a supported version – 3.1 or later. If the version installed on your PC is not supported, you’ll need to exit the USB Setup application, and install a later version of ActiveSync. 2. Device Driver INF File Selection Dialogue Box: This dialogue box allows you to choose the paths of the appropriate inf files. Default file paths are provided in this dialogue box. 18-Nov-2004 C-2 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Appendix C: USB Setup Application Pre-Installation: Updating usbstor.inf And wceusbsh.inf • If necessary, tap on the <Browse> buttons to select different paths for the inf files. 3. Device Driver Install Selection Dialogue Box: You can choose to have the device drivers installed immediately by selecting the check box (√), or you can leave the check box blank and Windows will install the 8525 the next time it is connected. It is recommended that the device be installed immediately. • Select the drivers you want to update – wceusbsh and usbstor. • Tap on the <Next> button. Note: None of the drivers are updated by default. To complete the process, you must establish USB connections. 4. Device Driver Backup Selection Dialogue Box: The USB Setup application will attempt to back up the driver .sys files before attempting the installation. It specifies which files it will try to back up and the location to which it will back them up. 18-Nov-2004 Note: Both drivers are selected for backup by default. The backup directory is <system directory>\drivers\ptxBackup. Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual C-3 Appendix C: USB Setup Application Installation: Installing The 8525 As a Device On Your PC C.1.3 Installation: Installing The 8525 As a Device On Your PC 1. Install Dialogue Box: The .sys files you selected are copied to the backup directory. If an unknown error occurs during the backup, you are asked whether you’d prefer to cancel the install or continue with the process. The wceusbsh.inf and usbstor.inf files are updated. 2. If you indicated that the wceusbsh driver should be installed, the Install dialogue box appears again. The USB Setup application will attempt to install the drivers immediately. This will succeed only if a valid USB connection to the device that is running Windows CE .NET exists. • If the install fails due to an unknown error, the install for this particular driver is aborted. • If the install fails because there was an inappropriate USB connection, there are two possibilities: • An appropriate USB connection was never established between the PC and the 8525 running Windows CE .NET. In this case, when an appropriate USB connection with this device exists, Windows will automatically attempt to install the device driver. • An appropriate USB connection exists between the PC and the 8525 running Windows CE .NET, but it has since been severed. Windows may or may not attempt to automatically install the device drivers on the next appropriate USB connection. • A window is displayed where you can tap on <Cancel> to abort the wceusbsh driver installation and continue. It also contains instructions to boot your device into Windows CE .NET and establish a USB connection between the device and the PC. When you create the appropriate connection, Windows automatically installs the device drivers. The ‘Found New Hardware’ wizard may appear. Your only interaction with this window is to click on the <Finish> button. • If this is the first appropriate connect between the device and the PC – i.e., there was no previous devnode for the device in the system – the <Continue> button is activated as soon as the connection is made. 18-Nov-2004 Where there was a devnode present in the system and it has been marked for reinstall, the <Continue> button will not become active until Windows has C-4 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Appendix C: USB Setup Application Post Installation completed the driver installation and the device is no longer marked for reinstall. Only one devnode per device can be ‘unset’ when the device drivers are finally installed. 3. If you indicated that the usbstor driver should be installed, the same steps as described above are carried out for usbstor except that the 8525 must be running BooSt. (Press and hold down the <SCAN> <BLUE> <ENTER> keys for a minimum of 6 seconds to launch the BooSt program.) Keep in mind that a device running BooSt has a different hardware ID than when it is running Windows CE .NET. C.1.4 Post Installation 1. Done Dialogue Box: This dialogue box indicates the success or failure of the installation. • To view the log file, tap on the <Log File> button • To exit the program, tap on the <Exit> button. 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual C-5 INDEX # of Cols (ANSI) 182 # of Cols (TESS) 196 # of Pages (ANSI) 181 # of Rows (ANSI) 182 # of Rows (TESS) 196 A accents, adding (Custom Characters) 172 accessories bar code readers, connecting 231 acknowledged host number (ah) 152 acknowledged remote number (ar) 152 acknowledgements, transmitted (xa) 151 acknowledgements received 151 AC power icon 36 AcQ (# of messages sent but not acknowledged by cellular master) 152 Active Conn Tab 102 ActiveSync ASync profile 99 Addendum 120, 122, 123 addresses, network See also Network addresses 226 Ad Hoc network 18 Advanced (wireless connection) 23 ah (acknowledged host number) 152 AIAG AIAG Character 210 AIAG Strip 118 Mixed AIAG 206 AIAG Character 210 AIAG Strip 118 aiming dot, duration of 115 All Fld Video 207 Alpha parameters 155, 156 ALT Key 31 anchor (viewport) 221 Anchor Column 222 Anchor Line 222 Anchor View x origin 193, 209 y origin 193, 209 ANSI # of Cols 182 # of Pages 181 # of Rows 182 Applications menu 175 arrow keys 147 auto-answerback string 185 Auto Login (Telnet Settings) 179 Auto Term# 176, 194 Group 177, 194 block mode 148, 186–188 Colour Override 184 configuration 146 Conn Type (connection type) 177 CR character 190 device attribute requests 147 device attribute string 185 disabling the keyboard/scanner 190 Edit Modes 191–192 ENTER key 147, 189 ENTER Pmpt (Telnet Settings) 178 ESC Prompt (Telnet Settings) 179 Func Key Remap (Telnet Settings) 180 Function key equivalents 147 Group Auto Term# 177, 194 Host (Telnet Settings) 178 Kbd Modes 188–190 keyboard lock 186 LF character 190 local editing mode 148, 185 Login (Telnet Settings) 179 Login Failed (Telnet Settings) 180 Login Prompt (Telnet Settings) 179 Media Copy 186 mnemonics 192 multiple sessions 175 18-Nov-2004 Password (Telnet Settings) 179 Password Echo (Telnet Settings) 180 Password Prompt (Telnet Settings) 179 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 1 Index Port 178 sessions, closing 149 sessions, establishing new 149 sessions, listing 149 sessions, moving between 149 settings 176–193 Telnet connection 177 Terminal # 177 Terminal Type 178 transmitting data 119, 121, 186 Xmit Modes 184–188 802.IQ connection 177 ANSI Settings Connection Type - Telnet & TCP Direct 177 Screen settings 181 AP/Controller mac , displaying 151 App. parameter 197 appearance (display colour scheme) 69 Append Enter 205 Append F0 205 appending to bar codes characters 115, 119, 121 Applications ANSI Settings 176–193 character attributes (TESS) 198 Character Sets (TESS) 198 Fields parameters (TESS) 206 Host Conn (ANSI) 177 Host Conn (TESS) 195 menu (Applications) 175 Scanner parameters (TESS) 205 Screen parameters (ANSI) 181 Screen parameters (TESS) 196 TESS Settings 194–209 Type and Title 176 approvals 8525 244 ar (acknowledged remote number) 152 arrow keys 147 completing a data field 139, 207 cycling through special characters 157 Enh Mode, using 208 moving the cursor 31 Arrow mode 188 Arrows 225 ASCII decimal equivalents of characters 200 2 Full Ascii 117 matching fields 199 Async In 192 attributes, video 183, 207 Audio 165 audio indicators description of beep conditions 37 Authentication, Bluetooth Controls 99 authentication, network 19 Auto-Answer 185 Auto Login (ANSI Telnet Settings) 179 Auto Radio Addr 162, 227 AutoRep Fn (function key sent to host) 200 AutoRep T/O 200 Auto Start 168 auto tab fields 138 Auto Term# (ANSI) 176, 194 Auto wrap 191 B backlight display 69 keyboard 32 backspace (CTRL H) 189 backup profile, creating (Total Recall) 108 backup profile, restoring (Total Recall) 111 bar code AIAG 206 appending to 115, 119, 121 connecting bar code reader 231 decodes required 116 decoding edge-to-edge 116 displaying type of bar code 114 parameters 116–127 prefix character 118, 121 Security 116 stripping characters 119, 121 suffix character 119, 121 symbologies Codabar 123 Code 11 124 Code 128 119 Code 39 117–118 18-Nov-2004 Code 93 123 Discrete 2 of 5 125 EAN 13 120 EAN 8 121 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Index IATA 2 of 5 126 Interleaved 2 of 5 124 MSI Plessey 125 UPC A 122 UPC E 123 Barcode Character 210 bar-code-only fields 138 bar code reader external (specs) 246 external scanner, operation of 231 integrated scanner, operation of 37 batteries installing 28 power suspend dialogue box 81 removing 28 specifications 250 Baud 219 beacons received (rb) 151 beacon timeouts (bt) 152 Beam Lockout 206 beep conditions 165 beeper description of beep conditions 37 beeper sounds 165 Beep Tone and Beep Time 166 bell (CTRL G) 189 Binary print 201 BKSP 31 BKSP/DEL Key TESS sessions, BKSP key behaviour in 141 TESS sessions, DEL key behaviour in 142 BKSP Key 31 BKSP key BKSP key (ANSI) 189 blinking video attribute 183, 207 Block Cursor 169 block mode, ANSI 148, 186–188 BLUE Key 30 Bluetooth radio changing device name 102 device service profiles 99 ISM band 97 PINs for devices 100 radio configuration 97–102 Bluetooth setup 97 GPRS setup 103 peripherals 231 bold video attribute 183, 207 Bootloader (Shutdown menu) 58 bootnum 802.IQ 151 802.IQ, displaying 151 Bright For (backlight) 70 Brightness 224 Brk for Attn 213 BSP, Bluetooth Controls 102 bt (beacon timeouts) 152 Buffer 220 C ca (cellular address) 152 cable diagrams B-1 cables installing in vehicle 237 calibrating (touchscreen) 32, 83 cellular address (ca) 152 CH, Bluetooth Controls 99 changing password (Start Menu security) 52 changing softkey labels (Label F1-F10) 183, 197 Character parameters (TESS) 198 characters appending to bar codes 119, 121 Char Set, choosing (TESS) 198 cycling through 157 decimal values of 200 EOB chars 188 EOL chars 187 Lower (ANSI) 193 prefix 118, 121 stripping 119, 121 suffix 119, 121 Upper (ANSI) 193 character set (Tether & Console Port) 218 Character Sets Host Char Set 193 character sets choosing in TESS 198 Lower (ANSI) 193 Upper (ANSI) 193 Char Set (TESS) 198 18-Nov-2004 Check Digit 124 check digit 120, 123, 124, 125 Check Digit, One 125 Clear Entry Fields 210 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 3 Index Click Data (scanner double-click) 115 Click Time (scanner double-click) 115 CLR/DEL key Local Echo mode (ANSI) 189 CLR Key 226 Codabar 123 Code 11 124 Code 128 119 Code 39 117–118 Code 93 123 Cold Reset (Shutdown menu) 58 Colour Override 184, 198 Column Offset 222 columns number of in ANSI screen 182 number of in TESS screen 196 COM, Bluetooth Controls 102 Command Prompt 53 Command Region Up, Down, Left & Right 211 configuring IEEE 802.11 radio 15 configuring softkey labels (Label F1-F10) 197 configuring softkey labels (Label F1-F5) 183 connecting Auto Login (ANSI Telnet Settings) 179 ENTER Pmpt (ANSI Telnet Settings) 178 Login (ANSI Telnet Settings) 179 Login Failed (ANSI Telnet Settings) 180 Login Prompt (ANSI Telnet Settings) 179 Password (ANSI Telnet Settings) 179 Password Echo (ANSI Telnet Settings) 180 Password Prompt (ANSI Telnet Settings) 179 connection, host 177, 195 connection list table, Bluetooth Controls 102 Conn Type (connection type) 177, 195 Cont Nxt Fld 205 control codes 192 control panel accessing 63 4 basic setup 68 Display Properties 68 icons 64 keyboard properties 70 power management properties 80 stylus properties 82 Convert to UPC-A 123 country code 120 CR/LF CTRL J 189 LF character 190 Newline 190 CRC (serial I/O) 204, 205 CTRL commands CTRL a 149 CTRL c 144 CTRL f 140 CTRL G (Bell) 189 CTRL h 145 CTRL H (Backspace) 189 CTRL h (host select) 144 CTRL i 140 CTRL I (Tab) 189 CTRL J (Line Feed) 189 CTRL K (Vertical Tab) 189 CTRL L 145 CTRL L (Form Feed) 189 CTRL p (reprint) 144 CTRL r 140 CTRL s 143 CTRL s (status, displaying continuously) 144 CTRL t 143 CTRL t (status, display with unit #) 144 CTRL u 140 CTRL w 143 CTRL Key 31 cursor changing shape of 169 Enh Edit mode 208 Field Order 206 linefeed mode (ANSI) 189 moving between fields 188, 206 newline mode (ANSI) 189 Custom Characters 172 cycle tasks 55 18-Nov-2004 D data entering 139, 208 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Index Ign Bcode_fld 208 with a bar code reader 231 serial I/O 204 Serial In/Out 203 transmitting from the terminal 190, 207 transmitting from the 8525 139, 185 Data Bits 219 data stream type (typ) 152 DEC Cursor Keys (ANSI Keyboard parameter) 191 decimal values of keys 200 decoding bar codes decodes required 116 Security 116 decrementing parameters 154, 156 Default Colour 175 Default font 182, 208 DEFAULT key (F3) 134 DEFLT key (F3) 159 DEL/CLR key Local Echo mode (ANSI) 189 DEL Key 31 DEL key DEL key (ANSI) 189 desktop connection, remote 63 Dev Attr 185 device attribute requests 147 device attribute string 185 Device Name, changing 102 dialogue box, using 58 digit check digit 120, 123, 124, 125 number system 122, 123 Dim For (backlight) 70 Disable kbd 190 disabling/enabling Y/N parameters 154, 156 disconnecting ESC Prompt (ANSI Telnet Settings) 179 Discrete 2 of 5 125 Disp controls 192 display Anchor Column 222 Anchor Line 222 Anchor View 193, 209 appearance (colour scheme) 69 background (control panel) 68 backlight 69 Brightness 224 Display Properties 68 Display Shift 169 Field Scroll 196 ICH/DCH controls 191 Line Scrolling 224 moving 169 Origin Scroll 196 Panning 224 positioning 196 split screens 170 Use Increment 169 video attributes 183, 207 viewport, mapping 221 Wraparound 224 X-Increment 169 Y-Increment 169 displaying TESS version number 143 Display Menu selecting a TESS session 138 Display menu 153 Display Properties 68 Display Shift 169 Dot Time 115 double-click appending characters to a decoded bar code 115 scanner trigger 115 Double-Tap (stylus settings) 83 DUN service, Bluetooth 99 E EAN/UCC 128 120 EAN 13 120 EAN 8 121 EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) 20 Echo Mode 188 Edit extent 191 editing 185 Edit Modes 191–192 edit modes, TESS 140 empty entry fields 200 Emulation 2392 Telnet 209 AIAG Character 18-Nov-2004 210 Barcode Character 210 Clear Entry Fields 210 Command Region Up, Down, Left Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 5 Index & Right 211 Enable Alarm 211 Features 210 Fixed Field Overhd 211 Passthru Printing 210 Send CR with FKEY 209 Serial IO Character 211 3274 Telnet 212 BRK for Attn 213 Features 213 FKEY0-39 214 Fujitsu Host 212 Intl EBCDIC 212 IP for SysReq 212 LU Name 213 LU Name Enabled 213 Null In Fields 212 5250 Telnet 214 Features 216 FKEY0-39 216 Intl EBCDIC 215 LU Name Enabled 215 LU Name Prefix 215 Nulls In Fields 215 Remap Underline To 215 Term Type 215 WEC (Write Error Code) 214 Emulation 209 emulation keys, IBM 5250 139 Enable Alarm 211 enabling/disabling Y/N parameters 154, 156 Encryption, Bluetooth Controls 99 END 31 End (ANSI) 192 END Key 31 Enh Edit Mode (TESS) 208 ENTER key 147 completing a data field 139 CR/LF character 190 Enter on Arrows 207 Local Echo mode (ANSI) 189 newline mode (ANSI) 189 Xmit Enter 190 Enter On Arr 207 ENTER Pmpt (ANSI Telnet Settings) 178 Enter To F0 207 ENT Key 226 6 entry fields 138 empty fields 200 Function keys 208 hidden match 199 Ign Bcode_fld 208 video attributes 183, 207 visible match 199 Entry Mode 208 entry mode 208 EOB chars 188 EOL chars 187 Erasure Mode 191 Error Accept 118 Error Tone and Error Time 166 ESC Key 31 ESC Prompt (ANSI Telnet Settings) 179 Exit 168 Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) 20 F Fcursor mode 140 features (of 8525) 5 Features (2392 Telnet) 210 Features (3274 Telnet) 213 Features (5250 Telnet) 216 FETM 187 fh (forward host number) 152 Field mode 140 Field Order 206 fields Arrow mode 188 auto-tab fields 138 bar-code-only fields 138 completing a data field 139, 207 Enh Edit mode 208 entry fields 138, 200 Field Order 206 Field Scroll 196 Field Size 118 fixed fields 138 hidden match 199 Ign Bcode_fld 208 “insert” mode 190, 208 match fields 138 “replace” mode 190, 208 18-Nov-2004 serial I/O fields 138 Serial In/Out 203 size 118 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Index “transmit on” 139 video attributes 183, 207 visible match 199 Fields parameters (for TESS Settings) 206 Fill Chr 200 Fixed Field Overhd 211 fixed fields 138 F Keys (function keys) 226 FKEY0-39 214, 216 Flow Control 219 Follow Cursor 224 font Default Font 182, 208 Font Change 168 Font Override 174 Foreground & Background (Colour Override) 184, 198 Foreground & Background (Default Colour) 175 Format Effector Transfer Mode (FETM) 187 form feed (CTRL L) 189 forward host number (fh) 152 forward remote number (fr) 152 fr (forward remote number) 152 Fujitsu Host 212 Full Ascii 117 Func Key Remap (ANSI Telnet Settings) 180 Function Keys 32, 133 softkeys 134 Function keys 147 ANSI equivalents 147 auto reply mode 200 completing a data field 139 entering data 208 executing procedures from the local menu 145 FKEY0-39 (3274 Telnet) 214 FKEY0-39 (5250 Telnet) 216 Label F1-F10, changing 183, 197 Open Fky Only 208 serial I/O 204 G GATM (Guarded Area Transfer Mode) 187 Global Positioning System Unit 232 GPRS (bluetooth) 103 GPS Unit 232 Group (ANSI Auto Term#) 177, 194 H helpdesk 4 hidden fields match 199 H Match Chr 199 HOME 31, 32 HOME Key 31, 32 host multiple hosts 145 selecting a host 145 switching between hosts 201 Host (ANSI Telnet Settings) 178 Host (TESS Connection Type) 195 Host Char Set 193 Host Connection ANSI 177 TESS 195 Host echo mode 188 host select (CTRL h) 144 host terminal number of session (tn) 152 I I/O fields 138 IATA 2 of 5 126 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 139 ICD/DCH controls, displaying 191 IEEE radio, configuring 15 Ign Bcode_fld 208 Include Check 120, 121, 123, 125, 126 Include Check (Discrete 2 of 5 symbology) 125 Include Check (Interleaved 2 of 5 symbology) 125 Include Chk 117, 122, 124 Include Country 120 Include Number Sys 122, 123 Include Sym (Code 128) 119 incrementing parameters 154, 156 Indicators 164 indicators LED functions 33 modifier keys 36 onscreen 35 18-Nov-2004 power, AC 36 radio signal quality 36 scanner message 38 security level 36 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 7 Index status area 137 task bar 48 inf usbstor, installing C-4 usbstor, updating C-2 wceusbsh, installing C-4 wceusbsh, updating C-2 Infrastructure network 18 initialized messages, transmitted (802.IQv1 xi) See xi (transmitted initialize messages) 151 Initial RTT 163, 228 Input 127 input bar-code-only fields 138 bar code reader 231 I/O fields 203 Input tmo 220 “insert” mode 190, 208 Open Fky Only 208 Output tmo 220 “replace” mode 190, 208 serial I/O 204 serial I/O fields 138 Serial In/Out 203 Input Tmo 220 Insert mode 140 “insert” mode 190, 208 INS Key 31 installation 8570 cables to devices 237 integrated scanner option 37 Intensity (7035 backlighting) 70, 72 Interleaved 2 of 5 124 Internet Explorer 53 Intl EBCDIC 212, 215 IP address, assigning 21 IP for SysReq 212 ISM band, Bluetooth radio 97 ITF Check (Discrete 2 of 5 symbology) 125 ITF Check (IATA 2 of 5 symbology) 126 ITF Check (I 2 of 5 symbology) 124 I 2 of 5 Short Code 115 K Kbd lock 186 Kbd Locked 202 8 Kbd Modes 188–190 keyboard compatibility with VT220 ANSI keyboard 147 disabling the keyboard 190 function keys 147 Kbd modes 188–190 key repeat 70, 72 lock 186, 202 lock messages 144 one shot mode 72 Keyboard (Tekterm) 164 keyboard backlight 32 keyboard keys 29 ALT 31 arrow keys 31 BKSP 31 BLUE key 30 CTRL 31 DEFAULT key (F3) 134 DEL 31 END 31 ESC 31 Function keys 32 HOME 31, 32 INS 31 LITERAL key (F5) 134 Macro keys 32 macro keys 73, 134, 164 modifiers 29 navigating using the keyboard 46 NEXT key (F1) 134 one shot mode 72 ORANGE key 30 PREVIOUS key (F2) 134 SAVE key (F4) 134 SHIFT 30 softkeys 134 SPACE 31 TAB 31 keyboard mapping (Scan-See) 226 Keyboard Properties 70, 72 backlight 72 one shot mode 72 Key Index, assigning 20 Key Repeat tab 71 18-Nov-2004 keys emulation keys, IBM 5250 139 transmit key 186 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Index L M Label F1-F10 183, 197 labels, changing softkey (Label F1-F10) 197 labels, changing softkey (Label F1-F5) 183 LANAccessUsingPPP service, Bluetooth 99 launching DOS 153 Parameters menu 153 Tekterm 153 Lcl Process 145, 201 LED charge 34 functions (8525) 33 receive 34 scan 35 transmit 34 LED Scan-See Brightness 224 LF/CR CTRL J 189 LF character 190 Newline 190 Line Offset 222 Line Scrolling 224 LITERAL key (F5) 134 local editing mode, ANSI 148, 185 Local echo mode 188 menu 145 procedures 145 process 145, 201 Save on Reset 201 “LOCK–B” message 144, 196 locked keyboard 186, 202 locked 8525 200 “LOCK–H” message 144, 196 lock time, decreasing with queuing mode 146 Login (ANSI Telnet Settings) 179 Login Failed (ANSI Telnet Settings) 180 Login Prompt (ANSI Telnet Settings) 179 Lower (ANSI Host Char Set) 193 LU Name 213 LU Name Enabled 213, 215 LU Name Prefix 215 MAC address, access point/controller 151 MAC address, 8525 151 Macro Keys 32 Macro keys accessing 134 executing a macro 74 Macros menu, accessing 73, 164 recording and saving 73 maintenance (8525) 41 mapping keyboard (Scan-See) 226 mapping viewport 221 match fields 138 MATM 187 Media Copy (ANSI) 186 memory, resetting 159 menu, local 145 Menu mode taskbar (switching between apps) 136 menus, working with 153 message mask (msk) 152 messages enabling/disabling next message 202 “LOCK–B” 144, 196 “LOCK–H” 144, 196 “NEXT–B” 145, 146 “NEXT–H” 145, 146 “RESET: Press Enter” 137 Scan Indicator 114 scanner warning message 114 Scan Result 114 TESS status message 143 messages, retransmitting (802.IQv1 xr) See xr (retransmissions) 152 messages received (rm) 151 messages transmitted (xm) 151 milestone 202 Mixed AIAG 206 mnemonics (ANSI) 192 mode serial I/O 203 Model 7000 Brightness 224 modifier keys 29 locking 30 18-Nov-2004 One Shot Mode 72 unlocking 30 Mod 10 Check 118, 126 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 9 Index Mod 10 Check (Discrete 2 of 5 symbology) 125 Mod 10 Check (I 2 of 5 symbology) 124 Mod 43 Check 118 moving the display 169, 196 MSI Plessey 125 msk (message mask) 152 multiple ANSI sessions 175 applications 175 hosts 145 TESS sessions 175 Multiple Area Transfer Mode (MATM) 187 N name servers, assigning 22 network Ad Hoc 18 connection, monitoring 39 control panel settings 226 infrastructure 18 Network addresses 226 network authentication 19 Network Key, assigning 20 Newline 190 “NEXT–B” message 145, 146 “NEXT–H” message 145, 146 NEXT key (F1) 134 Next X 202 Null In Fields 212 Nulls In Fields 215 number of columns (ANSI) 182 of columns (TESS) 196 of pages (ANSI) 181 of rows (ANSI) 182 of rows (TESS) 196 Terminal # (ANSI) 146, 177 Terminal # (TESS) 138 number system digit 122, 123 numeric fields (Rjct if Alpha) 206 numeric parameters 154, 156 numeric parameters, minimum/maximum limits to 154, 156 O Off & On buttons 15, 28 offices list 4 10 off-line 8525 using local procedures 145 offset (viewport) 221 On & Off button 15, 28 One Check Digit 125 one dimensional internal scanner 38 One Shot Mode 72 ON For 72 Open (network authentication) 19 Open Fky Only 208 ORANGE Key 30 order of fields in TESS screen 206 Origin Scroll 196 Output 127 output/input fields, serial port 203 Output Tmo 220 P pages # of Cols (TESS) 196 # of Columns (ANSI) 182 # of Pages (ANSI) 181 # of Rows (ANSI) 182 # of Rows (TESS) 196 positioning 196 queuing mode 146 reprinting 144 size/shape 182 Pages Saved (TESS) 197 Panning 224 parameters Alpha parameters 155, 156 numeric 154, 156 saving changes to 158 string entry 155, 156, 157 Y/N (boolean) 154, 156 Parity 219 Passthru Printing 210 Password (ANSI Telnet Settings) 179 Password Echo (ANSI Telnet Settings) 180 Password Prompt (ANSI Telnet Settings) 179 period – ASCII decimal equivalent 200 peripherals, defining connections 217 18-Nov-2004 PIN, Bluetooth Controls 98 pinouts B-1 PINs, Bluetooth devices 100 pins – enabling for printing 201 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Index pivot (viewport) 221 pocket PC compatibility 63 Port (ANSI Telnet Settings) 178 Port (TESS Connection Type) 195 Port (802.IQ v2) 227 port pinouts B-1 Port Prefix, Bluetooth Controls 102 ports ANSI Connection Type 178 Baud 219 Buffer 220 Data Bits 219 Flow Control 219 Input tmo 220 Output tmo 220 parameters 218 Parity 219 Retries 220 serial 203 Serial In/Out 203 settings 217 settings (tether & console port) 217 settings for Tether and console 218 Stop Bits 219 TESS Connection Type 195 Test 220 Tether and Console Port settings 217 port settings (tether & console) 217–220 position of screen 196 power icon, AC 36 Power Management Properties 80 suspend, power saving 81 Power Mgmt 167 power up 8525 15 preferred networks 23 prefix (serial I/O) 204 Prefix Char 118, 121 PREVIOUS key (F2) 134 PREV key (F2) 154, 155 Printer (serial service), Bluetooth 99 printing Binary print parameter 201 pages 144 Printer parameter 201 PrintScreen key 190 procedures, local 201 process, local 145, 201 profile, creating backup 108 profile, restoring backup 111 Programs Command Prompt 53 Internet Explorer 53 Remote Desktop Connection 53 Windows Explorer 53 protocol, 802.IQ v1 162 Protocol Type 163 punctuation marks, accessing (SHIFT Key) 30 Q Q (memory address of first message in receive queue) 152 queue, memory address of first message in receive queue (Q) 152 queue, transmissions waiting in (TxQ) 152 queuing enabling/disabling next message 202 mode 146, 201 pages 146 Queuing parameter 145, 201 response time, improving 146 R ra (received acknowledgements) 151 radio adding new network connection 18 advanced settings of 23 Auto Radio Addr (narrow band radio) 227 Bluetooth 97–102 configuring 15 adding a new network connection 18 Ad Hoc 18 authentication, network 19 Connect button 17 EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) 20 Infrastructure 18 Key Index 20 Key Index, assigning 20 network authentication 19 Network Key 20 18-Nov-2004 Network Key, assigning 20 wireless information 17 wireless properties 18 802.1X authentication 20 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 11 Index Connect button 17 Initial RTT (WaveLAN 802.11 DS SS) 163, 228 IP address, assigning 21 name servers 22 preferred networks, arranging 23 Protocol Type 163 Radio Address (narrow band radio) 228 Radio Address (WaveLAN 802.11 DS SS) 162 signal quality 36 statistics screen 802.IQ 150 wireless connection, setting up 15 802.IQ statistics screen 150 Radio Addr Auto Radio Addr (narrow band radio) 227 Radio Address 162, 228 narrow band radio 228 WaveLAN 802.11 DS SS 162 802.IQ v1 162 radio address, automatic (802.IQ v1) 162 radio specifications 245 radio statistics screen 802.IQ 150 rb (received beacons) 151 recalibrating (touchscreen) 32, 83 received acknowledgements 151 received beacons (rb) 151 received messages (rm) 151 receive LED 34 Remap Underline To 215 Remote Desktop Connection 53 remote desktop connection 63 Repeat Delay (between key repeats) 71 Repeat Rate (of key repeats) 71 Repeat tab (key repeat settings) 71 Replace mode 140 “replace” mode 208 reprinting a page 144 “RESET: Press Enter” message 137 resetting default parameter values 159 TESS session 144 8525 memory 159 resetting the 8525 24 12 response time, improving with queuing mode 146 retransmissions (802.IQv1 xr) See xr (retransmissions) 152 Retries 220 reverse video attribute 183, 207 Rjct if Alpha 206 rm (received messages) 151 round trip time (rt) 152 rows number of in ANSI screen 182 number of in TESS screen 196 rt (round trip time) 152 Run (Start Menu) 57 S safeguards 233 safety instructions general X scanner 37 safety warning, scanner 37 SATM 187 SAVE key (F4) 134 Save on Reset 201 Scan Bad 114 Scan Good 114 Scan Indicator 114 Scan Log File 114 scanner aiming (target) dot duration 115 Append Enter 205 Append F0 205 appending data 115 bar code, appending data to 115 Click Data (appending data) 115 Click Time (double-click) 115 Cont Nxt Fld 205 disabling the scanner 190 Dot Time 115 double-click 115 one dimensional (1D) internal scanner 38 parameters (for TESS Settings) 205 safety warnings 37 Scan Bad 114 18-Nov-2004 Scan Good 114 Scan Log File 114 Scan Result Time 114 target dot duration 115 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Index techniques (scanning) 37 TESS Scanner parameters 205 troubleshooting tips 38 warning message 114 scanning AIAG 206 aiming (target) dot duration 115 Append Enter 205 Append F0 205 appending characters 115, 119, 121 check digit 120, 123, 124, 125 Click Data (appending data) 115 Click Time 115 Cont Nxt Fld 205 country code 120 Dot Time 115 double-click 115 Input (translate) 127 locked 8525 206 number system digit 122, 123 Output (translate) 127 prefix character 118, 121 removing characters 119, 121 Rjct if Alpha 206 safety instructions 37 Scan Bad 114 Scan Good 114 Scan Indicator 114 Scan Log File 114 Scan Result 114 Scan Result Time 114 Scan-See 217 Security 116 Short Code 115 suffix character 119, 121 symbologies 116 target (aiming) dot duration 115 TESS Scanner parameters 205 Verify 116 Scan Result 114 Scan Result Time 114 Scan-See keyboard mapping 226 parameters, setting 221–226 port settings 217 serial number 225 viewport, mapping 221 Scan Tone and Scan Time 166 screen stylus, using to navigate 45 touch pen, using 45 Windows CE, navigating 45 Screen parameters ANSI 181 TESS 196 screens # of Cols (ANSI) 182 # of Cols (TESS) 196 # of Rows (ANSI) 182 # of Rows (TESS) 196 Anchor View 193, 209 Display Shift 169 Field Scroll 196 moving between fields 188, 206 Origin Scroll 196 page size/shape 182, 196 positioning 196 splitting view of 170 Type and View IDs (Split screen) 170 Use Increment 169 x and y origin 193, 209 X-Increment 169 Y-Increment 169 Screen Switch 167 scrolling Field Scroll 196 Origin Scroll 196 Security 116 security level icon 36 Security Settings 51 changing password 52 configuring taskbar 53 level 51 Supervisor 51 Teklogix 51 User 51 security settings 160 default mode 167 Selected Area Transfer Mode (SATM) 187 select host (CTRL h) 144 selecting a host 145 Send Mile 202 Send with FKEY) 209 serial I/O TESS command 203 18-Nov-2004 serial I/O fields 138 Serial In 203 Serial IO Character 211 serial number (Scan-See) 225 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 13 Index Serial Out 203 Serial Port 203 serial port enabling pins for printers 201 I/O fields 203 Serial In 203 Serial Out 203 Serial Port 203 SI CRC 204 SI Fkey 204 SI mode 203 SI prefix/suffix 204 SO CRC 205 SO prefix/suffix 204 Servers, Bluetooth Controls 101 service information 4 Services, Bluetooth Controls 99 session status (sts) 152 Set Mode (SM) control 192 Set PIN, Bluetooth Controls 100 Settings Control Panel 56 Network and Dial-up connections 56 Run 56 Taskbar and Start Menu 56 setting the session number 138 Shared Mode (network authentication) 19 SHIFT Key 30 Short Code 115 Shutdown Bootloader 58 Cold Reset 58 Suspend 58 Warm Reset 58 Shutdown (Start Menu) 57 SI CRC 204 SI Fkey 204 signal quality,radio 36 SI mode 203 SI prefix/suffix 204 size of fields 118 Size/Chars (bar code scanning) 118 Smart echo mode 188 SO CRC 205 softkey function keys 134 softkeys 165 softkeys (Function keys) 134 14 softkey labels, changing (Label F1-F10) 197 softkey labels, changing (Label F1-F5) 183 Softkeys (parameter) 165 SO prefix/suffix 204 sound 165 Sound Ctrl 166 SPACE Key 31 specifications battery 250 for 8525 243 Split Screen dividing and displaying 170 moving the cursor between split screens 171 parameters used 170 toggling between full and split screens 171 Type and View IDs 170 using a Wild Card (asterisk) 172 Split Screen 170 Standard (Code 128) 120 Start (ANSI) 192 Start Menu 50 cycle tasks 55 desktop 50 programs 53 Run 57 Security 51 Settings 56 Shutdown 57 system tray 55 task manager 56 start up menu 153 statistics screen 802.IQ 150 status, displaying continuously 144 status, displaying unit # 144 status area (Tekterm) 137 status message, TESS 143 Stop Bits 219 string entry parameters 155, 156, 157 adding special characters to 157 cycling through special characters 157 key function description 155,18-Nov-2004 156 Strip Leading 119, 121 Strip Trailing 119, 121 sts (session status) 152 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual Index stylus (touch pen), using 45 Stylus Properties 82 Double-tap (stylus sensitivity) 83 sub-menus, accessing 154, 155 suffix serial I/O 204 suffix (serial I/O) 204 Suffix Char 119, 121 Supervisor security level 51 support services 4 Suspend (Shutdown menu) 58 suspending power 81 Suspend State 81 symbologies IATA 2 of 5 126 symbologies, bar code 116 displaying type of bar code 114 System parameters (Tekterm) 163 system tray 55 T tab (CTRL I) 189 tab, vertical (CTRL K) 189 TAB Key 31 Tab stop mode 191 target dot, duration of 115 taskbar onscreen indicators modifier keys 36 power, AC 36 radio signal quality 36 security level 36 using 48 task manager 56 TCP Direct connection 177, 195 Teklogix security level 51 Tekterm 133 Telnet connection 177, 195 Telnet connection (ANSI) 177 terminal Terminal # (ANSI) 177 Terminal # (ANSI) 177 Terminal # (TESS) 194 Terminal (8525) mac, displaying 151 Terminal Type (ANSI Telnet Settings) 178 Term Type 215 TESS 137 # of Cols 196 # of Rows 196 All Fld Video 207 Append Enter 205 Append F0 205 Applications menu 175 BKSP key behaviour 141 Blink (video attrib.) 207 Bold (video attrib.) 207 Colour Override 198 configuration 138 Conn Type (connection type) 195 Cont Nxt Fld 205 CTRL commands 140 cursor movement (in edit modes) 140 DEL key behaviour 142 displaying version number 143 Display menu, using 138 edit modes 140 Enh Edit Mode 208 Enter On Arr 207 Enter To F0 207, 208 Entry Mode 208 Fcursor mode 140 Field mode 140 Field Order 206 Field parameters 206 Host (Connection Type) 195 Ign Bcode_fld 208 Insert mode 140 Kbd Locked 202 keyboard lock 202 matching fields via data stream 199 milestone 202 modes (edit) 140 multiple sessions 175 number of columns in screen 196 number of rows in screen 196 Pages Saved 197 Port 195 query command 197 Replace mode 140 resetting a TESS session 144 Reverse (video attrib.) 207 running multiple sessions 138 selecting a session 138 settings 194–209 18-Nov-2004 status message 143 switching between hosts 201 Terminal # 194 Tests 200 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 15 Index Valid Numerics 208 video attributes 207 802.IQ connection 195 9010t connection 195 TESS Settings character attributes 198 character sets, choosing 198 Connection Type - Telnet & TCP Direct 195 Fields parameters 206 Scanner parameters 205 screen settings 196 Test 220 Tether & Console Port character set 218 peripheral devices 217 scan-see parameters 221 Tether & Console Ports Baud 219 Buffer 220 Data Bits 219 Flow Control 219 Input Tmo 220 Output Tmo 220 Parity 219 Retries 220 Stop Bits 219 Test 220 tethered device connecting and disconnecting 39 timeouts, beacon (bt) 152 tn (host terminal number of session) 152 Total Recall 108 backup profile, creating 108 backup profile, restoring 111 touch pen, using 45 touchscreen recalibration 32, 83 stylus, using 45 touch pen, using 45 Transfer Termination Mode (TTM) 187 transmissions waiting in queue (TxQ) 152 transmit LED 34 transmitted acknowledgements (xa) 151 transmitted initialized messages (xi) 151 transmitted messages (xm) 151 transmitting data 185, 186, 190, 207 “transmit on” entry field 139 trigger, double-click 115 16 troubleshooting tips (scanning) 38 TTM 187 turning 8525 off 15 turning 8525 on 15 TxQ (messages waiting to be sent) 152 typ (data stream type) 152 Type 170 typing in upper case 200 U UCC 128(Code 128) 120 underline ASCII decimal equivalent 200 video attribute 183 Unicode values, entering 158 UPC A 122 UPC E 123 Upper (ANSI Host Char Set) 193 Upper Case 200 USB Setup Application C-1 installing usbstor & wceusbsh inf C-4 launching C-1 updating usbstor & wceusbsh inf C-2 usbstor.inf, installing C-4 usbstor.inf, updating C-2 Use Increment X-Increment 169 Y-Increment 169 Use increment 169 user permissions Exit 168 Font Change 168 Screen Switch 167 User security level 51 V Valid Numerics (TESS) 208 Variations (Code 128) 119 vehicle installation cables 237 Verify 116 Version 225 Version (Scan-See) 225 version number – TESS 143 vertical tab (CTRL K) 189 video attributes 183, 207 All Fld Video 207 Blink 183, 207 Bold 183, 207 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 18-Nov-2004 Index Reverse 183, 207 Underline 183 xr (retransmissions) 152 View IDs 170 viewport, mapping 221 visible fields match 199 V Match Chr 199 volume, adjusting 166 VT220 Function keys – equivalent Psion Teklogix keyboard Function keys 147 W Warm Reset (Shutdown menu) 58 warnings 114 warranty 4 wceusbsh.inf, installing C-4 wceusbsh.inf, updating C-2 WEC (Write Error Code) 214 Wi-Fi Protected Access Pre-Shared Key (network authentication) 19 Wi-Fi Protected Access-WPA (network authentication) 19 Windows® Start Menu See Start Menu 50 Windows CE dialogue box 58 files, folders, & programs, working with 47 Windows CE, navigating in 45 Windows Explorer 53 wireless connection setup 15 Wireless Information Tab 17 Wireless Properties tab 18 worldwide offices 4 WPA (network authentication) 19 WPA-PSK (network authentication) 19 wrap, auto 191 Wraparound 224 Write Error Code (WEC) 214 Y Y/N parameters, enabling and disabling 154, 156 Y-Increment 169 y origin 193, 209 1D internal scanner 38 132-col. font 182 2392 Telnet See Emulation - 2392 Telnet 209 3274 Telnet See Emulation - 3274 Telnet 212 5250 emulation keys 139 5250 Telnet See Emulation - 5250 Telnet 214 7 bit parameter 186 80-col. font 182 802.IQ connection (ANSI) 177 802.IQ connection (TESS) 195 802.IQ v1(protocol) Auto Radio Addr 162 802.IQ v2 227 802.1X authentication, enabling 20 802.11b radio, configuring 15 8525 approvals 244 off-line 145 specifications 243 9010t connection (TESS) 195 X xa (transmitted acknowledgements) 151 xi (transmitted initialize messages) 151 X-Increment 169 xm (transmitted messages) 151 Xmit Count 185 Xmit Enter 190 Xmit key 186 Xmit Modes 184–188 Xmit Wait 185 x origin 193, 209 18-Nov-2004 Psion Teklogix 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual 17 Specification Mississauga, Ontario Canada DESCRIPTION: DOCUMENT MANUFACTURE LABEL 8525 ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION ‘e’ xxxxxxxx VCA Approval No. NOTES: 1. Psion Teklogix logo to be in accordance with company standards. 2. Code 128 barcode contains the product serial number. a) Serial number to be human readable 3. Two Dimensional Datamatrix Barcode (product specific data) 4. Artwork is black on white label stock. 5. See document 1010063 for generation of bar code data. 6. Preferred label fabrication: Ink Ribbon (Advanced Bar Code Solutions p/n Z1A060500) required for printing on Zebra 96XiIII Plus printer (minimum 600 dpi resolution required). ITEM GROUP A00DOC PRODUCT TYPE VK0 EDR/O STATUS APPROVALS DRAWN BY: VESNA VUKOVIC CHKD. BY: DATE: DATE JUL16/04 APPROV'D. BY: OBSOLETE PROD. ENG.: ENGINEERING ONLY PROJ. ENG.: PRE-PILOT MECH. ENG.: BETA ELEC.ENG.: RELEASED Installation Instruction U:\engdata\RELEASE\TEKLOGIX PRODUCTS\DO Blank forms\Blank Forms Word.Doc\InstallationInstruction.doc EDR/EDO NO.: REL. DATE: Mississauga, Ontario TITLE: DOC MFG LABEL SPEC 8525 ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION SIZE DRAWING NO. REV. 1008407 18-Nov-2004B SHEET 1 OF 1 C A D B Special Component Detail 8525/8530 VEHICLE MOUNT COMPUTER Related Reference Designator PCB1 1 MAIN LOGIC BOARD BaaN P/N 1008011 Description Qty PCB 8525 MAIN LOGIC BOARD 1 CON1 9003441 CONNECTOR DOUBLE SLOT CARDBUS EJECTOR REVERSE TYPE 2MM STANDOFF 1 SCR1-SCR4 9002961 SCREW M2 X 20 PAN HEAD 4 SCR5,SCR6 9001802 SCREW M2 X 8 CHEESE PHIL 2 NUT1- NUT6 95257 NUT M2 PCMCIA 6 WRS1-WSR4 9004474 M2 LOCKWASHER. STAINLESS STEEL, FLAT,INTERNAL TOOTH 4 WSR5-WSR8 9004475 WASHER,STAINLESS STEEL,M2,FLAT 4 1 ADH1-ADH4 94751 ADH SILICON RTV WHT RTV162 0.001 ADH5-ADH10 92075 LOCTITE 0.001 LBL1 95565 LABEL 0.25" X 0.25" WHITE 1 LBL2,LBL3 1008087 LABEL BLANK PCA 0.25"X1.0" WHITE MYLAR 0.002" THICK 2 S/W 1 1002024 SOFTWARE 8525 PCON IMAGE 1 S/W 2 1002025 SOFTWARE 8525 BOOST IMAGE 1 S/W 3 1002023 SOFTWARE 8525 CE V4.2 OTT IMAGE 1 SCHEMATIC INDEX Page 2: PXA255 CPU Page 3: SDRAM NAND flash M-SYSTEMS flash DOC1 1008010 DOCUMENT ARTWORK PCB 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD 0 DOC2 1008013 DOCUMENT PCB ASSEMBLY 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD 0 DOC3 1008014 DOCUMENT SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD 0 DOC4 7000530-200 DOCUMENT 8525 MLB PRODUCTION FUNCTIONAL TEST SPECIFICATION 0 DOC5 1010084 DOC SERIAL NUMBER CODING INST 0 Page 4: Address & Data bus switches Page 5: Peripheral Microcontroller (PCON) EEPROM Real Time Clock Battery Monitor PCON Programming I/F PCON Console 2 2 Page 6: Buffer ASIC Page 7: ASIC Support Circuitry CF / PCMCIA Power Swtiches Page 8: CF Card / PCMCIA Interface Page 9: MQ1188 - SDIO/USB Controller MQ 1188 DC-DC Converter Page 10: Spread Spectrum Generator Page 11: LCD Controller Page 12: SDIO Socket Display Transition Board (DTB) Connector Page 13: SMBus Battery Charger Inrush Current Limiter Page 14: 3V3/5V Power Supply 3V3/5V Switched Power 3V3 Standby Regulator CPU Core Supply Page 15 : Supercap Charger Analog Mux Supply 5V Standby Regulator 3 3 Page 16: Tether Port RS-232 Transceiver I2C DEVICE MAPPING Page 17: USB Hub Port Extender Interface DEVICE Page 18: COM2 RS-232 port Console RS-232 Port Page 19: Battery interface Beeper Driver External Supply Inrush Limiter Page 20: Internal Keyboard interface External Keyboard interface Page 21: Audio header J-Tag Interface 8-BIT ADDRESS 7-BIT ADDRESS REAL TIME CLOCK - RV5C386A 32H 64H TEMPERATURE A/D - PCF8591T 48H 90H PCON - M30624FGPGP-D5 08H 10H MLB EEPROM - M24C01WDW6T 53H A6H DTB EEPROM - M24C01WDW6T 52H A4H BATTERY PACK EEPROM - M24C01WDW6T 50H A0H BATTERY PACK CONTROLLER - BQ2060 0BH 16H KEYBOARD CONTROLLER 33H 66H Page 22: Heater 4 4 18-Nov-2004 AUG 12, 2004 SIGNATURES DRAWN DATE AUG 4 NGT TEAM PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2004 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. DOC SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD 38481 ECO No.: OTHER Scale N/A B C DRAWING NO. D REV 1008014 C E2 REL. DATE A SIZE INTERIM REV E SHEET OF 1 22 C A FL4 98136 BLM21A102S? 200MA TP23 CPU_PLL_VCC C182 97871 100N ±15% 16V D A[25:0] A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 1 A21 2 A22 2 1 A23 C134 94054 1U0 ±10% 16V 1 A24 2 A25 1 C183 97871 100N ±15% 16V CORE_VDD 1 CORE_VDD 2 1 2 C180 97871 100N ±15% 16V C179 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C178 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C177 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 1 1 3V3 L6 K10 K8 H10 L9 J7 G9 G7 F11 G1 H2 H1 H6 J6 J5 J3 J1 K1 K2 K5 K6 L1 L3 M1 M3 N3 P1 R1 P2 R3 T4 R5 P5 P4 1 NAND_FLASH_BUS 3V3 TP25 1 CLK_PXA_EXTAL K16 K15 C15 97365 12P 5% 50V 2 F13 G13 BOOT_SEL0 D D G16 D J13 2 ~SA2_RESET 1 TP24 1 TP28 K11 L11 COREVDD_EN K12 ~BATT_FAULT 1 R305 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% ~VDD_FAULT K13 VCC_L6 VCC_K10 VCC_K8 VCC_H10 VCC_L9 VCC_J7 VCC_G9 VCC_G7 VCC_F11 MA0 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MA5 MA6 MA7 MA8 MA9 MA10 MA11 MA12 MA13 MA14 MA15 MA16 MA17 MA18 MA19 MA20 MA21 L_DD8_GP66 TXTAL L_DD7_GP65 BOOT_SEL2 BOOT_SEL1 BOOT_SEL0 ~RESET ~RESET_OUT PWR_EN L7 B2 ~SDCS3 2 R205 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 R210 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% ~SDCS2 ~SDRAS R171 97232 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W DQM1 B1 DQM0 M8 1 1 2 2 1 R145 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 2 DQM2 R149 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% ~SDCS1 ~SDCS3 ~SDCS0 ~SDCAS SDRAM_CTL ±1% TP37 1 SDCKE1 R173 R172 97232 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W 0.063W 22R1 97232 1 F2 ~SDCS2 G3 ~SDCS1 G6 ~SDCS0 F1 E1 F3 2 E3 SDCLK2 ~LCD_CS3 E4 R131 ±1% SDCLK1 R174 0.063W 22R1 97232 1 97232 D1 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W F5 2 1 TP13 D2 TP150 R13 T9 ~LCD_CS3 3V3 ~MQ1188_CS2 P9 ~FLASH_CS1 T8 N8 EXT_SCNR_ENA E5 EXT_SCNR_ACK EXT_SCAN ~ASIC_ACK COM2_EN ~COM2_AUTO_ONLINE S2_CARD_ERROR ~MQ1188_PWRDN E7 L_DD0_GP58 ~VDD_FAULT ~SS_CLK_PWR_EN E8 L_LCLK_GP75 DQM3 L_PCLK_GP76 DQM2 L_BIAS_GP77 PC_IN D8 ~PCM_PCD B8 ~PCM_STSCHG A8 PCM_PRDY C9 ACLINK_BITCLK E10 ACLINK_SDATAIN DQM1 AC_LINK DQM0 BITCLK_GP28 ~SDCS3 ~SDCS2 ~SDCS1 PXA255 ~SDCS0 ~SDRAS GDPXA255A0E400 ~SDCAS SDATA_IN0_GP29 A16 SDATA_IN1_GP32 A10 SDATA_OUT_GP30 2 R101 97232 1 2 D10 ~ACRESET 22R1 ±1% 0.063W 1 SSPSFRM_GP24 SDCLK1 SDCLK0 ±1% 0.063W 22R1 2 1 R95 ~ACLINK_RESETB TP211 SSPTXD_GP25 SSPRXD_GP26 TP605 TP604 1 ±1% 0.063W 1 22R1 2 SSPSCLK E9 SSPSFRM D9 SSPTXD A9 SSPRXD R177 ACLINK_SYNC 97232 1 F9 SSPSCLK_GP23 SDCKE0 SDCLK2 ACLINK_SDATAOUT E11 SYNC_GP31 SDCKE1 TP602 1 SSP_BUS 97232 B9 CAS_LATENCY ~CS5_GP33 COM1_BUS ~CS4_GP80 BTRXD_GP42 ~CS3_GP79 ~CS2_GP78 2 R206 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% A6 D7 L_DD1_GP59 Bluetooth UART T13 ~SS_PWR_DWN ~EXT_SCNR_TRIG ~BATT_FAULT SSPEXTCLK_GP27 1 EN_COM2_PWR C5 C7 L_DD2_GP60 MEM_CTL ~ASIC_CS5 ~MOTION_DETECT B7 L_DD3_GP61 AC97 CONTROLLER DQM3 3V3 CF_PRDY E6 L_DD4_GP62 SSP PINS 3V3 ~CF_STSCHG A3 D6 L_DD5_GP63 L_FCLK_GP74 3V3 A2 A5 L_DD6_GP64 D 3V3 ~CF_PCD D5 L_DD10_GP68 PXTAL TEXTAL ~NAND_CHIP_ENABLE C3 A4 L_DD11_GP69 PEXTAL L_DD9_GP67 L15 1 MA22 L_DD12_GP70 4 C14 97365 12P 5% 50V 2 MA23 L_DD14_GP72 L_DD13_GP71 CORE VDD L16 1 CF_IN B3 L_DD15_GP73 1 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W 1 1 X4 FSR327 9001596 97232 PLL_VSS LCD CONTROLLER PINS R176 TP38 PLL_VCC TP26 1 TP39 J16 1 1 D J15 MA24 2 R203 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 R204 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% MA25 2 3 ~CS1_GP15 ~CS0 BTTXD_GP43 B13 COM1_RXD D13 COM1_TXD A15 BTCTS_GP44 B14 BTRTS_GP45 ~COM1_CTS ~COM1_RTS 1 BEEPER D3 SSP_BUS MRDY C1 ~OE PWM1_GP17 ~WE REQUEST_SSP_XFER N14 PWM0_GP16 N12 M12 NAND_CMD_LATCH_ENABLE N15 DREQ1_GP19 DREQ0_GP20 GP12_32KHZ_OUT GP11_3M6864_OUT GP22 ~COM2_CTS A14 ~COM2_DCD A12 ~COM2_DSR B11 3V3 B10 2 C78 9003429 10U +80%/-20% 16V ~COM2_RTS F8 GP7_48MHZ_OUT FFCTS_GP35 FFDCD_GP36 FFDSR_GP37 FFRI_GP38 FFDTR_GP40 FFRTS_GP41 B15 C15 IRRXD_GP46 IRTXD_GP47 B6 ~NAND_WRITE_PROTECT A7 PXA_3M6864_OUT R178 97232 CLK_48MHZ 1 R175 97232 1 2 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W CLK_3M6864 TP20 22R1 ±1% 0.063W 1 F14 ~ASIC_REQ TP2 3 G15 1 H14 GP6_MMCCLK J11 GP5 ~3V3_PWR_OFF TP5 R186 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% VCCQ = POSITIVE SUPPLY FAR ALL I/O EXCEPT MEMORY BUS AND PCMCIA K14 L13 L12 GP1 DVDD_3V3;C6,C10,C13,E14,G14,D15,M11 ~RTC_IRQB J12 GP4 GP2 L10 GP0 ~TP_IRQ ~MQ1188_IRQ R363 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% ~TP_IRQ FIQ TP27 ~PCON_IRQ VCCN = POSITIVE SUPPLY FOR MEMORY BUS AND PCMCIA VCCN NAND_FLASH_BUS F12 GP3 VCCQ: CONSOLE_RXD_SW SA2_TXD MBGNT 1 1 TOUCH_BUS DVDD_3V3;A1,D4,F4,K4,M4,M14,H4,N5,N7,N9,N11,N13,P3,T16,T2 ~PSKTSEL_GP54 P16 PSKTSEL 2 LOW_ENERGY_LATCH M13 ~PREG P14 ~PCE1 R16 ~PCE2 T15 ~PIOR R15 ~PIOW P13 ~POE TP29 IRQ_BUS B12 TP22 USB_N VSS = CORE GROUND VSS: 3V3 DGND;C16,J8,J9,H8,H9,T1 R212 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TDI H15 TDO_CPU H16 TMS H13 ~TRST H11 VSSQ: TDI TDO TMS DGND;C11,C14,F6,G8,G10,C4,C8,J10,J14,L14,H7,K7,K9,F15,F16,D16,E15,E16 VSSN = GROUND SUPLLY FOR MEMORY BUS AND PCMCIA VSSN: MD0 MD1 MD2 MD3 MD4 MD5 MD6 MD7 MD8 MD9 MD10 MD11 MD12 MD13 MD14 MD15 MD16 MD17 MD18 MD19 MD20 MD21 MD22 MD23 MD24 MD25 MD26 MD27 MD28 2 2 2 2 C275 97372 10N ±5% 16V 2A 1B 1A 5 I2C_SDA 2 I2C_SCL 1 3A 2B TP18 D 13 D R125 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 10 4 1 1 R207 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% R208 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TP35 D 18-Nov-2004 AUG 4 2004 SIGNATURES DRAWN D AUG 4 PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO I2C_BUS_SW APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD PXA255 PROCESSOR 38481 D C SIZE DRAWING NO. C INTERIM REV REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 2 REL. DATE B DATE NGT TEAM ECO No.: A 4 ~SA2_RESET 2 7 1 1 TP36 D CONSOLE_RXD 9 GND I2C_SCL_SW 1 3B OE1 1 C166 97871 100N ±15% 16V I2C_BUS 4A OE2 I2C_SDA_SW 1 4B 12 D[31:0] 1 C165 97871 100N ±15% 16V 6 3 TP32 D 14 VCC 11 OE3 2 1 1 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D31 R215 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 C164 97871 100N ±15% 16V ~IOIS16 PCON_CONSOLE 1 2 1 ~PWAIT M16 TP31 1 2 C163 97871 100N ±15% 16V N16 TP33 OE4 TP17 1 U29 9001597 SN74CBTLV3126DGVR ~PWE 8 1 D C162 97871 100N ±15% 16V T14 ~IOIS16_GP57 A11 D11 N4 M5 L5 T6 N6 T7 M6 M7 M9 T10 R9 T11 P11 N10 T12 H3 M10 H5 J4 K3 L4 M2 N1 T3 P6 P7 R7 L8 P8 P10 P12 R11 D 3V3 1 2 ~PWAIT_GP56 I2C Controller C184 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 PCM_IN 2 4 MD29 MD31 TESTCLK D25 2 ~POE_GP48 JTAG_BUS D26 2 C276 97372 10N ±5% 16V D27 2 1 1 D28 2 1 C174 97871 100N ±15% 16V ~PIOW_GP51 ~PWE_GP49 TEST TCK 2 1 C173 97871 100N ±15% 16V G11 D29 1 C172 97871 100N ±15% 16V D D30 C171 97871 100N ±15% 16V D ~PIOR_GP50 MMC Controller MD30 ~TRST 3V3 3V3_STANDBY ~PCE2_GP53 DGND;E2,G2,C2,J2,M15,P15,R2,R4,R6,R8,R10,R12,L2,N2,R14 ~TRST D G12 ~PCE1_GP52 TP30 SDA 1 R213 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% SCL 2 R613 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% MMCDAT 2 C285 97372 10N ±5% 16V B16 1 MMCCMD 2 C170 97871 100N ±15% 16V D14 1 VSSQ = GROUND SUPLLY FOR ALL I/O EXCEPT MEMORY BUS AND PCMCIA TCK JTAG 2 C169 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 1 H12 1 2 C168 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 1 C167 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 TCK ~PREG_GP55 1 3V3 USB_P USB Client C12 D PCMCIA/CF CONTROL PINS 1 2 1 F10 GP8_MMCCS0 FFTXD_GP39 IrDA 2 C77 9003429 10U +80%/-20% 16V ~COM2_DTR FFRXD_GP34 B5 2 E13 MBREQ 1 COM2_TXD B4 F7 GP10_RTCCLK GP21 GPIO PINS A13 2 D GP13_MBGNT FULL FUNCTION UART COM2_RXD COM2 BEEPER_SIGNAL 1 GP9_MMCCS1 3 E12 R209 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TP19 MB_REQ RDY_GP18 DMA NAND_READY_BUSY NAND_ADDR_LATCH_ENABLE BEEPER_VOLUME RD_~WR GP14_MBREQ NAND_FLASH_BUS D12 1 G4 1 G5 ~MWE 1 ~MOE PWM MRDY 1 2 CLK_3M6864_CORE 4 C76 9003429 10U +80%/-20% 16V PXA255 C175 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 D U1 9003333 TP16 T5 U20 5 NC7SP08P5X 9001584 3MHZ6864 1 C176 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 D 2 D 2 C181 97871 100N ±15% 16V CORE_VDD 1 1 D B D 22 C A D B 3V3 SDRAM_CTL ~SDCS0 MEM_CTL DQ13 CLK DQ12 DQ11 CKE DQM1 1 F8 ~SDCAS F7 ~RAS DQ9 ~CAS DQ8 DQM0 TP50 DQM3 F1 DQM2 E8 UDQM DQ6 LDQM DQ5 DQ4 G7 A23 G8 A24 BA0 DQ3 BA1 DQ2 2 G1 A21 G2 A20 H9 A19 G3 A18 H1 A17 H2 A16 H3 A15 J2 A14 J3 G9 B2 D29 ~MWE F9 C1 D28 SDCLK1 F2 C2 D27 D1 D26 D2 D25 ~SDRAS F8 E1 D24 ~SDCAS F7 SDCKE1 A13 J7 A12 J8 A11 H8 A10 H7 VDD_A9 VDD_E7 A8 VDD_J9 A7 VDDQ_A7 A6 VDDQ_B3 A5 VDDQ_C7 A4 VDDQ_D3 VSS_A1 A1 VSS_E3 A0 VSS_J1 D22 DQM1 F1 D9 D21 DQM0 E8 C8 D20 ~WE DQ13 CLK DQ12 DQ11 CKE ~RAS DQ9 ~CAS DQ8 C9 D19 UDQM DQ6 LDQM DQ5 DQ4 D18 B9 D17 A8 D16 G7 A23 G8 A24 C360 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 C361 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 C362 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 G1 A21 G2 A20 H9 A19 G3 A18 H1 A17 H2 B3 A16 H3 C7 A15 J2 A14 J3 2 2 E7 J9 D A7 3V3 D3 1 A1 2 C363 97871 100N ±15% 16V C364 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C373 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C365 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 2 E3 J1 A3 BA0 DQ3 BA1 DQ2 DQ1 A22 A9 VSSQ_A3 A13 J7 A12 J8 A11 H8 A10 H7 DQ0 A12 B1 D14 TP42 MEM_CTL B2 D13 C1 D12 C2 D11 D1 D10 D2 D9 E1 D8 ~FLASH_CS1 CAS_LATENCY 2 U33 98139 NC7S32M5X ~MOE ~NAND_RE 2 1 1 NAND_ADDR_LATCH_ENABLE A2 ~NAND_CHIP_ENABLE A4 ~NAND_RE B2 ~NAND_WE A5 ~NAND_WRITE_PROTECT 3 A1 NAND_READY_BUSY A6 A10_AP VDD_A9 A9 VDD_E7 A8 VDD_J9 A7 VDDQ_A7 A6 VDDQ_B3 A5 VDDQ_C7 A4 VDDQ_D3 VSS_A1 A1 VSS_E3 A0 VSS_J1 D VSSQ_A3 VSSQ_B7 VSSQ_C3 VSSQ_D7 A[25:0] IO15 ALE IO14 ~CE IO13 ~RE IO12 ~WE IO11 ~WP IO10 R_~B IO9 IO8 D IO7 D7 CAS_LATENCY : Hi-CAS latency 3, low - CAS latency 2 D8 D6 D9 D5 C8 D4 C9 D3 3V3 3V3 B8 D1 A8 D0 1 C370 97871 100N ±15% 16V C371 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 2 IO5 IO4 3V3 F6 D 5 1 ~NAND_WE 4 ~PWE G4 TP44 1 C372 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 R217 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% C196 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 U34 98139 NC7S32M5X TP41 D2 B9 IO6 1 D 2 PCM_IN 2 C340 97372 10N ±5% 16V C187 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C186 97871 100N ±15% 16V A3 H1 3 E7 VCCQ VCC IO3 IO2 IO1 A9 G6 D15 F5 D14 H5 D13 F4 D12 H3 D11 F3 D10 G2 D9 F1 D8 E5 D7 G5 D6 E4 D5 H4 D4 G3 D3 H2 D2 F2 VSS1 IO0 D1 G1 D0 1 TP1151 VSS2 VSS3 LOCKPRE E6 D J9 D ±1% 0.063W 10K0 97296 R617 D A7 3V3 B3 C7 D D3 1 A3 A2 CLE D Overlap resistor footprints E9 2 1 1 4 R150 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% B3 NAND_CMD_LATCH_ENABLE TP43 D 5 1 1 R153 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TP40 H6 D7 VSSQ_D7 D15 2 C3 VSSQ_C3 A2 A11 B7 VSSQ_B7 A[25:0] DQ14 DQ7 A3 A2 ~CS0 D23 2 A9 DQ15 DQ10 A11 A10_AP F3 D8 B8 DQ0 A12 ~SDCS0 ~CS1 3V3 DQ1 A22 D30 E9 DQ7 1 B1 MEM_CTL DQ10 ~SDRAS E2 TP49 1 F3 ~WE ~SDCS1 TP48 1 F9 F2 DQ14 D31 TP47 2 ~MWE SDCLK1 ~CS0 A2 TP46 2 G9 DQ15 1 ~SDCS0 ~CS1 1 E2 C195 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 ~SDCS1 SDCKE1 TP51 TP45 1 DQM2 1 U46 9003330 K9F5616U0C-DIB0? 3V3 3V3 1 U30 SEE SCD 1008211 1008211 D[31:0] 1 NAND_FLASH_BUS D[31:0] U40 SEE SCD 1008211 1008211 DQM3 1 1 TP52 D[31:0] SDCKE1 2 TP15 ~SDCS1 1 1 1 1 TP12 2 1 TP10 1 TP9 1 R216 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 A1 C366 97871 100N ±15% 16V C367 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C368 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C369 97372 10N ±5% 16V NAND_FLASH 1 E3 J1 2 A3 D B7 M-SYSTEM DISK ON CHIP C3 D7 U4 MD3831-D32-V3-X 9001557 3V3 DRAM_1 D5 ~SA2_RESET DRAM_2 E8 MEM_CTL E4 ~FLASH_CS1 SDRAM_CTL ~SDCS1 H2 ~MOE ~SDCS1 H3 ~PWE C6 PCM_IN ~SDCS2 E5 ~SDCS2 A[25:0] POPULATE R582 IF 4 32Mx16 DRAMS ARE USED TP96 ~SDCS3 E2 G9 MEM_CTL F9 SDCLK1 F2 SDCKE1 F3 ~CS0 DQ14 ~WE DQ13 CLK DQ12 CKE DQ11 DQ10 ~SDRAS F8 ~SDCAS F7 ~RAS DQ9 ~CAS DQ8 DQ7 F1 DQM3 E8 DQM2 UDQM DQ6 LDQM DQ5 DQ4 A23 G7 A24 G8 BA0 BA1 DQ3 DQ2 DQ1 A22 G1 A21 G2 A20 H9 A19 G3 A18 H1 A17 H2 A16 H3 A15 J2 A14 J3 A13 J7 A12 J8 A11 H8 A10 H7 A12 DQ0 A2 D31 B1 D30 B2 D29 ~MWE F9 C1 D28 SDCLK1 F2 C2 D27 SDCKE1 F3 D1 D26 D2 D25 ~SDRAS F8 E1 D24 ~SDCAS F7 E9 D23 A9 VDD_E7 A8 VDD_J9 A7 VDDQ_A7 A6 VDDQ_B3 A5 A4 VDDQ_C7 VDDQ_D3 VSS_A1 A1 VSS_E3 A0 VSS_J1 VSSQ_B7 ~CS1 DQ15 ~CS0 DQ14 ~WE CLK DQ12 CKE DQ11 ~RAS DQ9 ~CAS DQ8 DQ7 D8 D22 D9 D21 C8 D20 C9 D19 A23 G7 B8 D18 A24 G8 B9 D17 DQM1 F1 DQM0 E8 UDQM DQ6 LDQM DQ5 DQ4 3V3 C200 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 A8 D16 C201 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C202 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 2 A22 G1 A21 G2 A20 H9 E7 A19 G3 A18 H1 A17 H2 J9 D A7 3V3 B3 A16 H3 C7 A15 J2 A14 J3 D3 1 C185 97871 100N ±15% 16V C188 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 1 C189 97871 100N ±15% 16V C190 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 A13 J7 A12 J8 E3 A11 H8 J1 A10 H7 A3 2 2 2 2 BA0 BA1 DQ3 DQ2 DQ1 A9 A1 DQ13 DQ10 A3 A2 E2 G9 2 VDD_A9 VSSQ_A3 D A12 DQ0 A10 F7 A9 E7 A8 C7 A7 C3 A6 D3 A5 E3 A2 D15 A4 F3 B1 D14 A3 D2 B2 D13 A2 E2 C1 D12 A1 F2 C2 D11 D1 D10 D2 D9 E1 D8 E9 D7 G2 VSSG3 ~OE VSSJ9 2 ~BUSY A12 C40 97871 100N C41 97871 100N 1 2 J9 D ~WE D15 D13 A11 D12 A10 D11 A9 D10 A8 D9 G9 F8 D D8 D6 D9 D5 C8 D4 C9 D3 B8 D2 B9 D1 A10_AP A9 VDD_E7 A8 VDD_J9 A7 VDDQ_A7 A6 VDDQ_B3 A5 A4 VDDQ_C7 VDDQ_D3 VSS_A1 A1 VSS_E3 A0 VSS_J1 D0 VSSQ_B7 C197 97871 100N ±15% 16V C198 97871 1 100N ±15% 2 16V 1 2 C199 97372 10N ±5% 16V A2 A3 A8 A9 A9 E7 A10 J9 B1 D B2 A7 3V3 B3 B3 C7 B4 D3 1 2 C191 97871 100N ±15% 16V C192 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C193 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C194 97372 10N ±5% 16V B5 B6 B7 E3 B8 J1 B9 A3 D6 A4 D5 A3 D4 A2 D3 A1 D2 A0 D1 H8 D15 K8 D14 H7 D13 J7 D12 K5 D11 J4 D10 B10 D B7 C1 C3 C2 H4 D9 K3 D8 J8 D7 G7 D6 K7 D5 H6 D4 H5 D3 K4 D2 G4 D1 J3 D0 3 ID1 ID0 NC_F1 IF_CFG NC_F6 V_CFG NC_G1 NC_G5 A1 1 A1 A5 NC_F10 E6 A3 A2 D7 NC_F5 F4 2 VDD_A9 D8 A6 3V3 3V3 A8 A7 D0 A11 VSSQ_A3 B7 C8 1 G3 NC_A1 NC_G6 NC_A2 NC_G10 NC_A3 NC_L1 NC_A8 NC_L2 NC_A9 NC_L3 NC_A10 NC_L4 NC_B1 NC_L5 NC_B2 NC_L6 NC_B3 NC_L7 NC_B4 NC_L8 NC_B5 NC_L9 NC_B6 NC_L10 NC_B7 NC_M1 NC_B8 NC_M2 NC_B9 NC_M3 NC_B10 NC_M8 NC_C1 NC_M9 NC_C2 NC_M10 F1 D[31:0] F5 F6 F10 G1 G5 G6 G10 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 M1 M2 M3 M8 3V3 M9 2 A[25:0] ~SDCS3 A11 A10_AP U26 SEE SCD 1008211 1008211 MEM_CTL D8 A11 J6 VSSQ_C3 VSSQ_D7 C3 VSSQ_C3 D7 A[25:0] 4 VSSQ_D7 C4 C5 D4 SDRAM MEMORY CONFIGURATON TABLE DRAM_3 CONFIGURATON 4 - 16Mx16 2 - 32Mx16 4 - 32Mx16 POPULATE U40,U30, U25,U26,R583,R585 U40,U30 U40,U30, U25,U26,R582,R584 DO NOT POPULATE M10 D7 D6 DRAM_4 D7 D9 R582,R584 RSV_C4 RSV_E9 RSV_C5 RSV1_F9 RSV_D4 RSV_G8 RSV_D6 RSV_H9 RSV_D7 RSV_J2 RSV_D9 RSV_K6 E9 R35 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 3 ~MWE DQ15 ~CE D14 A12 D[31:0] D[31:0] ~CS1 VCCQ J5 ~BHE D POPULATE R584 IF 4 32Mx16 DRAMS ARE USED TP89 U25 SEE SCD 1008211 1008211 ~LOCK VCC 1 POPULATE R585 IF 4 16MX16 DRAMS ARE USED R584 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 2 2 R585 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 1 2 R582 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 1 POPULATE R583 IF 4 16MX16 DRAMS ARE USED 1 1 R583 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 2 ~SDCS3 TP7 ~RST_IN 4 F9 18-Nov-2004 G8 AUG 4 2004 H9 SIGNATURES DRAWN J2 AUG 4 PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD R582,R583 R584,R585 U25,U26 R583,R585 MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A SCHEMATIC 8525/8530 MAIN LOGIC BOARD MEMORY 38481 ECO No.: B C SIZE DRAWING NO. C INTERIM REV REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 3 REL. DATE A DATE NGT TEAM K6 D 22 C A D B 1 TP135 1 1 D[31:0] QS32XL384Q1 95191 U80 BD[31:0] D0 3 D1 4 D2 7 D3 8 D4 11 A0 3V3 1 C18 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 R65 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 2 1 2 U9 5 NC7SP08P5X 9001584 1 ~ASIC_CS5 3 C467 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 U50 NC7SZ11P5X 9002958 5 15 D6 16 D7 D D8 20 D9 23 2 6 3 D D 2 D10 26 D11 29 D12 30 D13 33 D14 35 C43 97871 100N ±15% 16V 25 D U28 NC7SZ11P5X 9002958 5 ~MQ1188_CS2 1 ~PCE1 3 ~PCE2 6 19 13 3V3 2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 BD1 6 BD2 9 BD3 10 BD4 A5 B5 A6 B6 14 BD5 17 BD6 18 A7 B7 BD7 21 A8 B8 A9 B9 BD8 22 BD9 27 BD10 28 BD11 31 BD12 32 BD13 34 BD14 1 4 2 1 B1 A2 BD0 5 BEA D5 4 ~LCD_CS3 A1 2 3V3 D MEM_CTL B0 4 D15 38 D16 41 D17 42 D18 45 D19 46 37 2 BUS SWITCHES BEC A10 B10 A11 B11 A12 B12 A13 B13 A14 B14 95191 A15 B15 A16 B16 A17 B17 A18 B18 A19 B19 BEB DGND12 DGND24 VDD48 U79 BA[25:0] BED VDD36 PCM_IN QS32XL384Q1 A[25:0] A0 3 A1 4 A2 7 A3 8 A4 11 39 BD15 40 BD16 43 BD17 44 BD18 47 BD19 A5 15 3V3 A6 16 1 A7 36 48 D 19 A8 20 A9 23 A0 B0 A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 2 BA0 5 BA1 6 BA2 9 BA3 10 BA4 14 BA5 17 BA6 18 BA7 21 BA8 22 BA9 2 BEA A5 B5 A6 B6 A7 B7 A8 A9 B8 B9 95191 QS32XL384Q1 13 U81 BEC 3V3 C468 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 D TP137 3 D21 4 D22 7 D23 8 D24 11 A0 B0 A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 A4 2 BD20 5 BD21 6 BD22 9 BD23 10 BD24 B3 B4 A10 26 A11 29 A12 30 A13 33 A14 35 A10 B10 A11 B11 A12 B12 A13 B13 A14 B14 27 BA10 28 BA11 31 BA12 32 BA13 34 BA14 1 U5 5 NC7SP08P5X 9001584 D20 1 4 1 2 3 D25 15 D26 16 D27 19 D28 20 D29 23 D 3 13 25 BEA A5 B5 A6 B6 A7 B7 A8 B8 A9 B9 14 BD25 17 BD26 18 BD27 21 BD28 22 BD29 A15 38 A16 41 A17 42 A18 45 A19 46 BED A15 B15 A16 B16 A17 B17 A18 A19 B18 B19 26 D31 29 30 33 A20 35 25 A21 38 A22 41 A23 42 A24 45 A25 46 BA15 40 BA16 43 BA17 44 BA18 47 BA19 3V3 37 BEC BEB VDD36 D30 39 A10 B10 A11 B11 A12 B12 A13 B13 A14 B14 27 BD30 28 BD31 DGND12 DGND24 VDD48 3 36 48 31 32 34 BA20 39 BA21 40 BA22 43 BA23 44 BA24 47 BA25 BED A15 B15 A16 B16 A17 B17 A18 B18 A19 B19 3V3 A[25:0] 37 BEB VDD36 DGND12 DGND24 VDD48 36 BA[25:0] 48 4 4 18-Nov-2004 AUG 4 2004 SIGNATURES DRAWN DATE AUG 4 NGT TEAM PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A SCHEMATIC 8525/8530 MAIN LOGIC BOARD ADDRESS & DATA BUS SWITCHES 38481 ECO No.: B C DRAWING NO. C REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 4 REL. DATE A SIZE INTERIM REV D 22 C A D B 3V3_STANDBY 2 R231 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W PCON SERIAL_PROG 1 1 TP67 ~RST_PCON PROGRAM_PCON TP90 ~CE_PROG I2C ACCELERATOR 1 3V3_STANDBY SCLK_PROG 68 ~RST_ASIC 67 FPGA_CFG P21_A1 P23_A3 66 P24_A4 65 ~RTC_IRQB 64 63 ~CCFL_EN P25_A5 P81_TA4IN P26_A6 P82_~INT0 P27_A7 JTAG_BUS 3V3_STANDBY 61 TDO_CPU P30_A8 3V3_STANDBY 58 P31_A9 ~TRST 57 TDI 56 P32_A10 P33_A11 ~PCON_IRQ 52 COM3_1_EN TETHER_SEL_1 P43_A19 48 P44_~CS0 47 CONVERTER_ENABLE ~HEATER_INSTALLED 46 45 96 98136 BLM21A102S? 200MA 1 97 TP71 AVCC 2 C212 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 2 2 GND 1 2 C415 97372 10N ±5% 16V U41 9000515 NC7SZ125P5X C214 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 3 D R233 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TP66 FSR327 9001596 4 C17 97365 12P ±5% 50V 2 D 1 C16 97365 12P ±5% 50V X5 1 2 U15 RV5C386A 98184 1 VDD 9 TP147 EL_COMMAND 2 ANALOG_CCFL_DIM 1 3V3_STANDBY VTERM_DAC 100 CHARGE_EN 99 ACPRES 98 R163 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W D 8 OSCOUT ~ACSEL R134 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W R587 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% ENABLE_32KHZ OPTION SELECT SDA 1 SCL 7 R47 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% D 2 1 1 R230 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 10 OSCIN 2 D 3V3_STANDBY EXT_SCNR_DATA 3V3 D 1 3 I2C_SDA 2 I2C_SCL CLKC ~INTRA 5 VSS ~INTRB 6 4 I2C_BUS ~RTC_IRQB D D D 95 P100_AN0 P101_AN1 P46_~CS2 P102_AN2 93 P103_AN3 P104_AN4_~KI0 P105_AN5_~KI1 P106_AN6_~KI2 TETHER_ID 92 AUX_ID 91 LCD_TYPE 3V3_STANDBY 90 OPTIONS_A_D 89 BATTERY_VOLTAGE 88 BAT_SET 1 2 C1125 97871 100N ±15% 16V R127 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% J9 9002925 1 87 P107_AN7_~KI3 SIGNAL=DGND;12,62 IRQ_BUS LCD_THERM 3 POWER SWITCH 2 PCON_AVSS D 1 TP867 C209 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 D 3 53261-0290 MOLEX D USE 128K FLASH PART WITH ASIC USE 256K FLASH PART WITH FPGA 1 2 RTC_SUPPLY 1 PCON_AVSS TP77 R392 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 1 1 1 4 EXT_SCAN CMP 2 C135 94054 1U0 ±10% 16V 1 FL5 ~POWER_ON 32KHZ 3V3_STANDBY TP86 P94_DA1_TB4IN P45_~CS1 AVSS EXT_SCNR_SOS 16 R227 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% COREVDD_EN 0.063W ±1% 10K0 97296 R228 4 P95_ANEX0_CLK4 AVCC 94 2 17 5 P97_~ADTRG_SIN4 VREF 1 3V3_STANDBY 18 ~NMI CORE_EN 2 5 VCC 22R1 ±1% 0.063W 2 1 ENABLE_32KHZ TP72 3V3_STANDBY 3MHZ6864 8 P96_ANEX1_SOUT4 P47_~CS3 DISPLAY_CFG 3 P93_DA0_TB3IN P42_A18 49 GND_TETHER_POWER P92_TB2IN_SOUT3 P37_A15 I/O PORT P4 50 TETHER_SEL_0 P36_A14 P41_A17 ~TP_IRQ 2 9 P91_TB1IN_SIN3 TP103 EEPROM 32KOUT P40_A16 51 2 15 P90_TB0IN_CLK3 I/O PORT P9 53 IRQ_BUS 97232 1 1 P87_XCIN P35_A13 54 1 19 P85_~NMI P34_A12 55 ~BATT_FAULT R179 20 P86_XCOUT I/O PORT P10 2 59 TCK 1 1 TMS 1 TP56 R46 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% I/O PORT P3 2 R190 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% R156 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 3V3_STANDBY 21 P84_~INT2 D TP102 3V3_STANDBY TP68 PWR_SYNC_CLK P83_~INT1 4 LOW_ENERGY 22 P77_TA3IN 3 LOW_ENERGY_LATCH 23 P80_TA4OUT VSS ±1% 0.063W 1K00 97272 R318 24 P75_TA2IN SDA 2 PCON_CONSOLE_TXD 25 P76_TA3OUT P22_A2 1 TP80 26 P74_TA2OUT I/O PORT P2 CFG_DATA P73_~CTS2_~RTS2_TA1IN P20_A0 69 CFG_CLK P72_CLK2_TA1OUT P17_D15_~INT5 I2C_SCL E2 2 70 ~PROGRAM 2 P16_D14_~INT4 I2C_SDA 27 E1 SCL 1 71 ~KBD_IRQ SCLK_PROG 28 ~WC 1 1 72 ~MOTION_DETECT P71_RXD2_SCL_TA0IN_TB5IN P15_D13_~INT3 5 E0 1 73 EXT_SCNR_ENA I2C_SDA VCC CONSOLE_RXD 29 P67_TXD1 6 PCON_CONSOLE_RXD 30 P70_TXD2_SDA_TA0OUT P14_D12 TP129 2 P13_D11 2 1 74 SSPTXD SSPRXD 31 P65_CLK1 I2C_SCL PCON_CONSOLE R229 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 2 75 ~CFG_INIT PCON CONSOLE D P66_RXD1 D U22 M24C01WDW6T 98185 1 CFG_DONE 2 NC1 1 P12_D10 I/O PORT P7 ±1% 0.063W 1K00 97272 EXT_SCAN P11_D9 76 2 C205 97871 100N ±15% 16V D 32 P64_~CTS1_~RTS1_CLKS1 I/O PORT P8 R317 CONSOLE_TXD_SEL 1 I/O PORT P1 77 ~EXT_KYBD_PWR_EN PCON_CONSOLE 1 33 3 R224 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 7 R366 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% 34 R221 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 8 D TP70 P63_TXD0 I2C_SDA 2 I/O PORT P6 1 P10_D8 2 TP82 2 SMBUS2 C374 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 SSPSFRM D PCON_CLK0 4 GND 2 D 1 78 KEYBOARD_HEATER_EN 1 35 P62_RXD0 P07_D7 D 36 P60_~CTS0_~RTS0 P06_D6 TP868 R365 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% A2D_RATIOMETRIC_DRIVE 37 P57_~RDY_CLKOUT P61_CLK0 79 MLB_HEATER_EN 38 P56_ALE P05_D5 80 EN_AUX_PORT_PWR P55_~HOLD 2 3 2 I2C_SCL 3V3_STANDBY SSPSCLK 1 81 LCD_HEATER_CTL PCON_A/D_BUS 39 SMBUS1 1 5 1 P04_D4 40 1 4 2 P03_D3 82 5 1 83 ~EXT_KYBD_DETECT TP87 1 R235 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 41 P54_~HLDA I/O PORT P0 P02_D2 HICOREVDD_EN U35 98139 NC7S32M5X 2 P01_D1 84 3V3_STANDBY VCC 1 P00_D0 85 C217 97871 100N ±15% 16V REQUEST_SSP_XFER 2 86 1 SSP_BUS ~SA2_RESET TP84 P53_BCLK 1 2 42 P52_~RD 3V3_STANDBY TP83 43 P51_~WRH_~BHE BYTE D RADIO_HEATER 1 3V3_STANDBY D R364 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% 2 44 P50_~WRL_~WR CNVSS 6 BAT_PRES 60 VCC60 ~RESET 7 TETHER_POWER_ON 14 VCC14 XOUT 10 EN_SW_PWR CONTROLLER XIN 11 XOUT D D PERIPHERAL 1 U12 9000568 LTC1694IS5 ~5V_PWR_OFF 1 2 13 XIN D 2 1 2 C71 97370 18P ±5% 50V 1 3V3_STANDBY D D 1 C72 97370 18P ±5% 50V 1 D ** USED FOR TERMINAL SELECTION ~3V3_PWR_OFF 2 U65 M30624FGPGP-D3 9003331 2 R225 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 1 2 1 1 1 2 TP139 3V3_STANDBY 2 3 I/O PORT P5 2 R395 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 4 C204 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 X3 ABMC2-7.3728MHZ-18-100-D 9003434 1 C203 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 C341 97372 1 10N ±5% 2 16V 1 1 P7 9001855 TSW-102-07-G-S-RA 1 1 R128 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W D 2 R63 9003438 ERTJ0ER103J 10K AT 25°C 5% T 1 1 2 3V3_STANDBY 2 TP99 D 2 2 3 3 2 3 5 - 1 4 1 2 C90 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 2 BATTERY_VOLTAGE V2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 + R601 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% U38 97866 2 LPV321M7 C218 97871 1 100N ±15% 16V 2 PCON_AVSS C207 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C208 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C216 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C26 97375 1N0 ±10% 50V 1 2 ** USED FOR OPTION SELECTION C25 97375 1N0 ±10% 50V D 4 18-Nov-2004 AUG 4 2004 SIGNATURES DRAWN PCON_A/D_BUS AUG 4 D BATT_MONITOR PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD D MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD PERIPHERAL CONTROLLER 38481 ECO No.: B C SIZE DRAWING NO. C INTERIM REV REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 5 REL. DATE A DATE NGT TEAM D 1 2 D V+ BATTERY_VOLTAGE D 1 R199 97313 51K1 0.063W ±1% 1 2 D BAT_SET TP61 DO NOT POPULATE TP97 TETHER_ID R226 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% DEBUG ONLY PCON_CONSOLE TP76 1 2 2 R51 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% A2D_RATIOMETRIC_DRIVE 1 TP58 1 2 2 TP75 1 4 Q6 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW OPTIONS_A_D C213 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 R44 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% R148 97331 301K 0.063W ±1% 1 2 TP95 D D LCD_TYPE VBAT_MAIN_IN Q52 BSS84 9000501 50V_350MW R236 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TP74 AUX_ID 3V3_STANDBY R232 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 2 TP98 R223 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 1 TP60 1 1 1 R222 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 D TP59 CCFL_EN ±1% 0.063W 1K00 97272 R192 R238 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 2 2 R19 97316 68K1 0.063W ±1% 1 1 1 TP92 D 2 C24 97375 1N0 ±10% 50V 2 1 TP21 1 1 Q10 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 R77 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 2 1 1 1 1 TP14 P6 9001855 TSW-102-07-G-S-RA CONSOLE_TXD_SEL 1 1 MLB TEMPERATURE 3V3_STANDBY 1 D R50 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 2 1 C469 97871 100N ±15% 16V D 22 C D CFG_DATA ~S2_OE ~S2_IORD ~S2_IOWR ~S2_WE S2_RDY S2_RST ~S2_CE[2:1] 1 1 CFG_DONE ~S2_WAIT 2 R55 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% TP105 1 1 1 1 CFG_CLK TP106 ~S2_VS[2:1] ~CFG_INIT TP107 ~PROGRAM TP108 ~CFG_INIT TP109 ~S2_REG ~S2_IOIS16 3V3 ~S2_INPACK B ~S2_CARD_DETECTED A S2_BVD[2:1] 1 SET "DRIVE DONE" OPTION IN FPGA 1 ASIC_CFG S2_A[25:0] FLOAT ~CF_SLOT FOR PCMCIA INTERFACE S2_D3 S2_D11 S2_D4 S2_D12 S2_D5 S2_D13 S2_D6 S2_D14 ~S2_CE1 S2_D7 S2_D15 ~S2_CE2 S2_A10 ~S2_VS1 S2_A11 S2_A9 S2_A17 S2_A8 S2_A18 S2_A13 S2_A19 S2_A14 S2_A20 NC S2_A21 S2_A22 S2_A16 NC S2_A23 S2_A15 S2_A24 S2_A12 S2_A25 S2_A7 ~S2_VS2 S2_A6 S2_A5 S2_A4 S2_A3 S2_A2 S2_BVD2 S2_A1 S2_BVD1 S2_A0 S2_D8 S2_D0 S2_D9 S2_D1 S2_D10 S2_D2 NC NC ~PROGRAM ~CFG_INIT CFG_DONE ~S2_CARD_DETECTED AB3 AB4 AA4 AB5 AA5 W5 AB6 AA6 Y6 W6 AA7 Y7 W7 V7 AA8 Y8 W8 V8 AB9 Y9 W9 V9 AB10 Y10 W10 V10 AB11 Y11 W11 V11 U11 AA12 Y12 W12 V12 U12 AB13 AA13 Y13 V13 AA14 Y14 W14 V14 AB15 AA15 Y15 V15 AB16 Y16 W16 V16 AB17 AA17 Y17 W17 V17 AB18 AA18 Y18 W18 AB19 AA19 1 AB20 W20 1 AA20 ~CB_CD[2:1] TP148 V19 ~ASIC_REQ ~ASIC_ACK Y19 R129 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 ~RST_ASIC NC S2_D[15:0] 3V3 CF_3V3EN V22 CF_IN V21 V20 PC_IN ~CF_PCD U21 CF_PRDY U20 NC PCM_IN TP112 1 U19 ~PCM_STSCHG T22 ~PCM_PCD T21 PCM_PRDY T20 INPACK T19 T18 PSKTSEL R21 ~PREG R19 B5IO_AB3 B5IO_AB4 B5IO_AA4 B5IO_AB5 B5IO_AA5_VREF B5IO_W5 B5IO_AB6 B5IO_Y6 B5IO_W6 B5IO_AA6 B5IO_AA7 B5IO_Y7 B5IO_V7 B5IO_W7 B5IO_AA8 B5IO_Y8 B5IO_V8 B5IO_W8_VREF B5IO_AB9 B5IO_Y9 B5IO_W9 B5IO_V9 B5IO_AB10 B5IO_Y10_VREF B5IO_V10 B5IO_W10 B5IO_W11 B5IO_AB11 B5I_Y11_GCK1 B5IO_V11 B5IO_U11 B4IO_AA12 B4IO_Y12 B4I_W12_GCK0 B4IO_V12 B4IO_U12 B4IO_AB13 B4IO_AA13_VREF B4IO_Y13 B4IO_V13 B4IO_Y14 B4IO_W14 B4IO_AA14 B4IO_V14 B4IO_Y15 B4IO_AB15 B4IO_AA15 B4IO_V15 B4IO_Y16 B4IO_W16 B4IO_V16 B4IO_AB17 B4IO_AA17 B4IO_Y17 B4IO_W17 B4IO_V17 B4IO_AB18 B4IO_AA18 B4IO_Y18 B4IO_W18 B4IO_AA19 B4IO_AB20 B4IO_AB16_VREF B3IO_W21 B6IO_Y1 B6IO_W3 B6IO_W2 B3IO_V22 B6IO_W1 B3IO_V21 B6IO_V4 B3IO_V20 B6IO_V3 B3IO_U22 B6IO_V2 B3IO_U21_VREF B6IO_V1 B3IO_U20 B6IO_U4 B3IO_U19 B6IO_U2 B3IO_T22_D6 B6IO_U1 B3IO_T21 B6IO_T5 B3IO_T20 B6IO_T4 B3IO_T19 B6IO_T3_VREF B3IO_T18 B6IO_T2 B3IO_R21_D5 B6IO_T1 Y2 NC Y1 CB_AD0 W3 CB_AD2 W2 CB_AD1 W1 CB_AD4 V4 CB_AD3 V3 CB_AD6 V2 CB_AD5 CB_CBE[3:0] CB_VS[2:1] TP769 V1 CB_RFU40 U4 CB_AD7 U2 CB_AD8 U1 CB_CBE0 T5 CB_AD10 T4 T3 CB_AD9 NC T2 CB_AD11 T1 CB_AD13 R5 CB_AD12 R4 CB_AD15 R2 CB_AD14 TP765 TP755 1 BD30 B3IO_W22 B6IO_Y2 1 U22 ~CF_STSCHG B3IO_Y21_D7 B4IO_AB19_VREF W21 B4IO_AA20 W22 LOW_ENERGY_LATCH B3IO_AA22 ~PROGRAM Y21 B3I0_V19_~INIT AA22 B3O_DONE CB_AD[31:0] ~CF_SLOT CF_5VEN NC R18 B3IO_R19_VREF B6IO_R5 B3IO_R18 B6IO_R4_VREF 1 2 TP880 2 1 P21 ~PCE2 P19 P18 B3IO_P20 TP754 B6IO_R1 R1 CB_AD16 P4 CB_CBE1 TP738 1 P20 ~PIOR B6IO_R2 1 ~PCE1 BD20 U19 9003332 XC2S150-5 FG456 I B3IO_P21 B3IO_P19 B6IO_P4 TP634 1 ~PIOW N22 ~POE N21 N20 ~PWE NC N18 N19 ~PWAIT NC M22 ~IOIS16 M20 ~ASIC_CS5 M19 BD18 M18 B3IO_P18 B6IO_P3 B3IO_N22_D4 B6IO_P2 B3IO_N21_VREF B6IO_N5 B6IO_N4 B3IO_N20 B3IO_N18 B6IO_N3 DGND;A1,A22,B2,B21,C3,C20,J9,J10,J11,J12,J13,J14 DGND;K9,K10,K11,K12,K13,K14,L9,L10,L11,L12,L13,L14 DGND;M9,M10,M11,M12,M13,M14,N9,N10,N11,N12,N13,N14 DGND;P9,P10,P11,P12,P13,P14,Y3,Y20,AA2,AA21,AB1,AB22 B3IO_N19 B3IO_M22_TRDY B3IO_M20 B6IO_N2_VREF B6IO_M6 B6IO_M5 VCC_INT;J7,J16,P7,P16,R7,R16,T7,T8,T9,T14,T15,T16 VCC_INT;E5,E18,F6,F17,G7,G8,G9,G14,G15,G16,H7,H16 VCC_INT;U6,U17,V5,V18 B3IO_M19 B3IO_M18 B6IO_M4 B6IO_M3 DVDD_5V;P5,V6,W13 VCC_B0;F7,F8,F9,F10,G10,G11 B6IO_M1_TRDY P3 CB_RFU47 P2 CB_PAR N5 ~CB_BLOCK N4 ~CB_PERR N3 ~CB_STOP N2 M6 ~CB_GNT NC M5 ~CB_DEVSEL M4 M3 ~CB_INT NC M1 ~CB_TRDY 1 VCC_B1;F13,F14,F15,F16,G12,G13 L22 NC NC K21 K20 J22 MBGNT J21 DQM3 J20 DQM2 J19 B7IO_L6 VCC_B4;T12,T13,U13,U14,U15,U16 B2IO_L18 B7IO_L5 VCC_B5;T10,T11,U7,U8,U9,U10 B2IO_L17 B7IO_L4 VCC_B6;M7,N6,N7,P6,R6,T6 B2IO_K22 B7IO_L3_IRDY VCC_B7;G6,H6,J6,K6,K7,L7 B2IO_K21_VREF B7IO_L1 B2IO_K20_D3 B7IO_K5 NO CONNECT: A2,A6,A12,A13,A14,B11,B16,C2,C8,C9,D1,D4 NO CONNECT: D18,D19,E13,E17,E19,F11,G2,G22,H21,J1,J4,K2 NO CONNECT: K18,K19,L2,L19,M2,M17,M21,N1,P1,P22,R3 NO CONNECT: R20,R22,U3,U18,W4,W15,W19,Y5,Y22,AA1 NO CONNECT: AA3,AA9,AA10,AA11,AA16,AB7,AB8,AB12,AB14,AB21 B2IO_J22 B2IO_J21 L6 TP156 NC B7IO_K4 B7IO_K3_VREF B2IO_J20 B7IO_K1 L5 CB_CLK L4 ~CB_FRAME L3 L1 ~CB_IRDY NC K5 CB_AD17 K4 CB_CBE2 K3 CB_AD18 K1 CB_AD19 TP146 5V TP143 1 MBREQ VCC_B3;M16,N16,N17,P17,R17,T17 B2IO_L20_IRDY 1 MEM_CTL L17 K22 B2IO_L21 1 NC ~MOE L18 1 1 NC ~ASIC_CS5 L20 TP191 TP535 TP368 TP546 TP603 VCC_B2;G17,H17,J17,K16,K17,L16 1 L21 NC B2IO_L22 1 ~MWE TP601 1 MRDY 3 MBGNT H18 ~SDCS1 G21 ~SDCS0 G20 G19 G18 D BA25 F22 BA24 F21 BA23 F20 NC 97232 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W BA21 E20 BA20 E21 BA19 E22 BA18 D22 BA17 D21 CFG_DATA D20 BA16 C22 1 B7IO_H1 B2IO_G19 B7IO_G5 B2IO_G18 B7IO_G4 B2IO_F22 B7IO_G3 B2IO_F21_VREF B7IO_G1 B2IO_F20 B7IO_F5 B2IO_F19 B7IO_F4 B2IO_F18 B7IO_F3 B2IO_E20 B7IO_F2 B2IO_E21 B7IO_F1 B2IO_E22 B7IO_E4 B2IO_D22 B7IO_E3 B2IO_D21 B7IO_E2_VREF TP141 CB_AD20 3 J2 H5 ~CB_RST CB_AD21 H4 H3 ~CB_SERR CB_AD22 H2 ~CB_REQ H1 CB_AD23 G5 CB_CBE3 G4 G3 G1 F5 CB_AD24 NC CB_AD25 NC F4 CB_AD26 F3 CB_AD28 F2 CB_AD27 F1 CB_AD30 TP132 E4 CB_AD29 E3 CB_AD31 TP140 B7IO_E1 B0IO_B3 B0IO_A3 B0IO_B4 B0IO_A4 B0IO_D5 B0IO_C5 B0IO_B5 B0IO_A5 B0IO_E6 B7IO_D2 B0IO_D6 B0IO_C6_VREF B0IO_B6 B0IO_E7 B0IO_D7 B0IO_C7 B0IO_B7 B0IO_A7 B0IO_E8_VREF B0IO_D8 B0IO_B8 B0IO_A8 B0IO_E9 B0IO_D9 B0IO_B9 B0IO_A9_VREF B0IO_E10 B0IO_D10 B0IO_C10 B0IO_B10 B0IO_A10 B0IO_E11 B0I_C11_GCK3 B1IO_D11 B1I_A11_GCK2 B1IO_F12 B1IO_E12 B1IO_D12 B1IO_C12 B1IO_B12 B1IO_D13 B1IO_C13 B1IO_B13_VREF B1IO_E14_VREF B1IO_D14 B1IO_C14 B1IO_B14 B1IO_E15 B1IO_D15 B1IO_C15 B1IO_B15 B1IO_A15 B1IO_E16 B1IO_D16 B1IO_C16 B1IO_A16 B1IO_D17 B1IO_C17 B1IO_B17 B1IO_A17 B1IO_C18 B1IO_B18 B1IO_A18_VREF B1IO_C19_~CS B2I_CCLK B1IO_B19 B2IO_C21_DOUT_BUSY B1IO_A19 B1IO_A20_~WRITE B2IO_C22 M0 B22 M2 C21 B2IO_D20_DIN_D0 B7IO_C1 B7IO_B1 E2 E1 CB_RFU32 NC D2 ~CB_CLKRUN C1 B1 B3 A3 B4 A4 D5 C5 B5 A5 E6 D6 C6 B6 E7 NC D7 C7 B7 A7 E8 NC B8 D8 A8 E9 NC D9 B9 A9 E10 NC D10 B10 A10 C10 E11 C11 NC A11 F12 D11 NC E12 NC D12 B12 C12 D13 C13 B13 NC E14 D14 C14 B14 E15 D15 C15 B15 A15 NC E16 D16 C16 A16 D17 C17 B17 A17 C18 B18 A18 B19 C19 A19 A20 AB2 Y4 U5 C4 D CB_3V3EN 4 BD0 BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 BD5 BD6 BD8 BD9 BD10 BD11 BD12 BD13 BD14 BD15 BD16 BD17 BD19 BD21 BD22 BD23 BD24 BD25 BD26 BD27 BD28 BD29 BD31 BA0 BA1 BA2 BA3 BA4 BA5 BA6 BA7 BA8 BA9 BA10 BA11 BA12 BA13 BA14 CB_5VEN TP104 BA15 ASIC_CFG R240 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TCK D3 3V3 1 4 CFG_CLK 2 97232 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W B7IO_H2 B2IO_G20 M1 NC 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W R417 B2IO_G21 TCK 97232 1 SDCLK1 B7IO_H3 B20 R416 B2IO_H18_VREF TDI 97232 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W SDCKE1 B7IO_H5 ~RST_ASIC;E19 B7IO_H4_VREF TDI_ASIC R415 PLL_LOOP;D4 J3 1 ~SDCAS PLL_AVDD;A2 B2IO_H19 B2O_TDO R414 B2IO_H20_D2 TMS ~SDRAS F18 B7IO_J2 J5 1 F19 BA22 SDRAM_CTL B2IO_H22_D1 A21 D B7IO_J3 THE FOLLOWING ARE CONNECTED FOR THE ASIC TDO_ASIC 2 R54 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% BD7 1 2 TP111 B2IO_J18 TMS MBREQ H22 H19 1 1 R53 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% J18 DQM0 H20 1 TP110 DQM1 B7IO_J5 NOTE: THE ABOVE NO CONNECTS ARE FOR THE FPGA 1 MB_REQ B2IO_J19 18-Nov-2004 ~CB_CD1 1 JTAG_BUS AUG 4 2004 ~CB_CD2 CB_VS1 SIGNATURES DRAWN CB_VS2 DATE AUG 4 NGT TEAM BA[25:0] PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO CB_AUDIO APPVD CB_STSCHG BD[31:0] 1 1 CLK_48MHZ 32KHZ_ASIC TP846 TP547 TITLE SCHEMATIC 8525/8530 MAIN LOGIC BOARD BUFFER ASIC PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A 38481 S2_PULL_UPS CB_PULL_UPS ECO No.: B C DRAWING NO. C REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 6 REL. DATE A SIZE INTERIM REV D 22 C A D B 3V3 BYPASS CAPS FOR 5V TOLERANT I/O BANKS 5V C227 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 5V C425 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 2 C226 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C421 97372 10N ±5% 16V D 1 2 TP116 TP119 8 5 D D D D 3 CF_3V3EN 2 CF_5VEN 1 VCC_INT VCC_B0 3V3 3V3 2 1 2 C259 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C258 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C257 97372 10N ±5% 16V 2 D C264 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C263 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C262 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C220 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C221 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 1 1 2 2 2 C233 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C231 97871 100N ±15% 16V C250 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 2 1 2 2 C223 97871 100N ±15% 16V C224 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C268 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 1 2 C267 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C266 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C265 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 2 C236 97871 100N ±15% 16V C234 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C239 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C237 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 POPULATE FOR ASIC VCC_B6 C251 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 2 C241 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 2 FAULT R397 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 1 1 2 C242 97871 100N ±15% 16V C240 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 3V3 5V 2 CF_VCC C229 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C255 97372 10N ±5% 16V 2 1 2 C435 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 2 C455 97372 1 10N ±5% 16V 2 C228 97871 100N ±15% 16V U49 9000979 AAT4650IHS D 8 3V3 5 3 CB_3V3EN 1 VCC_INT 3V3 VCC_B3 2 2 CB_5VEN VCC_B7 1 2 2 C271 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C270 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C269 97372 10N ±5% 16V C244 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C245 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C243 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C252 97372 10N ±5% 16V C378 94054 1U0 ±10% 16V C247 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 1 2 1 2 C248 97871 100N ±15% 16V C246 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C256 97372 10N ±5% 16V POPULATE FOR FPGA BYPASS FOR I/O BANK3 D BYPASS CAPS FOR ASIC VCC CB_VCC 6 VCC3 VCC CTL1 CTL0 FAULT 7 4 NC GND D 2 D D VCC5 1 1 1 C272 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 R94 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 2 2 R59 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% TP6 1 TP117 1 BYPASS FOR I/O BANK6 D TP118 R398 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 1 BYPASS FOR I/O BANK2 D NC D D D 4 GND C254 97372 10N ±5% 16V BYPASS FOR I/O BANK5 VCC_B2 C238 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 CTL0 COMPACT FLASH / PCMCIA SLOT 0 POWER 1 1 7 VCC D VCC_B5 D 3V3 CTL1 C253 97372 10N ±5% 16V TP125 VCC_INT 6 VCC VCC3 BYPASS FOR I/O BANK4 C235 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 BYPASS FOR I/O BANK1 D C222 97871 100N ±15% 16V 3V3 VCC_B1 C232 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 D C379 94054 1U0 ±10% 16V D 3V3 C261 97372 10N ±5% 16V C249 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 BYPASS FOR I/O BANK0 D VCC_INT 2 C219 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 VCC5 VCC_B4 D C260 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 R57 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 CF_VCC 1 1 2 R58 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% TP8 1 2 U48 9000979 AAT4650IHS D C603 97871 100N ±15% 16V C602 978711 100N ±15% 16V 2 1 1 2 C601 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 1 C600 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 D D D BYPASS FOR I/O BANK7 BYPASS CAPS FOR ASIC I/O BANKS CORE VOLTAGE 3 3 R396 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% ASIC CORE POWER 1 POPULATE FOR ASIC CARDBUS/ PCMCIA SLOT 1 POWER 2 3V3 TP123 U101 TPS78625DCQ? 9004558 1 4 C418 97372 10N ±5% 16V PLL_AVDD 2 1 2 C1123 9003428 10U +80%/-20% 50V 1 2 2 C1124 97871 100N ±15% 16V VOUT VIN BYPASS EN GND GND 6 3 2 1 1 1 C273 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 2 C1122 9003428 10U +80%/-20% 50V ASIC 32kHz CLOCK 3V3 D D C382 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 TP850 5 D VCC D 1 1 2 1 R413 97292 6K81 63MW 1% D C376 97375 1N0 ±10% 50V 1 TP873 2 5 1 D 2 PLL_LOOP 2 1 C91 97371 100P ±5% 50V TP872 1 2 C377 97371 100P ±5% 50V C375 97375 1N0 ±10% 50V 1 1 1 C274 97871 100N ±15% 16V 32KHZ 4 2 TP882 1 GND 2 POPULATE FOR FPGA U60 9000515 NC7SZ125P5X 3 4 18-Nov-2004 1 R142 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 4 ASIC PLL POWER 32KHZ_ASIC 1 FPGA CORE POWER AUG 4 2004 D SIGNATURES DRAWN POPULATE ONLY FOR ASIC DATE AUG 4 NGT TEAM PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD ASIC SUPPORT CIRCUITRY PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A 38481 ECO No.: B C DRAWING NO. C REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 7 REL. DATE A SIZE INTERIM REV D 22 C A D B 3V3_SWITCHED 3V3_SWITCHED C449 97871 100N ±15% 16V TP401 2 TP383 2 TP672 TP826 1 TP829 4 1 TP830 S2_CARD_ERROR 2 1 1 U70 5 NC7S02M5X 9002949 D TP831 D 2 3V3_SWITCHED TP804 2 2 1 2 U68 5 NC7S86M5X 9002948 D 2 U73 NC7S04M5 97125 D 4 1 1 1 U69 5 NC7S02M5X 9002949 5 TP811 2 TP812 4 ~S2_CARD_DETECTED 1 TP813 3 3 4 TP814 TP382 2 TP381 TP815 D D 1 TP818 3 TP819 3V3_SWITCHED D TP820 2 2 U72 98139 NC7S32M5X TP337 5 TP822 CB_VCC TP823 D R291 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 2 1 R589 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TP821 C434 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 3V3_SWITCHED 1 1 4 2 ~CF_PC_OE TP824 TP847 TP848 1 ~S2_OE 3 TP849 97453 R220 0R0 ±5% 0.063W D COMPACT FLASH / PCMCIA SLOT 0 CARD ENABLE 1 2 IN OUT 3 TP11 D 2 1 2 2 1 C92 9003429 10U +80%/-20% 16V 2 C80 9003429 10U +80%/-20% 16V 1 2 C230 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 1 2 2 D C416 97372 1 10N ±5% 16V 2 C139 97871 100N ±15% 16V D D D 27 S2_D12 28 S2_D13 29 S2_D14 30 S2_D15 1 1 1 1 1 ~S2_CE2 32 ~S2_VS1 33 1 CB_AD7 1 CB_AD8 1 CB_AD9 CB_AD7 88 CB_AD8 89 CB_CBE0 90 CB_AD10 91 1 92 CB_AD10 1 CB_AD11 1 CB_AD12 1 CB_AD13 1 CB_AD9 93 CB_VS1 94 CB_AD11 95 CB_AD13 96 CB_AD12 97 CB_AD15 98 CB_AD14 1 CB_AD15 1 CB_AD16 CB_AD14 1 99 CB_AD17 100 1 CB_AD18 1 CB_AD19 1 CB_AD16 101 CB_CBE1 102 103 104 105 106 107 109 110 111 ~CB_INT 114 ~CD1 GND1 D11 D3 D12 D4 D13 D5 D14 D6 D15 D7 ~CE2 ~CE1 ~VS1 A10 ~IORD ~OE 38 TP577 1 1 1 1 1 TP584 S2_A25 39 ~S2_VS2 40 41 S2_RST 42 ~S2_WAIT 43 ~S2_INPACK 44 ~S2_REG 1 3 TP586 TP585 1 S2_BVD2 45 S2_BVD1 46 S2_D8 47 S2_D9 48 S2_D10 49 50 TP580 CF_VCC 1 1 1 52 R266 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W A9 ~WE A8 RDY_BSY_IREQ A7 VCC1 VCC2 ~CSEL A6 ~VS2 A5 RESET A4 ~WAIT A3 ~INPACK A2 ~REG A1 BVD2_~SPKR A0 BVD1_~STSCHG D0 D8 D1 D9 D2 D10 GND2 MT2 WP_~IOIS16 ~CD2 MT1 116 ~CB_TRDY 117 ~CB_IRDY 1 2 S2_D3 3 S2_D4 4 S2_D5 5 S2_D6 6 S2_D7 7 ~S2_CE1 118 S2_A10 8 TP834 CB_VCC CB_VCC TP835 1 TP581 R298 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W R292 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W TP836 TP837 TP838 1 9 TP839 10 S2_A9 11 S2_A8 12 S2_A7 TP840 1 S2_D14 S2_A6 15 S2_A5 16 S2_A4 17 S2_A3 18 S2_A2 19 S2_A1 20 S2_A0 1 S2_D13 1 S2_D12 1 S2_D11 1 S2_D10 1 S2_D9 1 S2_D8 22 S2_D1 23 S2_D2 CB_AD25 1 CB_CBE2 120 CB_AD17 121 CB_AD18 122 CB_AD19 123 CB_AD20 124 CB_VS2 125 CB_AD26 1 CB_AD27 1 CB_AD28 1 CB_AD29 126 1 CB_AD30 CB_AD21 1 127 128 1 TP616 CB_AD22 TP615 TP613 130 CB_AD23 CB_VCC CB_VCC TP610 TP609 R308 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 131 132 ~CB_REQ TP612 TP611 129 ~CB_SERR TP614 S2_D0 21 CB_AD24 1 ~CB_RST S2_D15 13 14 119 ~CB_FRAME 2 37 S2_RDY ~IOWR 115 CB_CLK R307 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W TP841 CB_AD24 CB_AD31 133 1 134 1 36 ~S2_WE 2 CB_AD6 112 2 35 ~S2_IOWR 2 86 87 1 34 ~S2_IORD 2 1 ~CB_GNT 1 TP588 CB_CBE3 135 CB_AD25 136 137 CB_AUDIO CB_AD26 138 139 CB_STSCHG 24 25 S2_D7 51 D D 1 1 ~S2_IOIS16 S2_D6 1 S2_D5 1 S2_D4 1 S2_D3 1 S2_D1 1 S2_D2 1 1 S2_D0 1 ~CF_PC_OE CB_AD27 140 CB_AD28 141 CB_VCC ~CF_CD2 1 TP579 CB_AD5 CB_AD5 D 2 31 1 TP587 R139 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 85 PLACE CAPACITORS NEAR CARDBUS CONNECTOR S2_D11 CF_VCC CB_AD6 ~CB_DEVSEL J2 N7E50-A516HG-50 9000967 26 TP576 84 CB_AD4 1 113 ~CF_CD1 TP575 83 CB_AD3 1 2 2 D TP573 82 CB_AD3 CB_AD2 TP608 TP607 TP606 TP336 TP330 R309 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 142 CB_AD29 143 CB_AD30 144 1 2 C147 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 3 TP572 81 CB_AD4 CB_AD1 1 D GND TP571 CB_AD1 CB_AD0 1 1 145 CB_RFU32 CB_AD31 TP204 146 TP625 TP243 147 ~CB_CLKRUN ~CB_CD2 148 CB_AD[31:0] 149 CB_AD[31:0] S2_D[15:0] S2_D[15:0] 150 ~CB_CD2 S2_A[25:0] S2_A[25:0] TP842 S2_BVD2 S2_BVD1 2 2 B2/CAD0 A2/PC_D3 B37/CAD2 A37/PC_D11 B3/CAD1 A3/PC_D4 B38/CAD4 A38/PC_D12 B4/CAD3 A4/PC_D5 GND_84 GND_9 B39/CAD6 A39/PC_D13 B5/CAD5 A5/PC_D6 B40/RFU A40/PC_D14 2 3 ~PC_CD1 4 S2_D3 5 S2_D11 6 S2_D4 7 S2_D12 8 S2_D5 1 9 10 S2_D13 11 S2_D6 12 S2_D14 13 1 S2_A17 1 S2_A16 1 S2_A15 1 S2_A14 1 S2_A13 1 S2_A12 1 S2_A11 1 COMPACT FLASH S2_A10 1 S2_A9 1 S2_A8 1 S2_A7 1 S2_A6 1 S2_A5 1 ~S2_VS1 S2_A4 1 S2_A3 1 ~S2_VS2 S2_A2 1 S2_A1 1 S2_A0 1 1 TP565 A6/PC_D7 B41/CAD8 A41/PC_D15 B7/CCBE0 A7/PC_~CE1 B42/CAD10 A42/PC_~CE2 GND_92 GND_17 B8/CAD9 A8/PC_A10 B43/CVS1 A43/PC_~VS1 B9/CAD11 A9/PC_~OE A44/PC_~IORD B44/CAD13 B10/CAD12 A10/PC_A11 B45/CAD15 A45/PC_~IOWR B11/CAD14 A11/PC_A9 GND_100 GND_25 B46/CAD16 A46/PC_A17 B12/CCBE1 A12/PC_A8 B47/RFU A47/PC_A18 B13/CPAR A13/PC_A13 B48/~CBLOCK A48/PC_A19 B14/~CPERR B49/~CSTOP GND_108 B15/~CGNT A14/PC_A14 A49/PC_A20 GND_33 A15/PC_~WE B50/~CDEVSEL A50/PC_A21 B16/~CINT A16/PC_READY_~IREQ B17_B51_1/VCC A17_A51_1/PC_VCC1 B17_B51_2/VCC A17_A51_2/PC_VCC1 B18_B52/VPP/VCORE A18_A52/PC_VPP1 B19/CCLK A19/PC_A16 B53/~CTRDY A53/PC_A22 B20/~CIRDY A20/PC_A15 GND_118 GND_43 B54/~CFRAME A54/PC_A23 B21/CCBE2 A21/PC_A12 B55/CAD17 A55/PC_A24 B22/CAD18 A22/PC_A7 B56/CAD19 A56/PC_A25 B23/CAD20 A23/PC_A6 B57/CVS2 A57/PC_~VS2 GND_126 GND_51 B24/CAD21 A24/PC_A5 B58/~CRST A58/PC_RESET B25/CAD22 A25/PC_A4 B59/~CSERR A59/PC_~WAIT B26/CAD23 A26/PC_A3 B60/~CREQ A60/PC_~INPACK B27/CAD24 A27/PC_A2 GND_134 GND_59 B61/CCBE3 A61/PC_~REG B28/CAD25 A28/PC_A1 B62/CAUDIO A62/PC_BVD_~SPKR B29/CAD26 B63/CSTSCHG A29/PC_A0 A63/PC_BVD1_~STSCHG B30/CAD27 B64/CAD28 GND_142 A30/PC_D0 A64/PC_D8 GND_67/ B31/CAD29 A31/PC_D1 B65/CAD30 A65/PC_D9 B32/RFU A32/PC_D2 B66/CAD31 B33/~CCLKRUN B67/~CCD2 A66/PC_D10 A33/PC_WP_~IOCS16 A67PC_CD2 B34/GND A34/PC_GND3 B68/GND A68/PC_GND4 MTG2 MTG1 MTG4 MTG3 S2_D7 14 S2_D15 15 ~S2_CE1 16 ~S2_CE2 17 S2_A10 18 19 ~S2_VS1 20 ~CF_PC_OE 21 ~S2_IORD S2_A11 22 23 ~S2_IOWR S2_A9 24 25 26 S2_A17 27 S2_A8 28 S2_A18 29 S2_A13 30 S2_A19 31 S2_A14 32 S2_A20 33 34 CB_CBE1 36 S2_RDY 37 TP113 38 39 40 S2_A16 41 S2_A22 42 S2_A15 C81 9003429 10U +80%/-20% 16V 43 2 1 1 2 2 C417 973721 10N ±5% 16V 2 CF_VCC 1 FL10 9000989 NEF13PT222Z1E9 C225 1 97871 2 OUT IN 100N GND ±15% 16V 3 1 C138 97871 100N 2 ±15% 16V S2_A23 44 D 45 S2_A12 46 S2_A24 47 S2_A7 48 S2_A25 49 S2_A6 D D D D PLACE CAPACITOR NEAR CF CONNECTOR 50 ~S2_VS2 51 S2_A5 52 53 S2_RST S2_A4 54 55 ~S2_WAIT S2_A3 56 57 ~S2_INPACK S2_A2 58 59 60 ~S2_REG S2_A1 61 3 62 S2_BVD2 S2_A0 63 64 S2_BVD1 65 S2_D0 66 S2_D8 67 S2_D1 68 S2_D9 69 70 S2_D2 71 S2_D10 72 ~S2_IOIS16 73 ~PC_CD2 74 75 151 153 D D CB_CBE0 PCMCIA / CARDBUS - SLOT 1 TP198 PCMCIA - SLOT 0 TP562 TP522 ~CB_CD[2:1] TP521 ~CB_CD[2:1] TP520 TP515 S2_A[25:0] S2_A[25:0] CB_CBE[3:0] TP518 CB_CBE[3:0] TP502 TP199 S2_D[15:0] S2_D[15:0] TP200 4 TP54 TP149 18-Nov-2004 TP599 TP598 CB_VS2 CB_PULL_UPS TP597 1 CB_VS1 TP596 TP595 TP594 TP593 TP592 R310 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W R314 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 1 TP794 TP800 0.063W ±1% 10K0 97296 R627 AUG 4 2004 0.063W ±1% 10K0 97296 R626 SIGNATURES DRAWN DATE AUG 4 NGT TEAM PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD CB_VS[2:1] MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO CB_VS[2:1] CB_PULL_UPS APPVD TITLE SCHEMATIC 8525/8530 MAIN LOGIC BOARD CF CARD / PCMCIA INTERFACE TP591 TP590 PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A CB_VS1 38481 ECO No.: C SIZE DRAWING NO. C INTERIM REV REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 8 REL. DATE B R219 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 1 CB_VS2 A 2 ~S2_WE S2_A21 35 1 1 1 S2_A18 TP845 2 1 S2_A19 TP582 1 S2_A20 TP844 TP583 154 B6/CAD7 1 2 1 1 1 S2_A21 TP670 152 TP776 1 R290 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W A36/PC_~CD1 ~CB_CD1 S2_PULL_UPS 4 R289 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W A1/PC_GND1 B36~CCD1 1 1 1 R287 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 1 1 2 TP53 R286 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 2 S2_BVD[2:1] S2_BVD[2:1] 1 S2_A22 CB_CBE2 TP770 2 CF_VCC 1 S2_A23 1 ~CB_CD2 ~S2_VS[2:1] S2_A24 ~CB_CD1 1 ~S2_CE[2:1] ~S2_CE[2:1] TP843 TP671 1 CB_CBE3 1 2 S2_A25 ~S2_VS[2:1] B1/GND 1 1 OUT 80 ~CB_STOP D C286 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 IN 79 CB_AD2 108 FL9 9000989 NEF13PT222Z1E9 1 CB_AD0 ~CB_PERR 2 1 78 ~CB_BLOCK TP122 1 0R0 R218 0.063W ±5% 97453 CF_VCC SIGNAL NAMES AS PER PC CARD STANDARD RELEASE 8.0 RFU: RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE 2 77 ~CB_CD1 CB_PAR GND 2 1 CB_AD23 CB_RFU47 FL12 9000989 NEF13PT222Z1E9 1 TP578 CB_AD22 1 1 S2_D[15:0] A35/PC_GND2 B35/GND LOWER SLOT CB_VCC R137 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 1 76 CB_RFU40 2 1 ~CF_CD2 TP805 R620 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 1 D ~CF_CD1 R136 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W CB_AD21 1 TP675 C448 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C447 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 C405 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 TP674 TP803 D 1 R424 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TP802 3V3_SWITCHED 3V3_SWITCHED 3V3_SWITCHED R188 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TP801 S2_PULL_UPS 3V3_SWITCHED 3 TP574 1 3 4 ~PC_CD2 TP570 CB_AD20 1 ~PC_CD1 1 1 TP673 S2_D[15:0] J5 9003440 1123215-1 TP402 U71 5 NC7SP08P5X 9001584 D 1 2 1 R187 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 2 R164 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% C432 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 UPPER SLOT 1 3V3_SWITCHED 3V3_SWITCHED D 22 C A D B TP1077 TP773 TP771 E6 1 3V3 2 OSCO ~MQ1188_CS2 K8 ~MOE L9 ~PWE K6 TP772 L8 DQM1 M7 MRDY L7 ~MQ1188_IRQ K9 ~CS OSCR CLK_3M6864 AVDD18 ~BE0 AVDDP1 ~BE1 AVDDP2 RDY AGND18 ~IRL AGNDP1 H3 2 D1 1 182K ±1% 0.063W BA16 J2 BA15 J3 BA14 J1 BA13 K2 BA12 K3 BA11 L1 BA10 M1 BA9 L2 BA8 M2 BA7 L3 BA6 M3 BA5 K4 BA4 L4 BA3 K5 BA2 L5 BA1 L6 BD15 M9 BD14 M10 BD13 L10 BD12 M11 2 BD11 L11 BD10 M12 BD9 K10 BD8 L12 BD7 K11 BD6 J12 BD5 K12 BD4 J10 BD3 J11 BD2 H11 BD1 H10 BD0 G12 BD[15:0] 3V3 MQ_GPIO 3V3 C1 2 C354 97372 10N ±5% 16V 2 PORTRAIT ( on Huey & Calvin) MQ_GPIOC G10 A13 FD23 A12 FD22 A11 FD21 A10 FD20 A9 FD19 A8 FD18 A7 FD15 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 FD14 FD13 FD12 FD11 FD10 FD7 A1 D15 D14 D13 FD6 FD5 FD4 FD3 D12 FD2 FSCLK D10 D9 FLCLK_GPIO16 D8 FMOD_GPIO15 D7 FVSYNC_GPIO14 D6 FHSYNC_GPIO13 D5 FDE_GPIO12 D4 ENVEE_GPIO11 D3 ENVDD_GPIO10 D2 PWM1_GPIO18 D1 PWM0_GPIO17 P1DP BS~_GPIO7 GPIO20 GPIO21 F3 SDIO_D3 E3 D 3 E2 D2 SDIO_CMD 2 R181 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% SDIO_WP D8 SDIO_CD D7 1 2 R182 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% D6 1 2 R185 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 2 R184 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 3V3 3V3 3V3 1 R246 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 2 3V3 D5 TP856 1 TP855 D4 1 E4 F4 G4 H4 ~EN_USB_PULLUP J4 EN_USB_HUB_PWR J5 PVDD PGND C10 C9 A9 B9 B8 C8 A8 C7 B7 C6 B6 A6 2 C5 P2DP P2DN SRCLK_GPIO40 SDD0_GPIO60 SMCLK_GPIO41 SDD1_GPIO61 SDD2_GPIO62 SDD3_GPIO63 SDCLK_GPIO64 SDCMD_GPIO65 SCLK_GPIO42 FSYNC_GPIO43 SIN_GPIO44 SOUT_GPIO45 1 TP55 C4 B3 1 1 B2 R367 9004471 18R2 0.063W ±1% B4 C3 D3 1 2 C380 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C381 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C383 97871 100N ±15% 16V C384 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C385 97871 100N ±15% 16V A3 2 L4 96331 PLP3216S551SL2 2 TP34 MEDIAQ_USB_DEVICE_PLUS 4 3 1 2 TP69 1 1 2 R368 9004471 18R2 0.063W ±1% A1 B1 97453 MEDIAQ_USB_DEVICE_MINUS R239 MEDIAQ_USB_DEVICE 1 2 0.063W 0R0 ±5% C2 TP100 place as close as possible to mq1188 A2 PWM_CCFL_DIM E12 D12 3V3 C12 HOST_USB E7 1 C386 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 B12 A12 H_USB_PLUS TP78 1 D ~SS_GPIO50 VID7_GPIO77 SCK_GPIO51 VID6_GPIO76 VID5_GPIO75 MOSI_GPIO52 MISO_GPIO53 VID4_GPIO74 VID3_GPIO73 VID2_GPIO72 VID1_GPIO71 VID0_GPIO70 LED_GPIO54 ~PCIMD_GPIO5 MD3_GPIO3 MD2_GPIO2 VCLK_GPIO78 MD1_GPIO1 VHSYNC_GPIO79 MD0_GPIO0 VVSYNC_GPIO80 MVDD1_H12 FVDD2_A10 R370 97234 27R4 0.063W ±1% H_USB_MINUS TP157 F9 PWR_AMP_ON E9 AUDIO_EN D9 ~USB_RESET D11 J6 ~TP_CS J7 TP_DCLK J8 TP_DIN J9 TP_DOUT 3 3V3_SWITCHED G3 3V3 TP403 ~HEATER_INSTALLED R251 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% R165 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% MGND2_G7 MGND1_H8 CVDD2_M8 FVDD1_A3 E8 E5 DISPLAY_CFG F5 G5 ~3V3_PWR_OFF H5 3V3 TP93 H1 H12 G7 H8 R265 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 BVDD1_F12 R369 97234 27R4 0.063W ±1% 2 G9 1 BVDD3_K1 BVDD2_M4 1 TP64 H9 2 TOUCH_BUS CORE POWER A10 0R0 ±5% 0.063W 97453 R249 TP79 B5 GPIO25 I/O POWER F12 D B10 CVDD1_A7 CGND2_H7 CGND1_F7 1 ~EN_USB_DEV D 2 2 M4 3V3 D A11 D GPIO24 MVDD2_H1 K1 3 2 B11 1 1 R245 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 3V3 3V3 1 1 SDIO_D2 1 P1DN GPIO23 I2S CODEC TP57 1 2 C11 GPIO22 SPI F2 GND D0 VIDEO INTERFACE SDIO_D1 BYP D11 SECURE DIGITAL I/F 1 G2 1 1 SDIO_D0 IN 1 ~TP_INSTALLED F10 OUT D 2 DTB_PU_DRIVE G11 4 C1095 94054 1U0 ±10% 16V 3 A14 1 1 F11 2 1 3V3 R166 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% R599 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TP152 1 E10 VIN FL6 9000989 NEF13PT222Z1E9 GND 1 1 A15 2 MQ_GPIOB 2 2 D C1096 94054 1U0 ±10% 16V 1 E11 VOUT ENABLE D D 3 5 TP63 1 MQ_GPIOA 1 C50 97871 100N ±15% 16V VCC GND 2 1 U11 MIC5247-1.5BM5 150MA 9001598 2 D USB FUNCTION 2 R250 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 3V3 U67 9000515 NC7SZ125P5X A16 USB HOST K7 4 2 C457 97372 10N ±5% 16V A17 1 3V3_SWITCHED SDIO_CARD 5 1 C393 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 2 DISPLAY_CFG 1 2 C392 97871 100N ±15% 16V A4 2 1 1 ±1% 0.063W 10K0 97296 R237 TP101 SDIO_CLK M5 1 1 1V5 1 C391 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 A5 2 MQ_GPIOC R56 9004472 44R2 0.063W ±1% 2 AGNDP2 TP767 M6 D21 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA MQ1188_PWR A18 FPI INTERFACE H2 BA17 INTEL SA-1110 / PSA2X0 HOST BUS INTERFACE BA18 3V3 E1 ~OE ~WR MQ1188 POWER 97326 1 1 DQM0 BA[25:0] R600 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W 1 G1 R36 SDRAM_CTL R180 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% ~PDWN_GPIO4 1 PCM_IN IRQ_BUS OSCI C106 9001581 33P ±5% 50V TP85 2 1 MEM_CTL ~POR 1 F1 1 D10 R29 97872 1M00 0.063W ±1% 1 2 1 ~MQ1188_PWRDN 1 TP91 U37 9001562 MQ1188-GBE ~SA2_RESET ~TP_IRQ M8 EN_SDIO_PWR D A7 H7 MQ1188_PWR F7 DGND;F8,F6,G6,H6,G8, D D 1 2 C390 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C387 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C388 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C389 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C456 97372 10N ±5% 16V D R135 97276 1K50 0.063W ±1% 1 TP65 1 ~EN_USB_DEV 3 4 18-Nov-2004 1 1 1 3V3_SWITCHED Q44 BSS84 9000501 50V_350MW 2 TP1075 2 TP768 4 3V3 R70 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 2 1 AUG 4 2004 SIGNATURES DRAWN USB / SDIO CONTROLLER NGT TEAM DATE AUG 4 PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD USB/SDIO CONTROLLER 38481 ECO No.: B C DRAWING NO. C REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 9 REL. DATE A SIZE INTERIM REV D 21 C A D B 1 1 TP335 1 3V3 1 2 SS_CLK_48MHZ 2 R606 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 1 R590 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 TP3 1 ~SS_CLK_PWR_EN 1 3 TP676 1 2 C450 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 C356 97372 10N ±5% 16V 2 1 2 C137 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 2 2 C451 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 TP404 TP677 X6 ABMC2-10.0000MHZ-18-60-D 9003435 3V3 1 D R607 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 1 4 3 1 2 2 R92 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 1 R610 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 1 5 D 2 1 Q35 9000501 BSS84 1 2 1 C355 9000585 4P7 ±2.5P 50V 2 VCC U66 9001865 MK1714-01RI? C211 9000585 4P7 ±2.5P 50V 2 1 D D 2 2 4 3 1 TP4 GND 4 11 1 U59 9000515 NC7SZ125P5X 3 16 14 D 9 6 TP333 5 1 1 12 TP678 18 ~SS_PWR_DWN R608 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 1 R609 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 1 VDD1 X2 OE 1 19 TP334 VDD2 REF XSEL CLK S0 NC 20 NC 10 1 15 NC S1 S2 S3 GND1 S4 GND2 LEE GND3 ~PD GND4 7 2 R611 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 8 13 17 2 R45 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 1 C404 97372 10N ±5% 16V 2 1 1 2 2 2 X1 1 CLK_48MHZ R603 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% D D 3 3 SPREAD SPECTRUM CLOCK GENERATOR 4 4 18-Nov-2004 AUG 4 2004 SIGNATURES DRAWN NGT TEAM DATE AUG 4 PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD SPREAD SPECTRUM CLOCK GENERATOR 38481 ECO No.: B C DRAWING NO. C REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 10 REL. DATE A SIZE INTERIM REV D 22 C A D B BA[25:0] BD[31:0] TP542 TP696 1 TP690 TP689 TP688 TP687 TP692 TP691 TP686 TP685 TP693 TP694 TP684 TP695 TP683 TP552 TP551 TP550 TP549 TP545 TP543 TP860 1 BA22 1 BA21 1 BA20 1 BA19 1 BD30 BD29 BD28 BD27 BD26 1 1 1 1 1 1 TP728 TP727 U13 9002773 S1D13806F00A100 BA[25:0] TP726 BA20 6 BA19 7 BA18 8 BA17 9 BA16 10 BA15 11 BA14 12 BA13 13 BA12 14 BA11 15 TP725 TP724 TP723 BA18 1 BA17 1 BA16 1 BA15 1 BA14 1 BA13 1 BA12 1 BA11 1 BA10 1 BA9 1 BA8 1 BA7 1 BA6 1 BA5 1 BA4 1 BA3 1 BA2 1 BA1 1 BA0 1 BD24 BD23 BD22 BD21 BD20 BD19 BD18 BD17 BD16 BD15 BD14 BD13 BD12 BD11 BD10 BD9 BD8 BD7 BD6 BD5 BD4 BD3 BD2 BD1 BD0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TP707 TP706 TP705 TP704 TP703 TP702 BA10 16 BA9 17 BA8 18 BA7 19 TP701 TP700 TP699 TP697 BA6 20 TP698 BA5 21 BA4 22 BA3 23 BA2 24 TP708 TP709 TP710 TP711 BA1 25 TP712 26 TP713 A20 FD23 A19 FD22 A18 FD21 A17 FD20 A16 FD19 A15 FD18 A14 FD17 A13 FD16 A12 FD15 A11 FD14 A10 FD13 A9 FD12 A8 FD11 A7 A6 A5 A4 40 BD14 41 TP715 TP716 BD13 42 BD12 43 BD11 44 BD10 45 BD9 46 BD8 47 TP717 TP718 TP719 TP720 TP721 BD7 48 BD6 49 BD5 50 2 BD4 51 BD3 52 BD2 53 BD1 54 BD0 55 FD9 FD8 FD7 FD6 A2 FD5 A1 A0 BD[15:0] BD15 FD10 A3 D TP714 FPI INTERFACE TP537 BD31 BA23 D15 D14 D13 HOST BUS INTERFACE TP517 BA25 1 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 FD4 FD3 FD2 FD1 FD0 FPFRAME INTEL PXA-255 TP514 FPLINE FPSHIFT DRDY VMP0 D7 VMP1 D6 VMP2 D5 VMP3 D4 VMP4 D3 VMP5 D2 VMP6 D1 VMP7 D0 MEM_CTL GPIO0 GPIO1 MRDY 39 35 ~SA2_RESET PCM_IN DQM0 34 DQM1 33 ~PWE 3V3 32 ~MOE 31 30 29 ~LCD_CS3 28 SDCLK2 60 GPIO2 ~RESET GPIO3 RD_~WR/~CE1 GPIO4 ~WE1/~CE2 GPIO5 ~WE0/~WE GPIO6 ~RD/~OE GPIO7 ~BS/VDD GPIO8 M/~R GPIO9 ~CS GPIO10 1 TP881 BA21 ~WAIT GPIO11 66 64 SDRAM_CTL 62 BUSCLK GPIO12 3 2 142 3 141 140 139 138 CLKI3 RED CNF0 BLUE CNF1 HRTC CN2 VRTC CNF3 IREF 59 72 79 88 99 108 121 144 CNF5 COREVDD1 CNF6 COREVDD2 CNF7 TP861 LCD_FD17 100 LCD_FD16 98 LCD_FD15 97 LCD_FD14 96 LCD_FD13 95 LCD_FD12 94 LCD_FD11 93 LCD_FD10 91 LCD_FD9 90 LCD_FD8 87 LCD_FD7 86 LCD_FD6 85 LCD_FD5 84 LCD_FD4 83 LCD_FD3 82 LCD_FD2 81 LCD_FD1 80 LCD_FD0 TP190 TP189 1 TP188 1 TP187 1 1 74 FL7 9004216 NFW31SP107X1E4L 78 77 1 124 125 126 1 1 127 128 129 130 1 1 1 131 1 TP164 1 IN OUT FPSHIFT DRDY 3 GND TP168 2 2 D TP166 TP165 TP175 TP192 TP193 1 TP194 1 1 TP180 71 VSH_EN 70 VGH_EN 69 VGL_EN 68 67 65 63 61 57 137 1 1 1 1 1 136 135 134 1 1 1 TP169 TP173 TP172 TP171 TP170 TP178 TP177 TP176 112 115 117 119 120 113 1 1 1 1 1 1 TP181 TP182 TP183 TP184 TP185 TP186 3 27 89 3V3 122 DTESTEN IOVDD1 IOVDD2 VSS1 IOVDD3 VSS2 IOVDD4 VSS3 IOVDD5 VSS4 IOVDD6 1 37 C1121 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 73 2 92 1 2 C1118 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C1119 1 97871 100N ±15% 2 16V C1120 1 97871 100N ±15% 2 16V C394 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C395 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 2 109 C396 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C397 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C400 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C398 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C399 97372 10N ±5% 16V 123 VSS5 D VSS6 DVDD1 VSS7 DVDD2 38 132 FL11 98136 BLM21A102S? 200MA TP195 VSS8 VSS9 DVSS1 AVDD2 DVSS2 AVDD3 110 1 114 1 116 2 118 LCD_CNTRL FPFRAME FPLINE 75 D 111 3V3 AVSS1 NC1 AVSS2 TEST C458 1 97372 10N ±5% 2 16V C403 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C401 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C402 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 2 C336 94054 1U0 ±10% 16V 76 133 D R588 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% D 1 2 LCD_DATA 102 101 TESTEN AVDD1 58 143 1 103 1 56 36 104 CNF4 COREVDD3 5 105 CLKI2 GREEN SS_CLK_48MHZ 106 CLKI 3V3 4 107 D 4 4 18-Nov-2004 LCD CONTROLLER AUG 4 2004 SIGNATURES DRAWN NGT TEAM DATE AUG 4 PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD LCD CONTROLLER 38481 ECO No.: B C DRAWING NO. C REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 11 REL. DATE A SIZE INTERIM REV D 22 C A D B 5V 3V3 3V3_SWITCHED TP1160 R268 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 3V3 1 1 1 2 C334 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C128 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C407 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C1103 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 2 1 2 C308 9003429 10U +80%/-20% 16V C406 97871 100N ±15% 16V C409 978711 100N ±15% 16V 2 1 2 1 2 C1102 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 2 1 2 C88 9003429 10U +80%/-20% 16V C1105 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 2 D C408 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 R618 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% Q78 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 D Q82 97633 FDC658P 30V_4A 3 1 2 TP1161 FL13 9000989 NEF13PT222Z1E9 6 5 2 1 4 1 D C1104 97372 10N ±5% 16V 2 C335 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 IN OUT 1 2 GND 3 D LCD_DATA 1 EN_SDIO_PWR 4 3 15 46 EPSON_GPIO_1 DRDY GND GND GND HEATER_POWER GND NC +5V 2 2 98 ~TP_INSTALLED 100 GND +5V GND +5V NC 1 1 TP817 1 ~TP_INSTALLED +3V3 GND +3V3 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 TP780 MT3 MT4 D D 1 3 TP332 TOUCH_BUS 3V3 95 97 99 3V3 STANDBY TP_DOUT ~TP_CS ~TP_IRQ TP810 TP809 GND 101 TP_DIN TP808 +3V3 106 105 TP_DOUT TP_DOUT 107 GND GND N/C ~TP_CS 110 109 TP807 ~TP_CS 3V3_SWITCHED 111 +3V3_SWITCHED 113 HEATER_POWER TP_DIN TP_DIN 103 HEATER_POWER TP_DCLK TP_DCLK TP_DCLK ~TP_IRQ TP73 ~TP_IRQ 116 TP339 TP779 SDIO SOCKET 93 GND 114 1 TP778 91 112 DISPLAY_CFG 5V +3V3 108 TP338 1 89 3V3 STANDBY GND DTB_PU_DRIVE TP777 87 ~HEATER_INSTALLED TP816 TP1150 +5V 104 ~HEATER_INSTALLED TP775 MT2 85 ~TP_INSTALLED 102 TP774 83 DTB_PU_DRIVE D 2 C310 9003428 10U +80%/-20% 50V +5V 96 DTB_PU_DRIVE 2 TP781 16 1 MT1 +5V 94 C89 95621 100N ±20% 50V 2 TP331 C357 95621 100N ±20% 50V 1 81 ANALOG_CCFL_DIM 1 1 C411 95621 100N ±20% 50V 15 79 88 C85 95621 100N ±20% 50V CD 77 90 1 COMM 14 1 75 GND 86 3V3_STANDBY WP 73 +5V GND 92 DAT2 +5V CCFL_EN HEATER_CTRL 1 DAT1 12 TP833 HEATER_POWER 71 82 ANALOG_CCFL_DIM 1 69 84 3 DAT0 13 67 GND TP827 VSS2 1 HEATER_POWER 80 LCD_HEATER_CTL 10 1 LCD_TEMP 78 1 SDIO_WP 1 HEATER_POWER PWM_CCFL_DIM LCD_HEATER_CTL 9 SDIO_CD 65 GND 76 TP828 CLK LCD_TYPE 63 74 CCFL_EN SDIO_D2 1 NC 72 PWM_CCFL_DIM 8 1 MQ_GPIOC 68 1 SDIO_D1 1 GND 70 1 7 61 GND 64 TP340 VDD 11 59 66 TP825 PCON_A/D_BUS LCD_TYPE 62 LCD_THERM SDIO_D0 GND 60 MQ_GPIOB LCD_THERM VSS1 5 57 GND 1 I2C_SCL_SW 55 58 MQ_GPIOC CMD I2C_SDA_SW I2C_SCL_SW D CD_DAT3 6 I2C_BUS_SW GND 56 TP346 2 53 MQ_GPIOA MQ_GPIOB 1 SDIO_CLK I2C_SDA_SW 54 MQ_GPIOA TP784 D 2 DRDY 51 GND C459 97372 10N ±5% 16V P1 9001544 10-5738-009-783-862 3 49 52 MQ_GPIO LCD_FD17 47 EPSON_GPIO_2 R253 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 4 45 50 VGL_EN R258 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% LCD_FD6 GND 48 MQ_GPIOA R254 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% SDIO_CMD 1 VGH_EN R257 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% SDIO_D3 1 1 TP862 43 GND R259 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% LCD_FD6 1 1 TP863 44 R255 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% R252 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% TP782 GND 1 1 MQ_GPIOB 1 FPFRAME 41 EPSON_GPIO_0 LCD_FD10 TP783 R256 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% FPFRAME 39 LCD_FD8 GND LCD_FD9 GND 40 42 TP864 SDIO_CARD 37 GND LCD_CNTRL TP785 LCD_FD17 LCD_FD17 38 VSH_EN LCD_FD2 GND 35 LCD_FD15 MQ_GPIOC 2 33 GND 36 LCD_FD8 LCD_FD9 1 31 LCD_FD9 34 LCD_FD15 2 D TP786 GND 32 2 2 C1097 94054 1 1U0 ±10% 16V 2 1 LCD_FD1 29 LCD_FD4 TP787 LCD_FD1 30 LCD_FD4 C410 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 LCD_FD12 27 LCD_FD11 TP788 GND 28 GND LCD_FD1 D 25 GND LCD_FD0 TP789 LCD_FD12 26 LCD_FD11 LCD_FD16 GND 23 LCD_FD13 2 LCD_FD5 21 24 LCD_FD13 LCD_CNTRL LCD_FD15 GND 19 GND 1 LCD_FD5 22 1 LCD_FD12 1 1 TP865 LCD_FD0 1 1 17 GND 20 LCD_FD0 LOW_ENERGY_LATCH LCD_FD3 18 LCD_FD13 TP1154 TP790 LCD_FD3 1 LCD_FD2 TP795 LCD_FD14 GND 1 1 13 GND 16 LCD_FD2 LCD_FD16 LCD_FD16 14 LCD_FD11 1 11 LCD_FD10 TP796 Q79 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 TP791 GND 1 GND TP792 1 1 9 12 LCD_FD10 LCD_FD8 LCD_FD14 LCD_FD14 10 1 1 TP797 LCD_FD7 GND 7 FPLINE 1 D LCD_FD7 5 GND 8 LCD_FD5 LCD_FD7 1 FPSHIFT 6 LCD_FD4 TP798 FPLINE R621 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TP793 1 FPSHIFT LCD_FD6 GND TP1159 1 1 1 GND 1 2 J7 53481-1209 9002922 2 LCD_FD3 TP799 2 115 HEATER_POWER GND 118 1 117 N/C TP_BUSY 120 TP832 119 GND GND D HEATER_POWER D 1 2 C430 956211 100N ±20% 50V 2 C431 95621 100N ±20% 50V 1 2 C102 9003428 10U +80%/-20% 50V D DTB CONNECTOR 4 4 18-Nov-2004 JUNE 16 2004 SIGNATURES DRAWN DATE AUG 4 NGT TEAM PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD SDIO, DTB CONNECTORS 38481 ECO No.: B C DRAWING NO. C REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 12 REL. DATE A SIZE INTERIM REV D 22 C A D B CHARGER BUCK BATTERY CHARGER 1 1 INRUSH LIMITER VBAT_MAIN_IN TP201 1 R17 1 2 TRACEWIDTH=150 TRACEWIDTH=150 EXTERNAL_PWR CHRG_PWR_IN 9000552 0R039 ±1% 1W TP253 TP216 TRACEWIDTH=150 1 1 TRACEWIDTH=150 SYS_PWR_IN 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 2 1 2 3 SRN 2 D1 97707 12V 12V_350MW 1 TP231 D C20 97764 1U0 ±20% 25V 2 GND D 1 1 R196 97248 100 0.063W ±1% 2 5 1 1 2 1 2 R154 97276 1K50 0.063W ±1% Vtl = 0V79 Vth = 1V09 Hyst = 300mV LMC7215IM5 9000940 D 2 2 CELL = 3V3 3 CELL = 0V D D 2 VDD 3 3 2 1 1 1 R390 9001577 280K 0.063W ±1% TP223 VTERM_DAC 2 Vtl = 2V73 Vth = 3V03 Hyst = 300mV 3V3_STANDBY D GND - U7 0V87 4 LMC7215IM5 9000940 TP222 2 2 D D TP224 1 1 D R198 9004496 511K 0.063W ±1% 1 LOW_ENERGY 2 1 1 2 + 3 - 4 1 GND 1 1 2 1 2 VDD 1 1 4 D Q9 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 2 GND R6 9004495 28K 0.063W ±1% D D TP255 1 TP228 1 D 3V0 R73 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% C299 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 R74 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 2 2 D D TP256 4 2 AUG 4 2004 D R43 9001579 137K 0.063W ±1% C301 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 1 3 SIGNATURES DRAWN NGT TEAM D11 93285 BAT54 30V_200MA D LOW ENERGY DETECTOR AUG 4 PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A D CHARGER V_ ADJUST C SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD POWER MANAGEMENT / CHARGER 38481 ECO No.: SIZE DRAWING NO. C INTERIM REV REV 1008014 SHEET 13 REL. DATE B DATE CHKD 2 D A 1 18-Nov-2004 D 1 ACPRES 3 + TP257 1 D 2 TP230 R272 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 5 5 Q15 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 - 1 BAT_PRES 3 1 U8 LMC7215IM5 9000940 R71 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 2 3 CELL = 9V75 TP264 TP263 Q55 BSS84 9000501 50V_350MW R5 97872 1M00 0.063W ±1% C298 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 R274 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% R140 97331 301K 0.063W ±1% 1 R271 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 4 2 1 R48 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 2 VDD 1 C300 97871 100N ±15% 16V C296 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 BAT_PRESENCE 1 VBAT_MAIN_IN TP262 1 3V3_STANDBY 5 C83 97375 1N0 ±10% 50V 2 + 2 2 CELL > 1V6 3 CELL < 0V3 D U6 1 1 BAT_ID C297 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 C294 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 1 2 R25 97872 1M00 0.063W ±1% 1 2 1 R144 97327 200K 0.063W ±1% TP247 2 GND 2 D 2 2 3V3_STANDBY 3V3_STANDBY 1 TP254 1 2 1 5 2 1 1 W R76 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% D 6 3V3_STANDBY R273 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TP258 BAT_SET C27 97375 1N0 ±10% 50V TP153 SCL 1 2 1 TP225 1 A SDA 1 2 R75 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 TP154 VCC 3 Q8 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 1 I2C_BUS I2C_SCL LPV321M7 D U21 9004097 AD5247BKS100-RL7 1 4 2 BAT_ID D I2C_SDA 1 2 1 1 D + 2 1 TP229 1 D PCON_A/D_BUS 2 2 2 U39 97866 R3 97273 1K10 0.063W ±1% R143 97327 200K 0.063W ±1% 2 1 C101 94054 1U0 10% 16V 1 R277 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% C63 9003432 4U7 ±10% 16V 2 3 3V3_STANDBY D V1 2 4 C118 97848 120P ±5% 50V D TP227 3 - V+ 1 1 D 1 R269 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 2 TP214 C292 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 2 2 R167 9000928 3K32 0.063W ±1% 1 2 3V3_STANDBY 1 2 MMBF5485 TP226 1 1 C295 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 D TP215 R83 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 5VREF R270 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% C28 97375 1N0 ±10% 50V 3V3_STANDBY 17 2 1 D D 3 2 1 1 1 20 VHSP 1 D TP249 TP259 1 2 R85 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% R39 9000549 576K 0.063W ±1% D 1 2 C30 97375 1N0 ±10% 50V C8 9003433 2U2 ±10% 50V 2 18 VS COMP 1 4 BATDEP 10 C7 9003433 2U2 ±10% 50V 2 9 BATSET D 1 1 2 1 1 1 D 3 VREF 2 R158 97303 20K0 0.063W ±1% 3 R42 9001579 137K 0.063W ±1% D TP267 C84 9003429 10U +80%/-20% 16V 2 1 1 GND 2 1 R275 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% R374 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% 23 ~BATTDRV 1 R264 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 8 ~WDO WDI R84 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 6 CHARGE_EN TP205 TP246 2 2 D17 92642 MMBD914 70V_225MA 2 2 1 1 1 TP266 TP221 1 1 TP265 5 1 R80 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 7 2 C93 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 R2 9001574 16K2 0.063W ±1% 2 R130 0.063W 1 SRSET 7 2 ~PFO 2 ~RESET PFI 1 1 2 TP238 1 ~MR 1 4 3 Q2 92525 MMBT3904 40V_225MW 1 2 1 1 TP242 1 ±5% R375 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% TP220 ACSET 5 1 1 1 D 97453 0R0 TP237 1 5VREF VCC D TP241 ILIMIT < 2A TP81 R141 9000926 90K9 0.063W ±1% D7 9000559 MMBZ5248BLT1 18V_225MW 1 DPM > 2A56 R157 97303 20K0 0.063W ±1% TP219 1 1 IBAT 6 U55 9001558 ADM705AR 2 TP240 4 1 R263 97296 10K0 ±1% 0.063W TP236 ENABLE 14 R373 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% 2 13 BATP 3 18V_225MW MMBZ5248BLT1 9000559 D10 1 2 ACSEL Q29 9002936 FDS6675 30V_11A TP239 ACPRES 8 1 3 2 1 2 CHARGE_~WDO 8 7 6 5 2 1 C35 9003429 10U +80%/-20% 16V C87 9003429 10U +80%/-20% 16V 2 2 2 1 Q1 9004282 SST5485 TP233 3 TP218 1 1 TP252 15 1 3 1 2 ALARM C86 9003429 10U +80%/-20% 16V 2 D 2 MMBT4403LT1 93037 Q40 D 1 R261 97224 10R0 ±1% 0.063W 1 19 CHARGE_CURRENT C293 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 R348 97224 10R0 ±1% 0.063W TP766 16 SRP D26 9000558 MBRS2040LT3 40V_2A Q39 93037 MMBT4403LT1 1 1 R349 97224 10R0 0.063W ±1% 2 1 1 DEPLETED_BAT 3 5VREF 3 2 1 ACDET D3 93285 BAT54 30V_200MA 1 D 1 1 TP209 D8 9000559 MMBZ5248BLT1 18V_225MW TP232 1 D 1 ACP 1 V_CHRG = 6 - 12V6 I_CHRG = 0 - 2A 2 2 TP210 D 1 1 2 2 2 R81 97320 100K TP875 0.063W ±1% 3 21 ~PWM 12 3 Q31 9002936 FDS6675 30V_11A 1 892NCS-330M=P3 1 Q67 97633 FDC658P 30V_4A D 1 TP866 1 1 G 3 2 5VREF 1 1 ~ACSEL R262 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TP203 2 C44 95621 100N ±20% 50V 2 22 VCC C2 9003428 10U ±10% 50V 1 2 1 1 TP202 1 TP212 1 2 C1 9003428 10U +80%/-20% 50V S ~ACDRV C140 94054 1U0 ±10% 16V D 6 5 2 1 4 24 1 2 1 1 ACN 2 R72 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 2 11 D D9 9000559 MMBZ5248BLT1 18V_225MW 4 C45 95621 100N ±20% 50V 1 D 2 1 D 1 1 R388 95559 0R05 0.25W ±1% TP235 1 2 R69 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% U36 BQ24702PW 9001860 5VREF Q11 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 D18 92642 MMBD914 70V_225MA TP234 1 TP213 1 2 R162 9000586 4R02 0.063W ±1% 2 1 1 1 D 1 2 C46 95621 100N ±20% 50V 3 TP217 L22 9001852 33U 20% 1A9 1 2 2 Q56 BSS84 9000501 50V_350MW TP251 TP250 R82 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 R276 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% D6 9000559 1 MMBZ5248BLT1 1 R78 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 3 Q27 9002936 FDS6675 30V_11A 4 1 1 1 1 ACPRES 3 1 1 TP261 Q14 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 TP260 2 5VREF 1 2 R79 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 3V3_STANDBY R23 97872 1M00 0.063W ±1% R194 97248 100 0.063W ±1% 2 2 R195 97248 100 0.063W ±1% 2 3V3_STANDBY R267 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% D E OF 22 C A D B TRACEWIDTH=150 SYS_PWR_IN PEAK RIPPLE = 1.75A 2 C4 9003428 10U ±10% 50V 2 C5 9003428 10U ±10% 50V 2 1 C6 9003428 10U ±10% 50V 2 2 R399 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% TP270 C12 9003428 10U ±10% 50V 1 1 TP271 SAME AS 5V RAIL IN NORMAL OPERATION 1 2 TRACEWIDTH=25 AUX_5V_LDO 2 INSTALL TO DISABLE BURST MODE POWER GND NET U16 LTC3728EUH 9000983 D 1 C68 9003432 4U7 ±10% 16V C141 94054 1U0 ±10% 16V 1 2 TP282 1 1 7 EXTVCC TRACEWIDTH=25 5V_INTVCC D29 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA VIN 2 1 1 1 1 RUN_SS1 1 D20 92642 MMBD914 70V_225MA C304 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 1 2 C305 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 8 2 D52 93615 MBRS140T3 1A@40V 1 SENSE1- 20 14 1 Q50 9000537 30V_3A5 TP286 4 3 2 PLLFLTR TP283 1 SGND 33 SGND_TAB 1 80 2 1 TP285 3V3 1 10 C157 97372 10N ±5% 16V 2 1 C133 9001588 560P ±5% 50V 1 TP289 2 1 2 1 TP277 TP327 1 1 Q50 9000537 30V_3A5 TP294 R592 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 8 1 1 2 2 TPLNK2 7 1 2 C33 97375 1N0 ±10% 50V D51 93615 MBRS140T3 1A@40V 1 1 R160 97303 20K0 0.063W ±1% 2 TP290 16 29 2 R37 9000587 29K4 0.063W ±1% 2 C95 97371 100P ±5% 50V NC16 SENSE2- NC29 VOSENSE2 NC32 PGND 12 SENSE2+ 2 C123 9000520 22U 10% 6V3 1 2 C124 9000520 22U 10% 6V3 1 2 11 SENSE2- TP287 ROUTE AS CRITICAL SIGNAL PAIR 1 9 TRACEWIDTH=80 19 POWER GROUND NET R161 97303 20K0 0.063W ±1% 2 1 C60 9001581 33P ±5% 50V 1 FDS6961A NC10 SENSE2+ 1 R18 9000533 63K4 0.063W ±1% D C73 97370 18P ±5% 50V 1 2 1 1 2 R159 97303 20K0 0.063W ±1% 2 C94 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 1 2 R284 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 2 TP288 2 C132 9001588 560P ±5% 50V 1 32 C32 97375 1N0 ±10% 50V 1 1 2 2.5A MAX 3A ABS PEAK RIPPLE = 10mV TRACEWIDTH=80 2 2 D36 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA 20 18 BG2 1 1 1 1 20 15 SW2 1 R152 9000540 0R015 0.25W ±1% TP284 SLF12555T-100M3R4 C70 97376 4N7 ±10% 25V ITH2 L2 9000522 10U 3A4 20% TP278 C47 95621 100N ±20% 50V ITH1 1 1 D33 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA 1 5 6 1 FDS6961A 1 PLLIN 6 2 2 TP279 R40 97236 33R2 0.063W ±1% 2 1 20 17 2 TP280 2 FDS6912A 80 TP296 2 2 C122 9000520 22U 10% 6V3 1 1 1 PGOOD BOOST2 TP281 2 C61 9001581 33P ±5% 50V 1 C121 9000520 22U 10% 6V3 1 1 1 8 R147 9000532 105K 0.063W ±1% 2 C120 9000520 22U 10% 6V3 1 ROUTE AS CRITICAL SIGNAL PAIR TP324 5 C311 9000520 22U 10% 6V3 1 TPLNK3 C31 97375 1N0 ±10% 50V 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W 1 2 5A MAX 6A ABS PEAK RIPPLE = 12mV BACKUP = 3.0V 2 31 VOSENSE1 3 1 100 2 FDS6912A 97232 2 7 3 TP293 409 kHz Q49 9002932 30V_6A 4 1 1 5 6 TP295 5V TRACEWIDTH=100 1 100 Mount Parallel Sens Resistors Together. DR127-100 1 SENSE1+ TG2 PWR_SYNC_CLK TP325 1 30 SENSE1- 27 R151 9000540 0R015 0.25W ±1% 1 RUN_SS2 SENSE1+ 3V_5V_PWROK 2 TP273 Q49 9002932 30V_6A 1 2 R193 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% R87 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 2 R86 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 2 3V3_STANDBY TP322 3 R591 13 ~3V3_PWR_OFF L1 9002935 10U 6A04 20% 6 4 D35 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA 2 2 5 TP272 20 22 BG1 1 1 1 3 25 SW1 28 ~5V_PWR_OFF 3 C69 97376 4N7 ±10% 25V 20 2 TP268 1 1 FDS6912A Q48 9002932 30V_6A 2 1 TP269 TP276 1 1 1 D19 92642 MMBD914 70V_225MA TP292 C49 95621 100N ±20% 50V 1 D 97232 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W FDS6912A C48 95621 100N ±20% 50V 2 TP291 1 1 1 1 1 R593 20 24 BOOST1 1 R100 9000540 0R015 0.25W ±1% TP275 2 1 1 C67 9003432 4U7 ±10% 16V 2 7 8 TP274 TP326 2 20 26 TG1 23 D31 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA 1 3.3V / 5V PWR SUPPLY 2 1 AUX_3V3_LDO Q48 9002932 30V_6A 20 2 3V3_OUT 1 FCB 21 2 4 5V 2 C3 9003428 10U ±10% 50V 1 1 1 1 VIN = 12 & 15V NOM 20V PEAK OP 25V ABS PEAK 5.3V ABS MIN SIGNAL GROUND NET (WIDTH = 20) SINGLE PLANE NODE ROUTE AS CRITICAL TRACE, NOT TO PLANE 1 2 SGND TP315 5V TP314 1 3V3 3V3_SWITCHED 1 1 1 D 6 2 TP313 1 D 1 TP319 1 PWR_SYNC_CLK POWER LED 2 1 2 C126 9000520 22U 10% 6V3 2 4 VOUT 2 TP304 RIPPLE = 5mV INOM = 10 - 300 MA IMAX = 500 mA 2 R347 9000958 26K7 0.063W ±1% 1 2 2 TP303 1 R7 97300 15K0 0.063W ±1% 1 Q16 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 R183 97232 22R1 0.063W ±1% 1 3V3 2 Q17 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 1 TRACEWIDTH=30 1 D 3V3_STANDBY D HICOREVDD_EN Q18 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 R282 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TP307 1 2 1 COREVDD_EN 4 1 D R279 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 2 1 C62 9001581 33P ±5% 50V R21 9003414 40K2 0.063W ±1% TP299 1 D R_SET2 CD ~RESET D POWER GND NET 3V3_STANDBY 1 C303 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 1 GND 3 2 2 TP306 D 4 2 D VIN OUT TP308 2 [0.84, 0.74] 4 1 150mA MAX +/- 1% TYP 3 GND 0.8V TYP IN C125 9000520 22U 10% 6V3 1 C13 97645 1U0 20% 50V 2 2 1 2 5 1 2 C119 97848 120P ±5% 50V 1 U52 9001599 S-873325BUP-ALA-T2 1 1 C144 9000528 220P ±5% 25V 1 D D34 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA 1 ITH 3 R_SET1 1 1 3.3V STANDBY REG TP318 VFB TP298 1 R280 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 2 53261-0290 MOLEX 3V3 TP317 2 PLL_LPF FREQ=400 kHz D TP310 1 1 3.3V / 5V SWITCHED C156 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 2 D D D32 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA SYNC_MODE R278 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 3 CORE_VDD FL1 6A 9000989 NFE31PT222Z1E9 1 2 RUN 7 8 J10 9002925 1 D 1 2 2 2 SW TRACEWIDTH=80 1 SLF6028T-100M1R3 1 2 1 R89 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% VIN 80 5 1 R118 97256 221 0.063W ±1% TP297 1 1 1 2 Q22 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 D 1 EN_SW_PWR TP309 1 TP302 1 R283 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% U56 LTC1878EMS8 97662 3V3 TP311 1 D30 94543 MBR0530T 2 30V_500MA L24 97661 10U 1A3 20% D 1 2 TP320 R376 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% 1 Q21 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 1 R379 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% 2 R378 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% 2 1 TP312 1 LOW_ENERGY_LATCH Q20 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 TP323 1 1 1 1 3 TP321 R377 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% 2 3 3V3 C66 9003432 4U7 ±10% 16V 2 1 Q69 97633 FDC658P 30V_4A 2 C65 9003432 4U7 ±10% 16V 2 2 3 TRACEWIDTH=80 6 5 2 1 4 1 Q19 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 D 5V_SWITCHED 2 3 2 Q70 97633 FDC658P 30V_4A 2 2 1 Q57 BSS84 9000501 50V_350MW R90 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 1 2 C302 97871 100N ±15% 16V 3V3_SWITCHED 1 TRACEWIDTH=80 6 5 2 1 4 R88 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 5V_SWITCHED TPLNK4 2 GND 1 C1127 97871 100N ±15% 16V TP305 1 U102 9004487 MIC811TU 2 4 D D PXA255 = 1.1V - 1.3V 1 CORE VDD VCC D D 1.1V 1.3V R_SET1 || R_SET2 26k7 16k0 D AUG 4 2004 SIGNATURES DRAWN SA2 CLOCK 200MHz 400MHz 18-Nov-2004 1 C64 9003432 4U7 ±10% 16V 2 R281 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% D DATE AUG 4 NGT TEAM PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD 2 1 3 2 MR 1 GND R625 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% CPU CORE SUPPLY TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A B SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD DC-DC CONVERTERS 38481 ECO No.: D C SIZE DRAWING NO. C INTERIM REV REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 14 REL. DATE D A APPVD 1 C1128 97871 100N ±15% 16V MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO ~RST_PCON 2 ~PCON_PGRM ~RESET D 22 C A D B 5V TP155 1 2 1 TP158 U24 MIC5236-5BMM 9002955 SYS_PWR_IN 2 2 R91 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 2 VIN 1 5V_STANDBY 1 TRACEWIDTH=30 3 VOUT 5V_STANDBY 1 C29 97764 1U0 ±20% 25V 1 D16 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA 1 4 5 6 7 8 1 D ENABLE TP159 GND5 GND6 GND7 GND8 C104 94054 1U0 10% 16V 1 1 ~ERR 2 D D 5V STANDBY REG ±1% 0.063W 1M00 97872 R24 2 1 5V 2 5V 2 1 C413 97871 100N ±15% 16V TP353 1 TP354 1 1 1 - 1 VDD 1 2 U3 TP355 1 3 2 9000940 LMC7215IM5 R20 97872 1M00 TP351 0.063W ±1% 1 1 Q25 93037 MMBT4403LT1 1 2 D 3V3_STANDBY 2 1 GND + 5 2 TP352 ±1% 0.063W 1K00 97272 R319 1 3 R34 13K0 97299 1% D 2 4 TP876 1 2 TP356 D 2.2V C414 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 2 1 ±1% 0.063W 16K2 9001574 R1 R41 100R 92984 250MW 5% 1 2 5V D2 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA D 1 2 D4 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA 1 RTC_SUPPLY 2 1 2 1 30V_500MA MBR0530T 94543 D5 C1126 9000906 4F -10+30% 2.5V D SUPERCAP CHARGER 3 3 D40 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA TP344 1 1 1 5V_TETHER TP342 1 +15V D38 2 2 SLF6028T-100M1R3 2 D C309 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 94543 30V_500MA 2 D41 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA 1 R97 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 U51 LT1615ES5 97619 D 5 D 4 2 VIN SW 1 TP343 2 C146 9000585 4P7 ±2.5P 50V 1 2 C22 97764 1U0 ±20% 25V 2 1 D39 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA 1 2 C21 97764 1U0 ±20% 25V R98 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% FB 3 GND 1 R38 97863 82K5 0.063W ±1% 1 D Q24 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 4 1 1 ~SHDN 2 TP348 TP350 R4 97862 931K 0.063W ±1% 1 C10 9003430 2U2 ±10% 16V 2 1 1 3 2 1 MBR0530T 1 Q60 9000501 BSS84 1 2 1 L25 97661 10U 1A3 20% TP347 5V TP345 -15V 2 C23 97764 1U0 ±20% 25V TP341 4 1 D 18-Nov-2004 1 CONVERTER_ENABLE 2 R96 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% AUG 4 2004 SIGNATURES DRAWN D DATE AUG 4 NGT TEAM PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD ANALOG MUX SUPPLY MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A D SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD MUX SUPPLY, SUPERCAP CHARGER 38481 ECO No.: B C DRAWING NO. C REV 1008014 E SHEET 15 REL. DATE A SIZE INTERIM REV D OF 22 C A D B U53 98153 TPS2022D 1A_5V 5V_SWITCHED 3V3 2 TP385 1 1 1 6 C318 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 C2+ 1 1 C2- V- 12 T2IN COM1_RXD 10 R2OUT 2 7 T2OUT 8 COM1_TX_DATA R2IN 9 COM1_RX_DATA TP419 R120 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% D 2 Q28 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 R119 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% ~COM1_RTS 13 T1IN ~COM1_CTS 15 R1OUT T1OUT 17 COM1_RTS R1IN 16 COM1_CTS GND/RXD/SCN_TRIG 2A BLM10A121SPT 2 2 +5V POWER BLM21PG221SN1? CONTROL 2 TP422 ~EN L7 5 ~OC L8 GND 96350 200MA +5V POWER 4 +5V POWER 5 USB+/CTS/SOS 96350 200MA 6 TP423 D USB-/TXD/SCN_DATA BLM10A121SPT 1 1 7 1 2 1 GND TP428 R381 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% 1 2 TP397 1 96321 3 1 GND_TETHER_POWER TP395 1 6 L3 1 BLM10A121SPT D 1 D OUT6 1 3V3 TP394 1 C317 97871 100N ±15% 16V 7 D R296 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 8 C11 9003430 2U2 ±10% 16V 1 L6 GND 1 96350 200MA EXT_SCNR_ENA_5V D 9 GND 2 BLM10A121SPT 10 1 D TETHER POWER R115 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% D L10 SCAN_ENABLE 96350 200MA 11 BLM10A121SPT GND/ RTS/ SCN_ACK TP431 1 COM1_TXD TP396 8 OUT7 9002945 FH12-12S-0.5SH 96350 200MA 1 1 2 3 TP151 5 TP384 1 V+ C1- OUT8 IN3 2 TP386 1 C315 97871 100N ±15% 16V VCC C1+ IN2 3 1 1 1 TETHER_POWER_ON 2 2 4 COM1_BUS TP391 2 1 TP393 D 19 2 4 1 2 C316 TP88 97871 100N ±15% 1 16V 1 1 1 TP420 U42 9000933 SP3223EEY TP421 C320 97871 100N ±15% 16V L9 1 2 2 Q30 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 R294 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 TP387 1 C460 97372 10N ±5% 16V C319 1 97871 100N ±15% 2 16V 1 P2 TP429 5V_TETHER_PWR 12 L5 D TETHER ID 1 96350 200MA TETHER_ID PCON_A/D_BUS BLM10A121SPT TP358 1 1 ENABLE V+ 14 4 EXT_SCNR_ENA PLDN8 10 B3 5V_TETHER_PWR COM1_CTS 11 B2 EXT_SCNR_SOS_5V 12 B1 PLDN6 13 B0 B 5V_TETHER TP432 R169 9000928 3K32 0.063W ±1% 5 U32 NC7ST08P5X 9000963 D TP413 PLDN7 7 A3 COM1_TX_DATA 6 A2 1 EXT_SCNR_DATA_5V 5 A1 PLDN5 4 A0 R105 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% EXT_SCNR_DATA_5V 4 EXT_SCNR_ACK 16 EXT_SCNR_ACK_5V 1 2 TVS4 9001547 V0402MHS12 TP424 1 1 2 1 1 1 D 2 TVS3 9001547 V0402MHS12 TP425 8 2 A 1 2 1 C100 97371 100P ±5% 50V 2 2 R168 9000928 3K32 0.063W ±1% 2 1 2 1 C322 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 1 2 R170 9000928 3K32 0.063W ±1% 1 TP438 1 1 9 5V_TETHER_PWR D 5V_TETHER_PWR 1 1 TVS2 9001547 V0402MHS12 TP426 1 2 3 TVS1 9001547 V0402MHS12 1 C99 97371 100P ±5% 50V TP433 2 D TETHER PORT RS-232 TP427 DG409DY-T1 2 D 1 VA+ 9000554 5V_TETHER D 2 SELECT1 2 1 SELECT0 ~EXT_SCNR_TRIG_5V V- D 3 D GND 3 TP415 15 EXT_SCNR_SOS_5V VA1 D C96 97371 100P ±5% 50V 5 TP412 U18 1 TP418 5 U31 NC7ST08P5X 9000963 D 4 1 2 3 18 D C98 97371 100P ±5% 50V TP430 2 2 1 EXT_SCAN GND D D R108 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 2 R297 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 TP444 1 C323 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 R293 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 11 2 ~STATUS ~RX_ENABLE R107 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 ~ONLINE R106 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 1 5V_TETHER_PWR 1 2 14 3V3 ~SHUTDOWN 2 20 TETHER_POWER_ON 1 D TP414 1 U17 2 ENABLE V+ C97 97371 100P ±5% 50V 14 5 TP434 COM1_RTS 11 B2 EXT_SCNR_ACK_5V 12 B1 PLDN3 13 B0 PLDN2 7 A3 6 A2 5 A1 4 A0 1 B 9000988 MSQA6V1W5T2 9 2 D 1 2 A DN2 PLDN1 D R103 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 9000988 MSQA6V1W5T2 D D 8 2 ~EXT_SCNR_TRIG_5V R104 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 TP435 COM1_RX_DATA DN3 2 B3 1 10 PLDN4 2 4 3 1 VA+ DG409DY-T1 TP416 1 2 1 9000554 TP417 1 16 SELECT1 1 SELECT0 V- TETHER PORT 3 D GND 15 U54 97467 74LCX125M EXT_SCNR_DATA 3 VAD R423 97232 EXT_SCNR_DATA_5V 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W 2 PLDN8 R28 97872 1M00 0.063W ±1% 1 U2 C321 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 PLDN7 R27 97872 1M00 0.063W ±1% 1 R109 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 2 PLDN6 2 PLDN5 2 PLDN3 PLDN2 PLDN4 2 R114 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 97232 ~EXT_SCNR_TRIG_5V 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W R113 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 R581 5 4 R112 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 6 1 ~EXT_SCNR_TRIG 1 R111 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 2 74LCX125M R110 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 2 U54 97467 2 3 1 PLDN1 1 1 1 3 9000932 VA+ ADG451BR 2 12 VL V+ 3 S1 D1 1 IN1 13 SCANNER_USB_PLUS 2 1 TP398 U54 97467 D D D D D D D L16 96331 PLP3216S551SL2 TP437 D D 4 3 1 2 74LCX125M 8 EXT_SCNR_SOS R586 9 97232 SCANNER_USB_MINUS EXT_SCNR_SOS_5V 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W 10 1 14 S2 16 IN2 11 S3 D2 15 1 +15V TP436 TP400 D3 2 D48 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA 10 VA+ SCANNER_USB U54 97467 1 9 IN3 6 S4 8 IN4 TP440 1 74LCX125M EXT_SCAN 11 12 TETHER_SEL_1 D4 1 VTP411 2 5 D 2 R116 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% D 1 R117 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% C53 95621 100N ±20% 50V 1 C52 95621 100N ±20% 50V 1 2 C54 95621 100N ±20% 50V 1 C51 95621 100N ±20% 50V 1 2 C55 95621 100N ±20% 50V VA1 2 C313 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 GND TETHER_SEL_0 1 1 D 4 D 2 TP410 2 2 C56 95621 100N ±20% 50V 1 TP439 1 3V3 7 1 13 2 1 D R295 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 1 D49 94543 MBR0530T 30V_500MA VATP442 1 1 D TP441 -15V D TETHER_SEL1 TETHER_SEL_0 TETHER INTERFACE 4 4 0 0 0 1 1 0 ---------------- 18-Nov-2004 AUG 4 2004 TTL SIGNATURES DRAWN RS-232 DATE AUG 4 NGT TEAM 1 1 USB PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD EXTERNAL INTERFACES 38481 ECO No.: B C DRAWING NO. C REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 16 REL. DATE A SIZE INTERIM REV D 22 C A R285 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% 1 TP206 5V_SWITCHED 2 3 FL14 9000989 NEF13PT222Z1E9 2 2 1 1 C333 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 1 5V_SWITCHED TP460 1 1 TP739 1 ~USB_RESET U44 ISP1122ABD 98171 1 2 2 ~OC1 TP746 2 17 ~OC5_~GOC XTAL1 15 DM1 XTAL2 TP160 DP2 1 24 25 1 TP207 DP3 DM4 VREG3_3 DP4 DM5 1 10 DP5 D 18 OPTION_SCL ~PSW2_~GL2 1 2 19 R355 97232 P0RT3_USB_HOST_PLUS 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W 8 9 31 20 1 21 R356 2 3 GND ~PSW5_~GL5_~GPSW 97232 P0RT4_USB_HOST_MINUS 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W 28 5V_SWITCHED R357 30 TP458 13 1 1 14 R31 97872 1M00 0.063W ±1% TP459 97232 P0RT4_USB_HOST_PLUS 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W 1 12 ~PSW3_~GL3 IND_SDA ~PSW4_~GL4 1 TP456 R32 97872 1M00 0.063W ±1% R9 97300 15K0 0.063W ±1% R10 97300 15K0 0.063W ±1% R11 97300 15K0 0.063W ±1% R12 97300 15K0 0.063W ±1% R13 97300 15K0 0.063W ±1% R14 97300 15K0 0.063W ±1% 2 D TP208 1 2 R67 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 1 SP_~BP ~PSW1_~GL1 Q34 9000501 BSS84 TP454 1 32 TP455 TP463 2 3V3 P0RT3_USB_HOST_MINUS 2 D DP0 97232 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W TP453 27 1 2 1 2 1 2 R383 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% DM3 DM0 SCANNER_USB_PLUS 1 26 2 2 29 C332 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 1 1 R361 97234 27R4 0.063W ±1% 2 HOST_USB DM2 ~HUBGL 1 1 11 1 97232 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W 2 1 TP489 2 TP488 SCANNER_USB_MINUS TP878 1 1 1 R155 97276 1K50 0.063W ±1% R359 23 R362 R360 97234 27R4 0.063W ±1% 2 H_USB_PLUS R15 97300 15K0 0.063W ±1% 1 22 2 TP462 H_USB_MINUS DP1 XTAL2 97232 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W D D TP461 16 TP744 7 TP745 XTAL1 1 1 1 2 R358 1 TP452 2 C75 97370 ±5% 50V 18P 1 6 1 2 1 C74 97370 ±5% 50V 18P 1 D ~RESET ~OC4 R410 97453 0R0 0.063W ±5% TP877 TP457 R26 97872 1M00 0.063W ±1% 1 2 R30 97872 1M00 0.063W ±1% 2 3 1 5 1 1 4 SCANNER _USB 4 2 2 R16 97300 15K0 0.063W ±1% ~OC2 1 D 1 VCC ~OC3 TP162 1 1 5V_SWITCHED 3 2 1 TP747 X1 ABMC2-6.0000MHZ-18-R100-D 9003634 2 Q38 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 1 1 ±1% 0.063W 10K0 97296 R300 R306 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 D D TP464 1 TP138 2 2 1 1 D LOW_ENERGY_LATCH 1 D R382 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% 1 R66 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 1 2 C461 97372 10N ±5% 16V C148 1 94054 1U0 ±10% 2 16V 1 2 2 1 OUT 3 1 EN_USB_HUB_PWR IN GND 1 1 Q13 9000501 BSS84 1 R8 97320 Q12 100K 97634 0.063W FDV303N ±1% 25V_350MW 3 ±1% 0.063W 10K0 97296 R316 TP136 D B 1 USB HUB ~EN_USB_PULLUP D AUX PORT POWER 5 MIC_GND 2 1 8 1 2 C129 9003431 22U ±10% 10V 2 MIC_GND OUT1 7 OUT2 6 OUT3 D D D IN1 IN2 5V 2 2 3 C330 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 1 1 Q32 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 R299 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 TP477 1 1 2 5 ~OC 4 ~EN R315 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% D SPEAKER- BEEPER_OUT R615 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% P4_USB_HOST- 11 P0RT4_USB_HOST_PLUS 12 P0RT4_USB_HOST_MINUS 1 Q75 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 2 TP161 1 13 GND MEDIAQ_USB_DEV+ MEDIAQ_USB_DEV- 2 14 MEDIAQ_USB_DEVICE_PLUS 15 MEDIAQ_USB_DEVICE_MINUS P3_USB_HOST- P0RT3_USB_HOST_PLUS 18 P0RT3_USB_HOST_MINUS 3 D D P0RT4_USB_HOST_PLUS,P0RT4_USB_HOST_MINUS 17 LOW_ENERGY_LATCH 1 2 16 GND P3_USB_HOST+ D Q37 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 1 P4_USB_HOST+ R122 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% D 10 GND 1 SPEAKER- 9 BEEPER_OUT GND 1 SPEAKER+ 8 EN_AUX_PORT_PWR D D 7 SPEAKER+ 1 2 CONTROL NC 6 GND C331 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 MIC_IN R124 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 2 4 MIC_IN C462 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 3 EXT_5V_SW 19 GND CONSOLE_RXD CONSOLE_TXD 20 CONSOLE_RXDATA 21 CONSOLE_TXDATA 22 23 CONSOLE COM2_DTR 25 COM2_DCD 26 COM2_DCD COM2_RXDATA 27 COM2_TXDATA 28 COM2_TXDATA COM2_CTS 30 COM2_CTS COM2_EXT_SW_5V 32 COM2_EXT_SW_5V 3V3 MOTION_DET 31 MOTION DETECT P0RT3_USB_HOST_PLUS,P0RT3_USB_HOST_MINUS COM2_RTS 29 COM2_RTS 3V3 EXT_COM2 COM2_EXT_SW_5V AUX_ID 35 TP1 2 CONSOLE_TXD_SEL 40 PCON_PGRM 4 ~MOTION_DETECT 3V3_STANDBY CONSOLE_TXD_SEL 1 TP493 39 GND ~PCON_PGRM 1 2 38 TP94 1 37 GND 5 VCC D 2 PCON_A/D_BUS 36 GND R62 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 34 AUXILARY PORT ID C127 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 33 COM2_EXT_SW_5V 1 3V3_STANDBY GND U85 9000515 NC7SZ125P5X 3 41 MTG TAB 42 MTG TAB R604 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% D TP737 R605 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% C34 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 U100 NC7S04M5 97125 D 4 18-Nov-2004 TP62 AUG 4 2004 1 COM2_DTR COM2_RXDATA MEDIAQ_USB_DEVICE COM2_DSR 24 2 GND COM2_DSR 1 GND 4 1 EXT_5V_SW 2 EXT_5V_SW 3 1.5A MAX 1 EXT_5V_SW TP478 U45 98152 TPS2023D 1A5_5V 1A CONT. TP479 2 J3 FH12-40S-0.5SH 9002946 5 D 1 2 2 4 SIGNATURES DRAWN PROGRAM_PCON DATE AUG 4 NGT TEAM 3 PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO D TO PORT EXTENDER BOARD PCON PROG I/F APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A 38481 ECO No.: B C SIZE DRAWING NO. C INTERIM REV REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 17 REL. DATE A SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD USB HUB & EXT PORT D 22 C A D B 3V3 C423 97871 100N ±15% 16V TP362 1 TP405 1 1 TP407 1 TP406 1 C463 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 U57 97857 SP3243EEA 1 C426 97871 100N ±15% 16V D TP376 C422 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 2 TP365 VDD 28 C1+ 24 C1- TP375 1 2 D 26 TP374 1 1 2 TP364 1 TP373 1 EXT_COM2 C424 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 1 27 TP377 1 1 TP378 1 3 V- TP366 2 C2- TP371 C142 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 1 C2+ 1 TP367 V+ TP363 2 2 1 TP379 2 1 1 TP372 1 TP370 1 COM2 TP369 1 1 COM2_TXDATA 9 T1OUT COM2_RXDATA 4 R1IN COM2_TXD 14 19 COM2_RXD T2IN 13 ~COM2_RTS R5OUT 15 ~COM2_CTS T3IN 12 ~COM2_DTR R4OUT 16 ~COM2_DCD COM2_RTS 10 COM2_CTS 8 COM2_DTR 11 COM2_DCD 7 R4IN COM2_DSR 6 R3IN R3OUT 17 5 R2IN R2OUT 18 R2OUTB 20 T2OUT R5IN 1 T1IN R1OUT T3OUT COM2 PORT RS-232 ~COM2_DSR TP748 1 COM2_EN R202 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 D 22 ~FRC_OFF 23 FRC_ON 3V3 25 GND 1 ~INVALID R200 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 21 D TP380 1 D 1 2 ~COM2_AUTO_ONLINE 2 COM2 PORT POWER 1.5A MAX 1 2 1 R52 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% C464 1 97372 10N ±5% 2 16V C427 97871 100N ±15% 16V C314 1 9003431 22U ±10% 2 10V 1 2 OUT1 8 7 OUT2 6 OUT3 D IN1 2 C428 97871 100N ±15% 16V 3 IN2 1 1 Q5 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 R260 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 2 CONTROL 5 D 2 TP443 1 2 1 ~OC EN_COM2_PWR D R614 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 4 ~EN D D 1 1 GND R60 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% D R616 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% D Q77 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 2 Q76 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 1 1 1 2 NC D 5V 2 COM2_EXT_SW_5V TP409 U64 98152 TPS2023D 1A5_5V 1A CONT. TP408 TP1153 1 1 2 2 LOW_ENERGY_LATCH D D 3 3 1 2 TP471 2 1 D C328 97871 100N ±15% 16V 3 C1+ 1 2 TP468 1 TP469 C1- 7 V- C2- Z T2OUT 9 R2IN 17 T1OUT 16 R1IN A GND 1 TP487 1 TP476 CONSOLE_TXD_SEL 6 SA2_TXD 1 SA2_TXD PCON_CONSOLE_TXD 3 2 D CONSOLE PORT RS-232 6 T2IN 12 R2OUT 10 T1IN 13 R1OUT 15 PCON_CONSOLE 1 2 3V3_STANDBY TP470 1 TP475 TP484 1 2 CONSOLE_RXDATA C325 97871 100N ±15% 16V TP472 5 D CONSOLE_TXDATA B 1 8 SEL VCC 4 1 2 1 2 5 TP473 1 4 1 C2+ U23 NC7SZ157P6X 9000494 2 D C326 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 D12 92642 MMBD914 70V_225MA 1 1 1 V+ VCC 1 TP467 CONSOLE U43 9000933 SP3223EEY 19 D C329 97871 100N ±15% 16V C324 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 C327 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 C465 97372 10N ±5% 16V R123 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 2 COREVDD_EN ~SA2_RESET 3V3_STANDBY R121 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% TP474 1 CONSOLE_RXD TP492 1 2 11 ~STATUS ~ONLINE ~RX_ENABLE 1 14 2 TP466 1 TP491 GND D 1 18 COM3_1_EN 3V3_STANDBY D R303 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% R302 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% Auto-Online Populate R304. Otherwise populate R303 4 TP490 18-Nov-2004 AUG 4 2004 1 SIGNATURES DRAWN R304 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% DATE AUG 4 NGT TEAM PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO 1 1 D 2 2 1 D R301 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 2 4 20 ~SHUTDOWN C107 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 1 C108 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A D D 38481 ECO No.: B C SIZE DRAWING NO. C INTERIM REV REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 18 REL. DATE A SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD CONSOLE & COM2 PORT D 22 C A D B 9000989 6A NFE31PT222Z1E9 1 IN 2 OUT GND 3 HEATER_POWER FL15 TP128 D 1 DC_PWR_IN DC_POWER_IN 1 1 TRACE WIDTH 150 IN 2 OUT 2 TRACEWIDTH=150 FL3 C9 9003428 10U +80%/-20% 50V GND GND 4 D TP752 2 5 TP480 9000989 6 6A 7 1 TRACEWIDTH=100 SMBUS_CLK 8 IN 9 C153 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 SMBUS_DATA 10 BAT_NEG 2 43045-1021 9002940 GND 3 1 1 2 3 C36 9003433 2U2 ±10% 50V EXTERNAL_PWR EXT_PWR 5 6 7 8 1 D50 9000559 MMBZ5248BLT1 18V_225MW 1 Q26 9002936 FDS6675 30V_11A 4 CMP TRACEWIDTH=100 2 OUT BAT_ID R22 97872 1M00 0.063W ±1% D NFE31PT222Z1E9 BAT_POS 1 1 3 GND TRACEWIDTH=150 1 2 3 GND 3 D13 97648 MBRS340T3 TRACEWIDTH=150 40V_3A 2 1 1 9V MIN 15V NOM IMAX = 6A TRACEWIDTH=150 2 DC_PWR_IN 6A NFE31PT222Z1E9 1 9000989 TP753 J4 TP127 TP167 1 FL2 VBAT_MAIN_IN C37 9003433 2U2 ±10% 50V 1 2 D D C151 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 2 TP131 1 D D D C154 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 2 C152 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 2 C149 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 2 TP447 TP749 L43 96350 200MA ±1% 1 D 1 TRACEWIDTH=10 2 BLM10A121SPT D D R99 97331 301K 0.063W ±1% 1 2 I2C_BUS TP445 TP750 L41 96350 200MA 1 1 TRACEWIDTH=10 I2C_SCL R132 97248 100R 0.063W R311 97224 10R0 0.063W ±1% D 2 BAT_ID BLM10A121SPT TP481 TP751 L42 96350 200MA 1 1 TRACEWIDTH=10 BLM10A121SPT 2 I2C_SDA EXTERNAL POWER INRUSH LIMITER R133 97248 100R 0.063W ±1% 2 2 BATTERY INTERFACE HEATER_POWER 2 C42 9003428 10U +80%/-20% 50V 2 C470 95621 100N ±20% 50V 1 D 5V_SWITCHED J1 9003444 FLE-110-01-G-DV-A D 2 HEATER_POWER R126 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 2 1 1 HEATER_POWER TP509 GND 3V3_SWITCHED 4 TP513 1 TP512 BEEPER 3 5 1 GND 6 U10 5 NC7SP08P5X 9001584 1 BEEPER_SIGNAL 1 BEEPER_VOLUME 2 1 1 4 7 1 3 1 1 10 RADIO_HEATER GND 2 R312 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 R313 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 Q41 93037 MMBT4403LT1 1 TP508 3 3 1 3 2 Q3 92525 MMBT3904 40V_225MW 1 C159 97372 10N ±5% 16V 2 R33 97264 475 0.063W ±1% TP510 1 1 2 8 TP756 9 R387 97272 1K00 0.063W ±1% TP507 1 3 EN_RADIO_HEATER 2 C160 97372 10N ±5% 16V 1 1 TP511 1 2 BEEPER_OUT 2 11 D GND D22 92642 MMBD914 70V_225MA 3 1 1 2 C109 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 12 R146 97256 221 0.063W ±1% 13 14 I2C_BUS 15 COMMON I2C_SCL D 16 I2C_SCL I2C_SDA 17 18 3V3_STANDBY 19 C145 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 20 I2C_SDA BEEPER DRIVE GND 3.3V_STANDBY GND 2 D 4 4 D 18-Nov-2004 AUG 4 2004 SIGNATURES DRAWN RADIO HEATER BOARD INTERFACE DATE AUG 4 NGT TEAM PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD INPUT POWER & KEYBOARD INTERFACE 38481 ECO No.: B C DRAWING NO. C REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 19 REL. DATE A SIZE INTERIM REV D 22 C A D B 5V_STANDBY 5V_STANDBY TP494 C429 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 IRQ_BUS TP544 94724 DS8921AM 5 D 2 ~KBD_IRQ 6 TP482 7 2 TP483 2 R211 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% R68 95202 100R 0.063W 1% MTG TAB 26 MTG TAB 25 8 2 4 1 TP541 3 R323 4K70 97288 63MW 1% TP758 VCC 1 GND 1 5 2 R201 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% D 4 1VCC 1 2 U47 D 1 5V_STANDBY 1 3V3_STANDBY C452 97871 100N ±15% 16V 32KHZ_TX_B 2 1 24 32KHZ_RX_B 23 32KHZ_RX_A 32KHZ_TX_A 1 1 GND GND 22 U62 9000515 NC7SZ125P5X KBD_INT_B 3 KBD_INT_B 21 KBD_INT_A KBD_INT_A 20 D GND 19 TXRX_SCL 18 17 U77 9002950 ISL6121LIB-T 3V3_STANDBY TXRX_SDA GND 16 TP540 ~KEYBOARD DETECT IN 15 2 3 4 ~EXT_KYBD_DETECT 1 VIN1 OUT1 VIN2 OUT2 ~EN OUT3 GND ~FAULT 6 3.3V_SWITCHED 13 8 12 5V_SWITCHED 5 C290 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 D U76 3V3_SWITCHED 3.3V_STANDBY 14 7 9002950 ISL6121LIB-T 2 TP539 2 C287 97371 100P ±5% 50V C288 97371 1 100P ±5% 2 50V C289 97371 1 100P ±5% 2 50V 1 C284 97371 1 100P ±5% 50V 2 1 2 C283 97371 100P ±5% 50V C281 97371 1 100P ±5% 50V 2 C282 97371 1 100P ±5% 2 50V 1 2 11 C280 97371 100P ±5% 50V 5V_SWITCHED 5V STANDBY 10 EL_COMMAND 9 GND 8 2 3 4 1 EXTERNAL KEYBOARD INTERFACE VIN1 OUT1 VIN2 OUT2 ~EN OUT3 GND ~FAULT 6 D D D D D D D D D 6 4 9002950 ISL6121LIB-T 2 3 4 1 TP538 VIN1 OUT1 VIN2 OUT2 ~EN OUT3 GND ~FAULT GND 5 5 U74 32KHZ GND 8 D 5V_SWITCHED GND 7 7 C279 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 6 2 3V3_STANDBY 5 D 2 VCC TP134 8 3 SYSPWR 2 SYSPWR 1 C143 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 7 ~KEYBOARD DETECT OUT SYSPWR J8 9002930 FH12-24S-0.5SH TP133 D 5 D ~EXT_KYBD_PWR_EN 2 2 4 2 D U75 9002950 ISL6121LIB-T 5V_STANDBY 2 3 4 1 1 TP495 VIN1 OUT1 VIN2 OUT2 ~EN OUT3 GND ~FAULT GND 3 6 TP536 U58 9000515 NC7SZ125P5X 3V3_STANDBY 7 1 8 5 TP130 2 D R612 4K70 97288 0.063W 1% D TP506 TP534 TP524 L48 3V3_STANDBY 3V3_STANDBY 96350 200MA BLM10A121SPT 26 1 C453 97871 100N ±15% 16V 1 5 VCC 2 2 25 R322 4K70 97288 0.063W 1% INT_32KHZ TP505 TP525 L47 D 96350 200MA INT_KBD_INT 2 4 GND INT_TXRX_SCL 1 3 TP519 1 C105 97871 100N ±15% 16V U82 NC7S04M5 97125 5 D INT_TXRX_SDA 2 D 4 INT_EL_COMMAND 2 3 3 2 D 4 1 8 RY_SCL SY_SCL TY_SCL SX_SDA RX_SDA TXD_SDA VCC 1 R320 4K70 97288 1% 2 R321 4K70 97288 1% TP526 L46 96350 200MA 6 BLM10A121SPT 5 TP527 TP501 L45 2 96350 TP499 7 I2C_SDA 5V_STANDBY GND TP504 1 TP500 I2C_SCL GND 23 32KHz 22 GND 21 BUFF_KBD_INT 20 GND 19 TxRx_SCL 18 GND 17 TxRx_SDA 16 GND 15 EL_COMMAND 14 GND GND 13 5V_STANDBY D I2C_BUS MTG TAB 24 BLM10A121SPT 3V3_STANDBY U61 9000515 NC7SZ125P5X MTG TAB 200MA 3 BLM10A121SPT TP503 9002929 P82B96TD U14 C433 97871 100N ±15% 16V 3 12 3.3V_SWITCHED 11 3.3V_STANDBY 10 NC 9 SYSPWR 8 SYSPWR 7 SYSPWR 6 SYSPWR 5 NC 4 5V_SWITCHED 3 5V_SWITCHED 2 NC 1 5V STANDBY TP528 L44 96350 200MA C278 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 3V3 BLM10A121SPT D TP759 C454 97871 100N ±15% 16V 2 TP529 1 3V3_SWITCHED L32 5 2 96321 2A D 1 VCC J6 9002930 FH12-24S-0.5SH C277 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 2 C215 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 2 2 C206 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 2 C161 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 2 D C158 97371 1 100P ±5% 50V 2 1 2 D D 2 C210 97371 100P ±5% 50V 1 D D C155 97371 100P ±5% 50V D D D 1 BLM21PG221SN1? D 2 EL_COMMAND 4 TP530 3V3_STANDBY 96321 2A 1 GND 3 2 U63 9000515 NC7SZ125P5X BLM21PG221SN1? HEATER_POWER TP523 TP531 1 2 4 INTERNAL KEYBOARD INTERFACE L28 C116 9003428 10U +80%/-20% 50V D D Q7 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 TP548 R288 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 2 3 96321 2A 1 KYBD_HEATER_POWER 2 D 1 1 2 L31 1 R391 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 5 6 7 8 INT_KYBD_HEATER_POWER BLM21PG221SN1? 4 TP757 4 Q33 9002936 FDS6675 30V_11A 5V_SWITCHED TP532 L30 18-Nov-2004 96321 2A 1 AUG 4 2004 2 SIGNATURES DRAWN BLM21PG221SN1? 1 2 5V_STANDBY L29 1 D PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO 96321 2A 2 BLM21PG221SN1? APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD KEYBOARD INTERFACE SIZE DRAWING NO. 1 38481 ECO No.: D B C C INTERIM REV REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 20 REL. DATE A AUG 4 CHKD TP533 2 R61 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% DATE NGT TEAM 1 KEYBOARD_HEATER_EN D 22 C D B 1 C39 9003429 10U +80%/-20% 16V 2 2 1 1 C38 95621 100N ±20% 50V 1 R191 TDO_ASIC 5V 2 4 ~ACLINK_RESETB TP629 5 1 ACLINK_SYNC TP632 R598 97232 1 2 1 7 8 ACLINK_SDATAOUT 9 97232 ASIC_TDI 1 CPU_TDO 1 CPU_TDI 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W TP557 1 TP566 TP163 5V R189 TDO_CPU ~ACLINK_RESETB 97232 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W ACLINK_BITCLK R619 97232 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W ACLINK_SYNC 1 ACLINK_SDATAIN ACLINK_SDATAIN TP631 1 1 TDI 22R1 ±1% 0.063W ACLINK_SYNC R102 TDI_ASIC 5V TP627 6 ASIC_TDO 5V ~ACLINK_RESETB ACLINK_BITCLK 1 2 22R1 ±1% 0.063W AC_LINK 3 97232 ~TRST 1 D ACLINK_BITCLK R344 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% J11 9003444 FLE-110-01-G-DV-A D TP633 3V3 R343 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 2 2 3V3 R342 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 3V3 2 1 R624 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 1 JTAG_BUS R623 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% TP564 3V3 1 2 5V 1 1 TP567 3V3 2 A 1 TMS TP558 TP559 TP560 ACLINK_SDATAIN 1 1 TCK TP561 ACLINK_SDATAOUT ACLINK_SDATAOUT TP630 1 TP663 10 1 11 1 GND 1 MIC_IN 1 12 1 13 14 2 GND MIC_GND GND 2 15 SPEAKER- 16 17 SPEAKER+ 18 PWR_AMP_ON TP556 D 1 MIC_GND TP664 C117 97371 100P ±5% 50V TP244 MIC_IN R93 97244 68R1 0.063W ±1% SPEAKERD GND SPEAKER+ GND 2 19 AUDIO_EN 20 2 AUDIO_EN GND TDI TDO_CPU TDO_ASIC PXA250 D AUDIO BOARD INTERFACE JTAG I/F 3 3 P4 CON_2X1 P9 CON_2X1 1 1 2 2 P5 CON_2X1 P8 CON_2X1 1 1 2 2 D D 4 4 JUMPERS FOR SCOPE PROBE GROUNDING 18-Nov-2004 AUG 4 2004 SIGNATURES DRAWN DATE AUG 4 PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD AUDIO / J-TAG INTERFACE 38481 ECO No.: OTHER Scale N/A B C DRAWING NO. C REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 21 REL. DATE A SIZE INTERIM REV D 22 C A D B TP142 1 HEATER_POWER 2 C19 9003428 10U ±10% 50V 1 2 C103 95621 100N ±20% 50V 2 1 1 1 R197 97296 10K0 0.063W ±1% 1 D 1 2 3 Q23 97634 FDV303N 25V_350MW 3 TP126 5 6 7 8 TP144 1 4 Q36 9002936 FDS6675 30V_11A TP145 1 1 MLB_HEATER_EN 2 1 MLB_HEATER_POWER 2 D 1 1 R64 97320 100K 0.063W ±1% 1 R335 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 D 2 1 R336 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R337 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R338 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R339 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R340 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R351 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R350 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R346 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R345 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R341 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R372 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R371 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R354 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R353 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R352 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R389 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R386 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R385 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R384 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R380 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R402 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R401 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R400 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R394 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R393 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R407 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R406 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R405 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R404 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R403 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R418 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R412 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R411 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R409 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R408 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R425 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R422 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R421 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R420 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R419 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R430 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R429 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R428 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R427 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R426 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R434 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R433 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R432 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 R431 4K70 97288 63MW 1% D 1 R484 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 2 1 R478 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R479 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R480 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R481 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R482 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R483 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R477 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R476 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R475 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R474 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R473 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R472 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R471 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R470 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R469 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R468 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R467 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R466 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R465 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R464 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R463 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R462 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R461 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R460 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R459 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R458 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R457 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R456 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R455 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R454 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R453 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R452 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R451 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R450 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R449 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R448 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R447 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R446 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R445 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R444 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R443 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R442 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R440 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R441 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R439 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R436 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R437 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R438 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% R435 4K70 97288 63MW 1% D 2 2 1 2 1 R534 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R533 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R532 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R531 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R530 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R528 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R529 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R527 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R526 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R525 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R524 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R523 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R522 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R521 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R520 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R519 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R518 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R517 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R516 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R515 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R514 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R513 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R512 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R511 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R510 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R509 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R508 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R507 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R506 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R505 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R504 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R503 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R502 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R501 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R500 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R499 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R498 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R497 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R496 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R495 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R494 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R493 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R492 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R491 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R490 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R489 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R488 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R487 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R486 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 R485 4K70 97288 63MW 1% D 1 2 1 R327 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R326 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R325 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R324 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R580 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R578 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R579 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R577 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R576 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R575 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R574 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R573 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R572 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R571 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R570 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R569 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R568 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R567 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R566 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R565 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R564 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R563 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R562 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R561 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R560 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R559 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R558 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R557 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R556 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R555 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R554 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% R553 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 1 2 1 R552 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R551 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R550 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R549 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R548 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R547 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R546 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R545 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R544 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R543 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R542 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R541 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R540 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R539 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R538 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R537 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R536 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% R535 4K70 97288 63MW 1% D 1 2 1 R334 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R333 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 2 1 R332 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R331 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R330 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% 1 R329 4K70 97288 63MW 2 1% R328 4K70 97288 63MW 1% 3 3 D MLB HEATER 4 18-Nov-2004 4 AUG 4 2004 SIGNATURES DRAWN DATE AUG 4 NGT TEAM PSION TEKLOGIX INC 2003 CHKD MISSISSAUGA ONTARIO APPVD TITLE PROJ ENG CODE IDENT. No. OTHER Scale N/A 38481 ECO No.: B C SIZE DRAWING NO. C INTERIM REV REV 1008014 E SHEET OF 22 REL. DATE A SCHEMATIC 8525/30 MAIN LOGIC BOARD HEATER CONTROL D 22 INFORMATION DOCUMENT RELATING TO VCA JOB NUMBER EAE059966 RELATING TO TYPE APPROVAL OF AN ESA WITH RESPECT TO ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (72/245/EEC) AS LAST AMENDED BY 95/54/EC. _______________________________________________________________________ Appendix 2 Test Report Serial Number RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A 18-Nov-2004 INFORMATION DOCUMENT RELATING TO VCA JOB NUMBER EAE059966 RELATING TO TYPE APPROVAL OF AN ESA WITH RESPECT TO ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (72/245/EEC) AS LAST AMENDED BY 95/54/EC. _______________________________________________________________________ This page has been left intentionally blank. 18-Nov-2004 TEST REPORT FROM RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test of: Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. To: 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. Test Report Serial No: RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A VCA Job No.: EAE059966 This Test Report Is Issued Under The Authority Of Richard Jacklin, Operations Director: Checked By: Alex McKay Tested By: Phil Mantle Report Copy No: PDF01 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Test Dates: 14 September 2004 This report is issued in Adobe Acrobat portable document format (PDF). It is only a valid copy of the report if it is being viewed in PDF format with the following security options not allowed: Changing the document, Selecting text and graphics, Adding or changing notes and form fields. Furthermore, the date of creation must match the issue date stated above. This report may be copied in full. The results in this report apply only to the sample(s) tested. RFI Global Services Ltd Pavilion A, Ashwood Park, Ashwood Way, Basingstoke, Hampshire RG23 8BG Telephone: +44 (0)1256 312000 Facsimile: +44 (0)1256 312001 Email: [email protected] Website: www.rfi-global.com Registered in England and Wales. Company number: 2117901 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 2 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. This page has been left intentionally blank. 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 3 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. Table of Contents 1. Client Information ............................................................................................................................ 4 2. Equipment Under Test (EUT) .......................................................................................................... 5 3. Test Specification, Methods & Procedures ................................................................................... 8 4. Deviations from the Test Specification.......................................................................................... 9 5. Operation of the EUT During Testing........................................................................................... 10 6. Summary of Test Results .............................................................................................................. 11 7. Measurements, Examinations and Derived Results ................................................................... 12 8. Measurement Uncertainty ............................................................................................................. 17 9. Measurement Methods .................................................................................................................. 18 Appendix 1. Test Equipment Used ................................................................................................... 20 Appendix 2. Test Configuration Drawings....................................................................................... 21 Appendix 3. Graphical Test Results................................................................................................. 24 Appendix 4 Photographs of EUT ...................................................................................................... 26 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 4 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. 1. Client Information Company Name: Psion Teklogix Inc. Address: 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario L5N 7J9 Canada Contact Name: Mr S Dharwarkar Telephone No: 1 905 812 6200 E-mail: [email protected] 1.1. Manufacturer’s Details Company Name: Psion Teklogix Inc. Address: 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario L5N 7J9 Canada Contact Name: Mr S Dharwarkar Telephone No: 1 905 812 6200 E-mail: [email protected] 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 5 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. 2. Equipment Under Test (EUT) The following information (with the exception of the Date of Receipt) has been supplied by the client: 2.1. Identification of Equipment Under Test (EUT) Brand Name: Psion Teklogix Model Name or Number: 8525 Unique Type Identification: ENG-B TC 027 Serial Number: None Stated Country of Manufacture: Canada Date of Receipt: 13 September 2004 2.2. Description of EUT The equipment under test is a Vehicle Mounted Computer Terminal. 2.3. Modifications Incorporated in the EUT During the course of testing the EUT was not modified. 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 6 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. 2.4. Additional Information Related To Testing Type of ESA: Mobile (Vehicular Use, powered via regulated Supply) Weight: 4.1 Kg Dimensions: 30 (W) x 30 (L) x 12 (H) cm Transmit Output Power Characteristics: LAN 32mW Bluetooth 1mW Transmitter LAN 2412 MHz Receiver LAN 2414 MHz Transmitter Bluetooth 2.402 GHz to 2.480 GHz Receiver Bluetooth 2.402 GHz to 2.480 GHz Transmitter LAN 2412 MHz Receiver LAN 2412 MHz Transmitter Bluetooth 2.402 GHz to 2.480 GHz Receiver Bluetooth 2.402 GHz to 2.480 GHz Alignment Range: Allocated (Test) Frequency: Power Supply Requirement: DC Supply (Volts) 24V AC Supply (Volts) Not Applicable Internal Battery Supply (Volts) Not Applicable Electrical System Rated Voltage: the device can be connected to, can be any voltage between 10 VDC to 90 VDC (i.e. 12 , 24, 48, or 72 VDC) Grounding Polarity: negative Intended Operating Environment: Vehicular Cycle Time: Less than 1sec. Class (Short Range Devices Only): Class 2 (Inconvenience to persons, which cannot simply be overcome by other means) "The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by RFI Global Services Ltd. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners." 2.5. Port Identification Port Description Type 1 Enclosure - Applicable Y 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 7 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. 2.6. Support Equipment Description: Laptop Computer Brand Name: Dell Model Name or Number: Inspiron 3500 Serial Number: 0001600V-12961-9BR-2122 Cable Length And Type: Not Applicable Connected to Port: Not Applicable Description: Wireless LAN Adaptor Brand Name: Cisco Systems Model Name or Number: Aironet 350 Series Serial Number: 00097CAE5F42 Cable Length And Type: Note Applicable Connected to Port: Laptop Description: Bluetooth Card Brand Name: Socket Model Name or Number: Socket Bluetooth Card Serial Number: 0210011874 Cable Length And Type: Not Applicable Connected to Port: Laptop 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 8 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. 3. Test Specification, Methods & Procedures 3.1. Test Specification Reference: 95/54/EC: 31st October 1995 Title: Commission Directive 95/54/EC of 31st October 1995 adapting to technical progress Council Directive 72/245/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the suppression of radio interference produced by spark-ignition engines fitted to motor vehicles and amending Directive 70/156/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to the type-approval of motor vehicles and their trailers. Purpose of Test: To determine whether the equipment complies with the requirements of the relevant annexes of the specification. 3.2. Methods and Procedures The methods and procedures used for parts of 95/54/EC: 1995 were as detailed in: Annex Title Annex VII Method of Measurement of Broadband Electromagnetic Emissions From Electrical/Electronic Sub-Assemblies Annex VIII Method of Measurement of Narrowband Electromagnetic Emissions From Electrical/Electronic Sub-Assemblies 3.3. Definition of Measurement Equipment The measurement equipment used complied with the requirements of the annexes referenced in the Methods & Procedures section above. Appendix 1 contains a list of the test equipment used. 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 9 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. 4. Deviations from the Test Specification None. 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 10 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. 5. Operation of the EUT During Testing 5.1. Operating Conditions The EUT was tested in a normal laboratory environment. During testing, the EUT was powered using a +24.0V ±10% DC supply with a ripple voltage of less than 1.5%. 5.2. Operating Modes During testing, the EUT was operated in the following mode(s): Mode 1 : Active. A Bluetooth link was established between the EUT and laptop. Also “Pinging” of data from EUT to laptop over the 80211B Wireless LAN. 5.3. Configuration and Peripherals During testing, the EUT was configured in the following way: Please see Schematic Diagram 001 in Appendix 2. 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 11 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. 6. Summary of Test Results 6.1. Summary of Tests Test Name Section Port Type Compliancy Status Radiated Narrowband Emissions Annex VIII Enclosure Complied Radiated Broadband Emissions Annex VII Enclosure Complied 6.2. Location of Tests All the measurements described in this report were performed at the premises of RFI Global Services Ltd, Ewhurst Park, Ramsdell, Basingstoke, Hampshire, RG26 5RG, England. 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 12 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. 7. Measurements, Examinations and Derived Results 7.1. General Comments 7.1.1. This section contains test results only. Details of the test methods and procedures can be found in section 9 of this report. 7.1.2. Measurement uncertainties are evaluated in accordance with current best practice. Our reported expanded uncertainties are based on standard uncertainties which are multiplied by an appropriate coverage factor to provide a statistical confidence level of approximately 95%. Please refer to Section 8 for details of measurement uncertainties. 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 13 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. 7.2. Radiated Narrowband Emissions 7.2.1. Electric Field Strength Measurements (Frequency Range: 30 to 1000 MHz) 7.2.1.1. Plots of the initial scans can be found in Appendix 3. 7.2.1.2. The following table lists frequencies at which emissions were measured using a peak detector, at a test distance of 1 meter (results incorporate antenna factors and cable losses): Results: Frequency (MHz) Line Peak Level (dBµV) Limit (dBµV) Margin (dB) Note(s) Result 45.000 Horiz. 25.00 47.60 22.60 - Complied 45.000 Vert. 25.70 47.60 21.90 - Complied 65.000 Horiz. 20.30 43.60 23.30 - Complied 65.000 Vert. 20.00 43.60 23.60 - Complied 87.000 Horiz. 23.50 44.90 21.40 - Complied 87.000 Vert. 24.50 44.90 20.50 - Complied 119.811 Horiz. 27.70 45.10 17.40 - Complied 119.811 Vert. 27.90 45.10 17.20 - Complied 120.000 Horiz. 27.20 45.10 17.90 - Complied 120.000 Vert. 26.60 45.10 18.50 - Complied 150.000 Horiz. 26.30 46.60 20.30 - Complied 150.000 Vert. 26.90 46.60 19.70 - Complied 190.000 Horiz. 24.50 48.10 23.60 - Complied 190.000 Vert. 25.00 48.10 23.10 - Complied 231.000 Horiz. 25.20 51.39 26.19 - Complied 231.000 Vert. 24.50 51.39 26.89 - Complied 280.000 Horiz. 27.00 50.70 23.70 - Complied 280.000 Vert. 27.00 50.70 23.70 - Complied 380.000 Horiz. 30.560 52.70 22.20 - Complied 380.000 Vert. 31.20 52.70 21.50 - Complied 400.853 Horiz. 31.60 53.00 21.40 - Complied 400.853 Vert. 31.30 53.00 21.70 - Complied 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 14 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. Radiated Narrowband Emissions (Continued) Frequency (MHz) Line Peak Level (dBµV) Limit (dBµV) Margin (dB) Note(s) Result 450.000 Horiz. 33.60 53.00 19.40 - Complied 450.000 Vert. 32.70 53.00 20.30 - Complied 600.000 Horiz. 36.90 53.00 16.10 - Complied 600.000 Vert. 37.60 53.00 15.40 - Complied 750.000 Horiz. 40.10 53.00 12.90 - Complied 750.000 Vert. 40.40 53.00 12.60 - Complied 890.848 Horiz. 43.10 53.00 9.90 - Complied 890.848 Vert. 44.40 53.00 8.60 - Complied 900.000 Horiz. 43.40 53.00 9.60 - Complied 900.000 Vert. 43.80 53.00 9.20 - Complied 937.733 Horiz. 50.10 53.00 2.90 1 Complied 937.733 Vert. 52.20 53.00 0.80 1 Complied Note(s): 1. The measured result is within the test standard limit by a margin less than the measurement uncertainty; it is therefore not possible to state compliance based on the 95% level of confidence. However, the result indicates that compliance is more probable than non-compliance. 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 15 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. 7.3. Radiated Broadband Emissions 7.3.1. Electric Field Strength Measurements (Frequency Range: 30 to 1000 MHz) 7.3.1.1. Plots of the initial scans can be found in Appendix 3. 7.3.1.2. The following table lists frequencies at which emissions were measured using a Quasi-Peak detector, at a test distance of 1 meter (results incorporate antenna factors and cable losses): Results: Frequency (MHz) Line Quasi Peak Level (dBµV) Limit (dBµV) Margin (dB) Note(s) Result 45.000 Horiz. 22.50 57.60 35.10 - Complied 45.000 Vert. 22.90 57.60 34.70 - Complied 65.000 Horiz. 17.90 53.60 35.70 - Complied 65.000 Vert. 17.70 53.60 35.90 - Complied 87.000 Horiz. 21.30 54.97 33.60 - Complied 87.000 Vert. 21.20 54.97 33.70 - Complied 119.811 Horiz. 25.10 55.07 30.00 - Complied 119.811 Vert. 24.90 55.07 30.20 - Complied 120.000 Horiz. 24.50 55.10 30.60 - Complied 120.000 Vert. 24.70 55.10 30.40 - Complied 150.000 Horiz. 24.40 56.00 32.20 - Complied 150.000 Vert. 24.80 56.00 31.80 - Complied 190.000 Horiz. 22.80 58.10 35.30 - Complied 190.000 Vert. 23.10 58.10 35.00 - Complied 231.000 Horiz. 22.70 61.39 38.69 - Complied 231.000 Vert. 23.00 61.39 38.39 - Complied 280.000 Horiz. 25.70 60.70 35.00 - Complied 280.000 Vert. 25.50 60.70 35.20 - Complied 380.000 Horiz. 28.80 62.70 33.90 - Complied 380.000 Vert. 28.80 62.70 33.90 - Complied 400.853 Horiz. 29.60 63.00 33.40 - Complied 400.853 Vert. 29.60 63.00 33.40 - Complied 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 16 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. Radiated Broadband Emissions (Continued) Frequency (MHz) Line Quasi Peak Level (dBµV) Limit (dBµV) Margin (dB) Note(s) Result 450.000 Horiz. 31.30 63.00 31.70 - Complied 450.000 Vert. 31.30 63.00 31.70 - Complied 600.000 Horiz. 34.90 63.00 28.10 - Complied 600.000 Vert. 35.10 63.00 27.90 - Complied 750.000 Horiz. 38.60 63.00 24.40 - Complied 750.000 Vert. 38.60 63.00 24.40 - Complied 890.848 Horiz. 41.10 63.00 21.90 - Complied 890.848 Vert. 41.10 63.00 22.00 - Complied 900.000 Horiz. 41.30 63.00 21.70 - Complied 900.000 Vert. 41.30 63.00 21.70 - Complied 937.733 Horiz. 45.60 63.00 17.40 - Complied 937.733 Vert. 44.60 63.00 18.40 - Complied 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 17 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. 8. Measurement Uncertainty 8.1. No measurement or test can ever be perfect and the imperfections give rise to error of measurement in the results. Consequently, the result of a measurement is only an approximation to the value of the measurand (the specific quantity subject to measurement) and is only complete when accompanied by a statement of the uncertainty of the approximation. 8.2. The expression of uncertainty of a measurement result allows realistic comparison of results with reference values and limits given in specifications and standards. 8.3. The uncertainty of the result may need to be taken into account when interpreting the measurement results. 8.4. The reported expanded uncertainties below are based on a standard uncertainty multiplied by an appropriate coverage factor, such that a confidence level of approximately 95% is maintained. For the purposes of this document “approximately” is interpreted as meaning “effectively” or “for most practical purposes”. Measurement Type Range Confidence Level Calculated Uncertainty Radiated Emissions: Electric Field Strength 30 MHz to 1000 MHz @1m 95% ± 6.32 dB 8.5. The methods used to calculate the above uncertainties are in line with those recommended within the various measurement specifications. Where measurement specifications do not include guidelines for the evaluation of measurement uncertainty, the published guidance of the appropriate accreditation body is followed. 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 18 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. 9. Measurement Methods 9.1. Radiated Narrow Band Emissions: Annex VIII. 9.1.1. These measurements were performed in accordance with the standard, against appropriate limits for narrow band emissions using an average detector. 9.1.2. Initial scans covering the entire band in a shielded enclosure were performed in order to identify frequencies on which the EUT was generating interference. This determined the frequencies on which the EUT should be re-measured in full on the open area test site. A peak detector was used in conjunction with the appropriate detector IF measuring bandwidth (see table below), repetitive scans were performed to allow for emissions with low repetition rates, and for the duty cycle of the EUT. The test configuration was the same for the initial scans as for the final measurements on a 1.0m high non-conducting table, (this table may or may not have an earthed metallic ground plane, depending on the earthing requirements of the EUT). These initial scans were performed with the antenna in both horizontal and vertical polarisations. 9.1.3. All measurements were performed using an antenna height of 1.05 m and a measurement distance of 1.0 m (measured from the table edge to the nearest point of the measuring antenna). Following the initial scans, graphs were produced giving an overview of the emissions from the EUT plotted against the appropriate specification limit. A tolerance line was set 10 dB below the reference limit and levels above this were re-tested on the open area test site using a measuring receiver with a peak detector. 9.1.4. For the main (final) measurements the EUT was arranged on a 1.0m high non-conducting table, (this table may or may not have an earthed metallic ground plane, depending on the earthing requirements of the EUT), on an open area test site as detailed in the specification. 9.1.5. All measurements on the open area test site were performed with a broadband antenna. 9.1.6. The test equipment settings for radiated narrowband emissions measurements were as follows: Receiver Function Initial Scan Final Measurements Detector Type: Peak Peak Mode: Max Hold Not applicable Bandwidth: 120 kHz 120 kHz Amplitude Range: 60 dB 20 dB Measurement Time: Not applicable >1s Observation Time: Not applicable > 15 s Step Size: Continuous sweep Not applicable Sweep Time: Coupled Not applicable 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 19 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. 9.2. Radiated Broad Band Emissions: Annex VII. 9.2.1. These measurements were performed in accordance with the standard, against appropriate limits for a Quasi Peak detector. 9.2.2. All measurements were performed with an antenna height of 1.15m and a measurement distance of 1.0 m (measured from the table edge to the nearest point of the measuring antenna) using a measuring receiver incorporating a Quasi Peak detector. 9.2.3. The frequencies to be measured were determined by the spot frequencies given in the specification and from the spurious emissions observed during the pre-scan stage of the narrowband emissions test. 9.2.4. For the main (final) measurements the EUT was arranged on a 1.0m high non-conducting table, (this table may or may not have an earthed metallic ground plane, depending on the earthing requirements of the EUT) on an open area test site, as detailed in the specification. 9.2.5. All measurements on the open area test site were performed with a broadband antenna. 9.2.6. The test equipment settings for radiated broadband emissions measurements were as follows: Receiver Function Final Measurements Detector Type: Quasi Peak Bandwidth: 120 kHz Amplitude Range: 20 dB Measurement Time: >1s Observation Time: > 15 s 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 20 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. To: Appendix 1. Test Equipment Used RFI No. Instrument Manufacturer Type No. Serial No. A051 ESH3-Z6 V-Network Rohde & Schwarz ESH3-Z6 892 563/007 A052 ESH3-Z6 V-Network Rohde & Schwarz ESH3-Z6 892 563/008 A1306 N-Type Connector Narda 370 BNM 0210 A1307 N-Type Connector Narda 370 BNM 0210 A259 Bilog Antenna Chase CBL6111 1513 A276 OATS Positioning Controller Rohde & Schwarz HCC A392 3 dB attenuator (9) Suhner 6803.17.B None A459 Bi-log Antenna Chase CBL6111A 1593 A553 Bi-log Antenna Chase CBL6111A 1593 C320 Cable Rosenberger UFA 210A-10788-50x50 96A0123 C341 Cable Andrews None None C461 Cable Rosenberger UFA210A-11182-704704 98H0305 C468 N-Type Coaxial Cable Rosenberger UFA210A-13937-504504 98L0440 M003 Spectrum Monitor Rohde & Schwarz EZM 883 580/008 M044 ESVP Receiver Rohde & Schwarz ESVP 891 845/026 M088 Receiver / Spectrum Analyser System Rohde & Schwarz ESBI DU:835862/018 RU:835387/006 M209 Thermo/hygro meter RS Components RS212-124 M209-RS212-124 M244 Thermometer/Baromet er/Hygrometer Oregan Scientific BA 116 None S201 Site 1 RFI 1 S212 Site 12 RFI 12 NB In accordance with UKAS requirements, all the measurement equipment is on a calibration schedule. 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 21 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. Appendix 2. Test Configuration Drawings This appendix contains the following drawings: Drawing Reference Number Title DRG\46573JD02\001 Test configuration for measurement of radiated emissions DRG\46573JD02\002 Schematic diagram of the EUT, support equipment and wiring harness 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 22 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. DRG\46573JD02\001 1.0m high table with earthed metallic top with 50mm spacer if necessary DC Supply LISNs/ Support EUT 100mm 200mm Harness or 1.5m cabling 1.0m (From nearest part of table to: 1) Phase Centre of Bicon Antenna 2) Tip of Log Periodic Antenna or 3) Calibration Point of Bilog Antenna) Receiving antenna 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 23 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. DRG\46573JD02\002 Configuration of EUT and Local Support Equipment Integral Antennas 8525 EUT Antenna To 24V DC Supply - RF Air Link + Antenna Laptop LAN Adaptor and Bluetooth Card Configuration of Remote Support Equipment 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 24 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. Appendix 3. Graphical Test Results This appendix contains the following graphs which are not included in the total number of pages for this report. Graph Reference Number Title GPH\46573JD02\001 Mode 1: Active 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 25 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. GPH\46573JD02\001 Mode 1: Active 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 26 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. Appendix 4 Photographs of EUT This appendix contains the following photographs: Photo Reference Number Title PHT/46573JD02/001 Rear View of OATS Set Up PHT/46573JD02/002 Side View of OATS Set Up PHT/46573JD02/003 Side View of OATS Set Up, Showing EUT PHT/46573JD02/004 View of EUT and Loom 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 27 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. PHT/46573JD02/001 Rear View of OATS Set Up 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 28 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. PHT/46573JD02/002 Side View of OATS Set Up 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 29 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. PHT/46573JD02/003 Side View of OATS Set Up, Showing EUT 18-Nov-2004 RFI GLOBAL SERVICES LTD Test Of: To: TEST REPORT S.No. RFI/EMCE1/RP46573JD02A Page 30 of 30 Issue Date: 05 November 2004 Psion Teklogix Inc. Vehicle Mount Terminal Model: 8525. 95/54/EC: 1995 ESA Approval Annex VII and Annex VIII. PHT/46573JD02/004 View of EUT and Loom 18-Nov-2004
